Patent Publication Number: US-7586953-B2

Title: Method for monitoring a communication media access schedule of a communication controller of a communication system

Description:
This application is a continuation of PCT/EP03/04001 filed on Apr. 16, 2003 and claims Paris Convention priority of EP 02 008 171.7 and DE 102 16 984.5 both filed on Apr. 16, 2002 the entire disclosure of which are all hereby incorporated by reference. 
    
    
     BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 
     In general, the present invention relates to communication systems based on time triggered message exchange incorporating measures for error containment in the time domain using a bus guardian for each node of the communication system. 
     In particular, the present invention refers to a method for monitoring a communication media access schedule of a communication controller of a communication system by means of a bus guardian. The communication system comprises a communication media and nodes connected to the communication media. Each node comprises a communication controller and a bus guardian assigned to the communication controller. Messages are transmitted among the nodes across the communication media based on a time triggered communication media access scheme. Of course, a node may comprise further components, such as a host controller. 
     Further, the invention refers to a computer program, which is able to run on a computer, in particular on a microprocessor. 
     Furthermore, the present invention refers to a bus guardian assigned to a communication controller of one of a number of nodes connected to a communication media. Messages are transmitted among the nodes across the communication media based on a cyclic time triggered communication media access scheme. The one node comprises a communication controller and the bus guardian. The bus guardian has means for monitoring the communication media access schedule of the communication controller. 
     Moreover, the invention refers to one of a number of nodes connected to a communication media. The node comprises a communication controller and a bus guardian assigned to the communication controller. Messages are transmitted among the nodes across the communication media based on a cyclic time triggered communication media access scheme. The bus guardian has means for monitoring the communication media access schedule of the communication controller. 
     Finally, the present invention refers to a communication system comprising a communication media and nodes connected to the communication media. Messages are transmitted among the nodes across the communication media based on a cyclic time triggered communication media access scheme. Each node comprises a communication controller and a bus guardian assigned to the communication controller. The bus guardian monitors the communication media access schedule of the communication controller. 
     In time-triggered communication systems, which can be used for message exchange in safety-critical applications in vehicles, a situation in which one of the nodes due to a local malfunction temporarily or permanently impedes communication between the nodes of the communication system (so called “babbling idiot”), is not tolerable. The function of a bus guardian is known in the art from communication systems which have been suggested for X-by-wire-applications, for example a FlexRay-communication system. 
     For such time-triggered communication systems a bus guardian is proposed to avoid that a communication controller of one of the nodes of the communication system continuously sends data and thereby blocks the communication media so no other communication controller of another node can transmit data (the so-called “babbling idiot” failure). Apart from the communication controller, the bus guardian constitutes a second source for the generation of a communication media access control signal. The bus guardian derives a corresponding control signal from an independent set of configuration data. The bus guardian enables communication media access for the communication controller it is assigned to only for specific time slots, for which the communication controller is allowed to transmit data across the communication media. 
     The bus guardian is configured with a communication media access schedule. By means of this configuration data the bus guardian can enable access to the communication media for certain time slots, for which a data transmission by the communication controller the bus guardian is assigned to, is expected. For the remaining time slots access to the communication media is inhibited. 
     In a fault-tolerant communication system often methods for an initial synchronization of a certain method for media access (for example: TDMA—Time Divisional Multiple Access) are implemented, in which more than one node of the communication system can make an attempt for an initial synchronization after power on. In this phase (so called schedule setup) it is attempted to synchronize all available nodes in such a way that they act on a global communication scheme, that defines when the nodes can occupy the communication media exclusively. If this synchronization was successful the established time scheme for the nodes will not change anymore. Each node operates in the so called normal mode. Only a critical operating situation or an intended shut down of the communication among the nodes can lead to a cessation of communication of the node. A change in the access behavior is not permitted. 
     However, during a startup phase for various reasons it can happen that a communication controller interrupts the execution of a communication schedule and resumes it later on. This incident in the following is referred to as schedule-reset. In contrast to the normal mode described above, the bus guardian must tolerate this incident during a schedule setup phase. Caused by a collision of two or more nodes, which try to achieve an initial synchronization of all nodes at the same time, a situation arises in which all but one node after detection of the collision scenario have to retreat. The node which does not have to retreat (remaining node) could be a node which first sends a regular frame. Alternatively it could be that node which sends the regular frame last or which sends a regular frame of a certain length. 
     When retreating, a node abandons a transmitting process based on its own local communication time schedule and adopts the time schedule proposed by the remaining node. Then, the chronological location of the own time slots is adjusted to this time schedule. Thus the local communication time schedules of all nodes are brought into a global compliance. This means that the schedule setup is completed and the communication controllers are synchronized concerning their media access behavior. 
     Hence, even though the media access pattern during normal operation of the communication system is of cyclic, repetitive structure, while in a startup phase the local communication subsystem has to support the initial establishment of a global, for example a TDMA (Time Divisional Multiple Access)-based, access schedule valid for all nodes of the distributed communication system. The communication startup in the distributed system with more than one node being allowed to perform the initial schedule synchronization requires that a node might have to adapt its own access schedule to another one of the nodes, even though it already attempted to startup the communication actively. This is affected for example by a schedule-reset (SR), initiated by the node having to adapt its access schedule to another node. This situation during startup of the communication may lead to allowable deviations (for example schedule-reset, RS) from the usual communication media access schedule. 
     In order for the communication controller to perform tasks such as sending trigger signals (ARM) etc., it must be functioning. In other words, the communication controller is already started up when the communication across the communication system is started up. The same applies for the bus guardian, which is already started (powered up and executing internal logic), too. Both devices just are not yet cooperating to communicate on the channel. What the present invention addresses is how the communication controller and the bus guardian interact to start communication. 
     For a bus guardian that is to ensure error containment in the time domain for the respective node, this scenario embodies a fundamental difficulty—to distinguish between allowed changes in the communication media access schedule of the communication controller caused by the startup behavior in conformity with the specification and forbidden changes caused by a failure of the communication controller, which then has to be recognized as such. 
     A possibility to distinguish between an allowed and a forbidden deviation from the communication media access schedule during startup is an explicit signaling of the communication controller&#39;s current status, that is for example a startup mode or a normal mode. The problem with the explicit signaling is that the communication controller can indicate a schedule-reset to the bus guardian whenever it wants to. This allows error scenarios with a communication controller continuously blocking the communication media by periodically signaling schedule-resets to the bus guardian. However, this is exactly what should be prevented by the bus guardian. 
     For not jeopardizing the independence of the bus guardian there are various approaches that do not utilize the direct interface between communication controller and bus guardian. In such cases the communication controller signals a schedule-reset to a higher-level processing unit, which, for example, is a host controller. The processing unit usually is part of the node and assures the actual functionality of the distributed control system comprising the communication capability and the vehicle control functionality. An indicated schedule-reset can be validated by the higher-level processing unit and can be forwarded to the bus guardian across an independent interface. 
     The problem is that with the higher-level processing unit there is an entity within the critical path, which has nothing to do with the execution of procedures of the node. A functionality of the node is outsourced to a higher-level entity, which only wants to utilize the data transmission capabilities of the node for realizing the functionality of the distributed control system. This means that appropriate demands concerning processing speed and reaction time have to be achieved by the processing unit, too, which usually is not the case. In the application software of the processing unit special routines have to be provided which offer a guaranteed latency for detecting, processing and forwarding an event, that is the schedule-reset. Thus, a node of the communication system cannot be considered a closed entity and therefore is difficult to certify and to check for conformity. 
     Hence, the signaling of the current status or an explicit reset command from the communication controller to the bus guardian would violate the requirement for an independent operation of the communication controller and the bus guardian. An independent operation of these two entities is important in order to reduce their sensitivity against so called common-mode errors. 
     The realization of a separate receive circuit, which allows receiving, decoding and interpreting of the messages transmitted by the communication controller would be much too complex and too expensive. 
     The bus guardian can assure an independent surveillance of the communication controller it is assigned to only if the communication controller sticks to a definite access scheme. A problem arises if the access behavior of the communication controller to be monitored by the bus guardian changes in compliance with the access scheme and if such an allowable change has to be distinguished from a faulty change caused by a defective communication controller. 
     Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a mechanism that allows the bus guardian to monitor the communication media access scheme of the communication controller even during startup of the communication. 
     SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION 
     This object is achieved by a method of the above-mentioned kind, characterized in that the bus guardian has a priori knowledge about possible deviations from the communication media access schedule during startup of the communication and that the bus guardian during startup of the communication makes use of the a priori knowledge to distinguish between an allowable deviation and a forbidden deviation caused by a failure of the communication controller. 
     The invention presents an approach that maintains independence of the bus guardian from an affiliated communication controller. A mechanism is proposed that condenses the potential behavior of the communication controller during network startup down to simplified conditions, which can be checked by the bus guardian by observing the communication controller&#39;s media access scheme. Thereby the bus guardian is able to derive the reset conditions for its own access enable schedule independently. 
     The proposed mechanism saves additional interface signals by exploiting the information flow that has to be provided anyway and resolves the problem of local schedule alignment without weakening the independence of the bus guardian. 
     According to a preferred embodiment of the present invention it is suggested that allowable deviations from the communication media access schedule during startup of the communication are represented by reset information and by the chronological occurrence of the reset information and that the bus guardian monitors the reset information and the chronological occurrence of the reset information during startup of the communication. In particular the reset information is a schedule-reset. The chronological occurrence of the reset information refers to the time or cycle when the schedule information occurs during the communication media access scheme. 
     According to yet another embodiment of the invention it is suggested that during startup of the communication, a communication controller of one of the nodes transmits a first trigger signal to the bus guardian assigned to the communication controller. The bus guardian defines at least one expectation window according to the a priori information. Further, the bus guardian monitors whether there are further trigger signals within the defined expectation windows. Finally the bus guardian distinguishes between a permitted deviation and a forbidden deviation according to whether there are further trigger signals within the defined expectation windows and according to the a priori information. For example in a FlexRay communication system, the first trigger signal is a so called ARM-Signal. The ARM-Signal is used for synchronizing the bus guardian and the communication controller. An expectation window is defined by its time or cycle of appearance and/or by its size. An expectation window is a certain time or cycle period in which the bus guardian monitors the media access behavior of the communication controller. 
     It is further suggested that the first trigger signal is transmitted at the beginning of a timeslot in a cycle of the communication media access scheme and that a first expectation window is defined at the end of said timeslot in said cycle. Preferably a further trigger signal within the further expectation window defines the beginning of a new cycle of the communication media access scheme. If the trigger signal is the first trigger signal the communication controller sends after startup, the bus guardian immediately permits the communication controller to access the communication media during the current timeslot. The access permission is granted by means of an enabling signal (BGEN; bus guardian enable) the bus guardian sends to the communication controller or to a bus driver, connected between the communication controller and the communication media. During the timeslot the communication controller sends a predefined message (CAS; Collision Avoiding Symbol), by which the bus guardian is informed, that the communication controller is about to make an attempt for an initial synchronization after power on (so called ColdStart behavior). At the end of that timeslot, a further trigger signal is sent to the bus guardian and a new cycle begins. If, however, no further trigger signal was sent during the first expectation window, the communication controller would not be in a ColdStart-phase but instead in a so called Integrating-phase. In an Integrating-phase the communication controller adopts the time schedule proposed by a node which has already performed a successful ColdStart. This means, both sending and not sending a trigger signal during the first expectation window is allowed. The bus guardian knows this will not initiate a schedule-reset neither if a trigger signal was sent within the expectation window nor if it was not sent. 
     According to yet another preferred embodiment of the present invention it is suggested that a number of further expectation windows are defined each at the beginning of subsequent cycles of the communication media access scheme. Preferably the number of further expectation windows is defined according to the a priori data, in particular according to a parameter defining the maximum number of cycles, for which the communication controller is allowed to try to actively establish communication with a further communication controller of one of the other nodes of the communication system. This preferred embodiment applies for the ColdStart-phase of the communication controller. According to this embodiment, for a certain number of cycles, according to the value of the parameter, the bus guardian will detect a valid state of the communication controller no matter if further trigger signals are sent within the further expectation windows or not. If a further trigger signal is not sent within one of the further expectation windows, a valid schedule-reset is effected. If, however, a further trigger signal is not sent outside the number of further expectation windows, an invalid state of the communication controller is detected and the communication media access is disabled for a definite period of time or until the communication system is powered down. 
     It is suggested that for an allowable deviation from the communication media access schedule there may be further trigger signals within the expectation windows or not. Furthermore, it is suggested that for a valid schedule-reset there are no further trigger signals within the further expectation windows. Finally, it is suggested that for a forbidden deviation from the communication media access schedule there are no further trigger signals outside the expectation windows. 
     Furthermore, the above-mentioned object is achieved by a computer program of the above-mentioned kind, characterized in that, the computer program is programmed in order to execute a method according to the present invention. 
     According to a preferred embodiment it is suggested that the computer program is stored on a read-only-memory (ROM), on a random-access-memory (RAM) or on a flash-memory (flash). 
     Moreover, the above-mentioned object is achieved by a bus guardian of the above-mentioned kind, characterized in that, the bus guardian has a priori knowledge about possible deviations from the communication media access schedule during startup of the communication and that the bus guardian has means for making use of the a priori knowledge in order to distinguish between an allowable deviation and a forbidden deviation caused by a failure of the communication controller during startup. 
     According to a preferred embodiment it is suggested that the bus guardian comprises means for executing the method according to the present invention. 
     Besides, the above-mentioned object is achieved by a node of the above-mentioned kind, characterized in that the bus guardian has a priori knowledge about possible deviations from the communication media access schedule during startup of the communication and that the bus guardian has means for making use of the a priori knowledge in order to distinguish between an allowed deviation and a forbidden deviation caused by a failure of the communication controller during startup. 
     According to a preferred embodiment it is suggested that the bus guardian comprises means for executing the method according to the present invention. 
     Finally, the above-mentioned object is achieved by a communication system of the above-mentioned kind, characterized in, that the bus guardian has a priori knowledge about possible deviations from the communication media access schedule during startup of the communication and that the bus guardian has means for making use of the a priori knowledge in order to distinguish between an allowable deviation and a forbidden deviation caused by a failure of the communication controller during startup of the communication. 
     According to a preferred embodiment it is suggested that the a priori knowledge comprises reset information and the chronological occurrence of the reset information during startup of the communication and that the means for making use of the a priori knowledge monitor the reset information and the chronological occurrence of the reset information during startup of the communication in order to distinguish between an allowable deviation and a forbidden deviation caused by a failure of the communication controller. 
     According to yet another preferred embodiment of the invention it is suggested that the bus guardian comprises means for executing the method according to the present invention. 
     These and other features, aspects and advantages of the present invention will become better understood with reference to the following detailed description, appended claims, and accompanying drawings, wherein: 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWING 
         FIG. 1  illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a dual channel bus configuration; 
         FIG. 2  illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a dual channel single star configuration; 
         FIG. 3  illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a single channel cascaded star configuration; 
         FIG. 4  illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a dual channel cascaded stars configuration; 
         FIG. 5  illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a single channel hybrid configuration; 
         FIG. 6  illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a dual channel hybrid configuration; 
         FIG. 7  illustrates timing hierarchy levels within a communication cycle for data transmission within the communication system; 
         FIG. 8  illustrates a time base triggered communication cycle for data transmission within the communication system; 
         FIG. 9  illustrates possible transmission patterns for a single node within a static segment of the communication cycle; 
         FIG. 10  illustrates detailed timing of a static slot within the static segment of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 11  illustrates an overview of a dynamic segment of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 12  illustrates a detailed timing within a minislot of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 13  illustrates a detailed timing within a dynamic segment of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 14  illustrates a detailed timing at the boundary between a static segment and a dynamic segment of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 15  illustrates a detailed timing within a symbol window of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 16  illustrates a sender/receiver interface of a communication controller of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 17  illustrates a byte coding; 
         FIG. 18  illustrates a frame coding in a static segment of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 19  illustrates a frame coding in a dynamic segment of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 20  illustrates a bit stream of a status normal symbol (SNS); 
         FIG. 21  illustrates a bit stream of a status alarm symbol (SAS); 
         FIG. 22  illustrates a bit stream of a collision avoidance symbol (CAS); 
         FIG. 23  illustrates a bit stream of a sequence of two wake-up symbols (WUS); 
         FIG. 24  illustrates a block diagram of a bit stream decoding unit of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 25  illustrates a mechanism for determining an initial edge detection window when a frame is received; 
         FIG. 26  illustrates a mechanism for detecting a falling edge in the middle of a first byte start sequence (BSS); 
         FIG. 27  illustrates a mechanism for determining an edge detection window; 
         FIG. 28  illustrates a bit clock alignment according to a first example; 
         FIG. 29  illustrates a bit clock alignment according to a second example; 
         FIG. 30  illustrates a bit clock alignment according to a third example; 
         FIG. 31  illustrates an example of a bit sampling for bits comprising 10 samples; 
         FIG. 32  illustrates a mechanism for a resynchronization of bit sampling; 
         FIG. 33  illustrates an example for a bit value voting mechanism; 
         FIG. 34  illustrates an overview of a FlexRay frame format; 
         FIG. 35  illustrates an overview of a byteflight frame format; 
         FIG. 36  illustrates a frame reception state diagram; 
         FIG. 37  illustrates a frame acceptance timing in a static segment of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 38  illustrates a frame acceptance timing in a dynamic segment of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 39  illustrates a diagram with local timing of three nodes and their relation to each other; 
         FIG. 40  illustrates a relative execution timing of a clock synchronization mechanism; 
         FIG. 41  illustrates a node internal execution of clock synchronization procedures; 
         FIG. 42  illustrates a time difference measurement (expected vs. observed arrival times); 
         FIG. 43  illustrates an algorithm for clock correction value calculation; 
         FIG. 44  illustrates a timing of measurement and correction; 
         FIG. 45  illustrates an assessment of a calculated rate correction value; 
         FIG. 46  illustrates an assessment of a calculated offset correction value; 
         FIG. 47  illustrates a global structure of a wakeup procedure; 
         FIG. 48  illustrates a structure of a wakeup channel monitoring procedure; 
         FIG. 49  illustrates a structure of a wakeup pattern transmission procedure; 
         FIG. 50  illustrates a global structure of a startup procedure; 
         FIG. 51  illustrates a structure of a channel monitoring and of a selection of a startup path; 
         FIG. 52  illustrates a structure of a selection of a cold start initiator; 
         FIG. 53  illustrates a structure of a check on a successfully established communication; 
         FIG. 54  illustrates a structure of an initial synchronization; 
         FIG. 55  illustrates a structure of a check on a successful integration; 
         FIG. 56  illustrates a global structure of a protocol state diagram; 
         FIG. 57  illustrates a structure of a communication controller wakeup state machine of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 58  illustrates a simple wakeup, whereas the larger amount of times within a millisecond-range are represented by dotted lines; 
         FIG. 59  illustrates a simple wakeup with forwarding, whereas the larger amount of times within a millisecond-range are represented by dotted lines; 
         FIG. 60  illustrates a listen-timeout of a first timer value vdStartup; 
         FIG. 61  illustrates listen-timeouts of a second timer value vdStartupNoise; 
         FIG. 62  illustrates a startup state diagram in a time triggered protocol mode; 
         FIG. 63  illustrates a startup state diagram in a byteflight protocol mode; 
         FIG. 64  illustrates a diagram of a collision-free startup; 
         FIG. 65  illustrates a diagram of a startup with a collision on a collision avoidance symbol; 
         FIG. 66  illustrates a diagram of a startup with a validation check in a CC_IntegrationVCW state failed, in which state a node of the communication system does not schedule any transmission; 
         FIG. 67  illustrates a state transition diagram of a communication controller of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 68  illustrates a state transition diagram of a bus driver of a node of the communication system (the optical bus guardian states are not shown); 
         FIG. 69  illustrates a state transition diagram of an optical bus driver of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 70  illustrates a state transition diagram of a bus guardian of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 71  illustrates a state transition diagram of an active star communication system topology; 
         FIG. 72  illustrates an error management state transition diagram for a time-triggered distributed protocol mode and a time-triggered master-controlled protocol mode; 
         FIG. 73  illustrates an error management state transition diagram for a byteflight protocol mode; 
         FIG. 74  illustrates a conceptual architecture of a controller host interface of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 75  illustrates a state diagram of a controller host interface; 
         FIG. 76  illustrates interactions of controller host interface services with controller host interface elements; 
         FIG. 77  illustrates a bus driver—communication controller interface of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 78  illustrates a bus driver—bus guardian interface; 
         FIG. 79  illustrates behavior of two signals RxD and RxEN for receiving a data frame transmitted in a static segment of the communication cycle according to a first example; 
         FIG. 80  illustrates behavior of two signals RxD and RxEN for receiving a data frame according to a second example; 
         FIG. 81  illustrates required timing of two signals TxD and TxEN for transmitting a data frame; 
         FIG. 82  illustrates a block diagram of a bus guardian—communication controller interface; 
         FIG. 83  illustrates a bus guardian schedule overview; 
         FIG. 84  illustrates a bus guardian—communication controller timing during a static segment of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 85  illustrates a bus guardian—communication controller timing at the beginning of a dynamic segment of a communication cycle according to a first example; 
         FIG. 86  illustrates a bus guardian—communication controller timing at the beginning of a dynamic segment of a communication cycle according to a second example; 
         FIG. 87  illustrates a bus guardian—communication controller timing during a bus guardian symbol window and a bus guardian watchdog disable time; 
         FIG. 88  illustrates a structure of a bus guardian schedule monitor; 
         FIG. 89  illustrates a bus guardian schedule monitor state machine; 
         FIG. 90  illustrates interaction in a static segment of a communication cycle; 
         FIG. 91  illustrates interaction in a static segment of a communication cycle with a minimum length of inter-slot gaps; 
         FIG. 92  illustrates interaction in a dynamic segment of a communication cycle with a symbol window disabled; 
         FIG. 93  illustrates interaction in a symbol window and in a network idle time; 
         FIG. 94  illustrates FlexRay communication cycle operating modes; 
         FIG. 95  illustrates an event triggered communication handling in a host controller, a controller host interface and in a communication controller of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 96  illustrates a timing hierarchy in the view of a master node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 97  illustrates a communication cycle execution from the view of a master node and a slave node; 
         FIG. 98  illustrates a trigger condition in an event indication signal; 
         FIG. 99  illustrates a monitoring of a trigger signal for the communication controller by a master node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 100  illustrates a monitoring of an event indication signal by slave nodes of the communication system; 
         FIG. 101  illustrates a protocol state diagram for an event triggered mode; 
         FIG. 102  illustrates internal bus events, which are indicated externally; 
         FIG. 103  illustrates an architecture of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 104  illustrates an example for a possible network configuration; 
         FIG. 105  illustrates a definition of a communication cycle with a static segment; 
         FIG. 106  illustrates a definition of a communication cycle in a pure dynamic communication system; 
         FIG. 107  illustrates an example for a communication scheme of two nodes of a FlexRay communication system; 
         FIG. 108  illustrates a FlexRay frame format; 
         FIG. 109  illustrates a byteflight frame format; 
         FIG. 110  illustrates a transmission of a start sequence; 
         FIG. 111  illustrates a reception of a start sequence; 
         FIG. 112  illustrates a frame format for an electrical transmission on the physical layer; 
         FIG. 113  illustrates a topology of a FlexRay communication system using active stars; 
         FIG. 114  illustrates a topology of a FlexRay communication system using a passive bus; 
         FIG. 115  illustrates a topology of a FlexRay communication system using an active star combined with a passive bus; 
         FIG. 116  illustrates a block chart of an electrical active star; 
         FIG. 117  illustrates an overview of interfaces between a host controller, a communication controller, a bus driver, a bus guardian, and a power supply of a node of the communication system; 
         FIG. 118  illustrates a communication system according to the present invention; 
         FIG. 119  illustrates a node according to the present invention, the node being part of the communication system; 
         FIG. 120  illustrates a phase diagram of a method according to the present invention; 
         FIG. 121  illustrates a course of various signals within the node according to a first preferred embodiment; 
         FIG. 122  illustrates a course of various signals within the node according to a second preferred embodiment; 
         FIG. 123  illustrates a course of various signals within the node according to a third preferred embodiment; 
         FIG. 124  illustrates a course of various signals within the node according to a fourth preferred embodiment; 
         FIG. 125  illustrates a course of various signals within the node according to a fifth preferred embodiment; 
         FIG. 126  illustrates a course of various signals within the node according to a sixth preferred embodiment; and 
         FIG. 127  illustrates a course of various signals within the node according to a seventh preferred embodiment. 
     
    
    
     DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT 
       FIG. 118  shows a communication system based on time triggered message exchange designated with reference numeral  1 . The communication system  1  can be a FlexRay-communication system. The communication system  1  comprises a communication media  2 , which can be a data bus. A number of nodes  3  (A, B, C, D, E) is connected to the communication media  2 . Messages are transmitted among the nodes  3  across the communication media  2  based on a cyclic time triggered communication media access scheme. 
       FIG. 119  shows a node  3  of the communication system  1  illustrated in  FIG. 118 . Each node  3  comprises a host controller (Host)  4 , a communication controller (CC)  5 , a bus guardian (BG)  6  and a bus driver (BD)  7 . The bus guardian  6  is assigned to the communication controller  5 . The bus guardian  6  monitors the communication media access schedule of the communication controller  5 , in order to prevent the communication controller  5  from blocking the communication media  2  by temporarily or continuously sending messages (so called “babbling idiot”). Of course, in order to maintain independence from the two redundant channels (for example see  FIG. 1 ), the nodes (reference sign  100  in  FIG. 1 ) can comprise two bus drivers and two bus guardians. 
     This invention presents an approach that maintains independence of the bus guardian  6  from the affiliated communication controller  5 . A mechanism is proposed that condenses the potential behavior of the communication controller  5  during startup of the system  1  or the communication across the system  1  respectively down to simplified conditions, which can be checked by the bus guardian  6  by observing the communication controller&#39;s media access scheme. Thereby, the bus guardian  6  is able to derive the reset condition for its own access enable schedule (BGEN) independently. The bus guardian  6  uses a priori knowledge about the possible startup schedule deviations in order to distinguish between a valid divergence from the regular scheme and an irregular one. The proposed mechanism saves additional interface signals by exploiting the information flow that has to be provided anyway and resolves the problem of local schedule alignment without weakening the independence of the bus guardian  6 . 
     Now looking at  FIG. 120 , the method according to the present invention starts in a block  10 . If condition  11  is fulfilled, the communication controller  5  enters the initializing phase (Init)  12  and the whole system  1  is in a startup phase. For example, condition  11  can be fulfilled if the communication controller  5  is powered on. During the initializing phase  12  the communication controller  5  listens to the communication on the communication media  2 . If the controller  5  detects communication going on, it will try to adopt its own local time schedule to the global time schedule of the nodes  3  already registered with the communication system  1  (integrating phase; Integr)  13 . If, however, the controller  5  can hear no communication going on, it will try to establish its own local time schedule as the global time schedule for all nodes  3  to be registered with the system  1  (coldstart phase; ColdStart)  14 . From the Integrating phase  13  and from the coldstart phase  14  the communication controller  5  can enter the normal mode  15 . 
     During the integrating phase  13  any deviation from the regular communication media access schedule is interpreted as an error by the bus guardian  6  and the status of the communication controller  5  changes to a fault status (F)  16 . In the fault status  16  the bus guardian  6  prevents the communication controller  5  from accessing the communication media  2  for a limited length of time or until the communication controller  5  is powered down again. After powering down the communication controller  5  the method according to the present invention ends in block  17 . 
     During the coldstart phase  14  the bus guardian detects deviations from the regular communication media access schedule. This deviation may be allowed  18  or forbidden  19 . Allowable deviations  18  lead to a schedule-reset (SR)  20 . After the schedule-reset  20  the communication controller  5  returns into the initializing phase  12  and listens to the communication taking place on the communication media  2 . Forbidden deviations  19  make the status of the communication controller  5  change into the fault status  16  and the method ends in block  17 . 
     The present invention suggests a mechanism which allows the bus guardian  6  to follow all allowed schedule-resets (SR), and at the same time having a high degree of independence in order to detect forbidden or incorrect schedule-resets (SR) and to react accordingly. For the implementation of the invention no additional entity, like a higher-level processing unit, is needed. 
     The bus guardian  6  has a suitable representation of the possible pattern of behavior of the communication controller  5  to be monitored. Thereby the complex behavior of the communication controller  5  is mapped on a reset information and on the chronological occurrence of the reset information during startup of the communication. The bus guardian  6  can define so called expectation windows and can make sure that no further schedule-resets are accepted after a certain pattern of the communication system access scheme of the communication controller  5  has been detected. This enables the bus guardian  6  to detect various patterns of behavior of the communication controller  5  and if necessary to distinguish them from forbidden or incorrect behavior. 
       FIGS. 121 to 127  illustrate an embodiment of the invention where the communication controller  5  follows a procedure for schedule-reset (SR). A node  3  can either attempt to achieve an initial establishment of the global communication media access scheme via the coldstart-path  14 , or to participate in an communication already existing via the integrating-path  13 . 
     A Parameter ColdStartMax in the communication controller  5  specifies the number of communication cycles for which the controller  5  may work in the coldstart-path  14  and may try to establish a communication with other communication controllers of the communication system  1 , that is to conclude the schedule setup by entering into the normal mode  15 . With each communication cycle in the coldstart-path  14  a ColdStart-counter is incremented. As soon as the counter&#39;s value reaches the parameter ColdStartMax, the communication controller  5  loses its authorization for entering or remaining in the coldstart-path  14 . In the following embodiments it is assumed that the parameter ColdStartMax be 3; of course it can adopt any other value, too. The bus guardian  6  has to deduce its evaluation of the behavior of the communication controller  5  (integrating or coldstart behavior) in the actual situation and the value of the ColdStart-counter by itself. The parameter ColdStartMax can be stored in the bus guardian  6  as a priori information during the configuration phase. 
     In  FIGS. 121 to 127 , the upper course shows the communication schedule of the communication controller  5 . In all figures a communication schedule with five timeslots for transmitting information is handled. A rectangle with a solid line symbolizes an active transmission at the scheduled point of time. A rectangle with a dashed line means that the communication controller  5  has already adopted a time schedule originating from another node  3 , but for the indicated transmission cycles does not yet dispose of active rights to transmit data. 
     The lower course illustrates an enabling signal BGEN for the communication media access of the communication controller  5 . This signal is generated by the bus guardian  6  and allows the communication controller  5  to access the communication media  2  during its low-phase (low active). During its high-phase the communication media access is disabled. 
     One aspect of the present invention is to adopt the generation of the enabling signal BGEN in the bus guardian  6  to a possible variation in communication media access behavior of the communication controller  5 , in particular during startup of the communication. To achieve this, in the embodiments shown in  FIGS. 121 to 127 , a trigger signal ARM is analyzed, which is generated by the communication controller  5  for synchronization of the communication controller  5  and the bus guardian  6 . For example, the trigger signal ARM is used for communicating the beginning of the communication schedule to the bus guardian  6  and to prevent a drifting apart of the communication schedules of the communication controller  5  and the bus guardian  6 , the drifting apart being inevitable due to tolerances in the local timers. The activation of a trigger signal (trigger pulse) ARM is illustrated by an arrow on the dashed center line. The time point at which the bus guardian  6  interprets a non-appearance of the trigger signal ARM as a schedule-reset, is illustrated with double brackets. 
       FIGS. 121 to 123  show the course of signals for a schedule setup, which each go without a schedule-reset in the communication controller  5  and in the bus guardian  6  assigned thereto. 
       FIG. 121  shows a situation in which the communication controller  5  is already operating in the normal mode  15  and in which the bus guardian  6  periodically allows access to the communication media  2  in the third of five timeslots  30  of a communication cycle  31 . By means of the trigger signal ARM at the beginning of a communication cycle  31  it is made sure that the media access schedule of the communication controller  5  and the media enabling schedule of the bus guardian  6  are synchronized. The non-appearance of the trigger signal ARM is interpreted as an error by the bus guardian  6  and the bus guardian  6  permanently disables the media access. 
       FIG. 122  shows a situation in which the communication controller  5  enters the coldstart-path  14  and reaches the normal mode within the allowed number of communication cycles. According to the coldstart-behavior of the communication controller  5 , a dedicated message CAS (Collision Avoiding Symbol) is sent (see the black rectangle) followed by an access into the regular media access schedule. This special behavior is indicated to the bus guardian  6  by activating the trigger signal ARM before the initial message CAS as well as immediately after the message CAS (beginning of the initial communication cycle). Directly after the first trigger pulse ARM, that is after the termination of the timeslot, the occurrence of a further trigger pulse ARM is interpreted as a schedule-reset. At the same time the bus guardian  6  detects that the communication controller  5  has entered the coldstart-path  14 . This condition is used for incrementing the ColdStart-counter in the bus guardian  6  according to the behavior of the communication controller  5 . With ColdStartMax=3, as a consequence for another three times a schedule-reset would be executed at the end of a communication cycle, that is the communication controller  5  exiting the coldstart-path  14  would be accepted for another three times. This is symbolized in  FIG. 122  by the double brackets. 
     However, in  FIG. 122  the communication controller  5  runs through the coldstart-path  14  for the allowed maximum number of communication cycles and regularly generates trigger pulses in cyclic intervals. After having reached the limit value ColdStartMax, the bus guardian  6  can disable the possibility of a schedule-reset at a later point of time (see double brackets in  FIG. 122 ). By doing so, the bus guardian  6  makes sure that the communication controller  5  cannot initiate a schedule-reset of the bus guardian  6  after any number of communication cycles. For the rest, any trigger pulse ARM, which does not occur at a time of point between two communication cycles, is assessed as an error, which causes a permanent blockage of the communication media access by the bus guardian  6 . 
       FIG. 123  shows a situation in which the communication controller  5  enters the normal mode  15  via the integrating path. Before the communication controller S actively participates in the communication across the communication media  2 , it adopts the global communication schedule and detects its own timeslot for transmission within a communication cycle (rectangles with dashed lines). The first trigger pulse ARM communicates to the bus guardian  6  that the communication controller  5  is at the beginning of a communication cycle, in which, according to the communication media access schedule, the timeslot is actively allocated. At this point of time the bus guardian  6  cannot recognize yet, whether the communication controller  5  is to show integrating or coldstart behavior. Therefore, the bus guardian  6  has to react as to support both options. As a reaction on the first trigger pulse ARM, the bus guardian  6  enables communication media access for a period of one timeslot, in case a communication controller  5  wants to transmit an initial message CAS in the coldstart-path  14  (see  FIG. 122 ). Immediately after that timeslot the bus guardian  6  opens an expectation window  32  for a further trigger pulse ARM, which could initiate a schedule-reset (in case the communication controller  5  shows coldstart behavior, see  FIG. 122 ). If that further trigger pulse ARM occurs, the bus guardian  6  can derive from this that the communication controller  5  has entered the normal mode  15  via the integrating mode  13 . However, this means that no further schedule-resets (SR) are allowed and that any non-occurrence of an expected trigger pulse ARM is to be interpreted by the bus guardian  6  as an error. In  FIG. 123  this is clarified by the fact that the bus guardian  6  opens no further expectation windows  33  (represented by the double brackets) for a schedule-reset (SR). 
       FIG. 124  shows a situation in which the communication controller  5  leaves the coldstart-path  14  in the third communication cycle after the initial message CAS and does not enter the normal mode  15 . The condition for initiating a schedule-reset in the bus guardian  6  is the non-occurrence of the trigger pulse ARM within the expectation window (see last one of the further expectation windows  33  and event SR). Advantage is taken of the fact that the communication controller  5  according to its specified behavior in the coldstart-path  14  does not reach the end of the current communication cycle, and therefore the trigger pulse ARM cannot be initiated any more. The bus guardian  6  indirectly deduces the conditions for its own schedule-reset from the monitored communication behavior of the communication controller  5 . Thereafter, the bus guardian  6  returns to an initial state  12 . From this initial state  12  the bus guardian  6  can triggered by a trigger pulse ARM of the communication controller  5  migrate into the integrating path  13  or into the coldstart-path  14 . In the initial state  12  the media access is blocked; the ColdStart-counter for the number of communication cycles in the coldstart-path  14  is not reset. 
       FIG. 125  shows a situation in which the communication controller  5  leaves the coldstart-path  14  in the first communication cycle after the initial message CAS. The bus guardian  6  has detected the entry into the coldstart-path  14  (trigger pulse in the first expectation window after the initial trigger pulse) and executes a schedule-reset (SR) at the end of the first communication cycle because the conditions therefore have been detected. Further,  FIG. 125  shows that the bus guardian  6  is capable of following the coldstart behavior as soon as the communication controller  5  is active again and enters the coldstart-path  14  once more. 
       FIG. 126  illustrates a situation in which the communication controller  5  shows a deficient behavior, which is detected by the bus guardian  6  as such. After the initial activation of the trigger signal ARM, no schedule-reset is released. Seen from the bus guardian  6 , this means that the communication controller  5  enters the normal mode  15  via the integrating path  13 . A non-occurrence of the expected trigger signal ARM is not accepted as schedule-reset any more (no further expectation windows), and the missing activation of the trigger signal ARM at the end of the communication cycle  31  addresses the error detection in the bus guardian  6  (see error event F). As a consequence the bus guardian  6  inhibits the media access, and the communication controller  5  cannot affect the happening at the communication media  2 , even though it still processes the communication schedule. 
       FIG. 127  shows a situation in which the bus guardian  6 , according to the configuration of the parameter ColdStartMax (in the present example its value is set to three), allows the release of a schedule reset three times after the end of each communication cycle. The expectation window is opened, but not used by the communication controller  5  in this example. Only in the following communication cycle the communication unit  5  does not emit a trigger pulse ARM to the bus guardian  6 . Because the maximum number of communication cycles ColdStartMax, for which a schedule reset is accepted by the bus guardian  6 , is exceeded, this behavior is evaluated as deficient (error event F). This could originate in a deficient configuration of the limiting values in the communication controller  5  and in the bus guardian  6 , or in not generating the necessary trigger pulse ARM by the communication controller  5  due to an internal processing error. In any case, the error detection and the blocking of the media access by the bus guardian  6  is the desired reaction for the communication subsystem (node  3 ). 
     The concept according to the present invention can be used for other than the described startup sequences, too. In that case the mapping of the conditions for a schedule-reset in the bus guardian  6  would have to be adapted. The bus guardian&#39;s ability to deduce a schedule-reset from the behavior of the communication controller  5  can be deactivated by a higher-layer host controller  4 . The host controller  4  has information concerning the point of time when the communication controller  5  enters the normal mode  15 . As soon as the communication controller  5  enters the normal mode  15  the host controller  4  deactivates the method according to the present invention even though the number of cycles within the coldstart-path  14  has not yet reached the parameter ColdStartMax. 
     This invention can be used in particular for novel communication systems in vehicles. At the moment two different standards for communication protocols are being developed for future X-by-wire applications. In both FlexRay and in TTP (Time Triggered Protocol) the use of a bus guardian is intended. For both standards, the present invention represents an ideal approach for the problems of an inevitable schedule-reset during startup of the systems. 
     The present invention refers to a dependable automotive network. Throughout the following description the following structure is followed: at the beginning of each chapter (section) the requirements for this topic are defined, afterwards more detailed descriptions are provided. In the description UPPER CASE letters are used to denote constants. All constants used in the document are listed at the end of the description. 
     Objectives 
     The objectives pursued in the development of the dependable automotive network are the following:
         Support of two communication paradigms, deterministic (statically defined) communication and dynamic event driven communication.   Configurable static and dynamic part (segment) within one communication cycle. Fully static and fully dynamic configuration has to be supported.   Flexible extendibility, even after deployment.   High data rate and bandwidth efficiency.   Scalable fault tolerance (i.e., single channel and dual channel operation must be supported).   Reliable error detection (bus guardian mechanism in the time domain, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) in the value domain).   Support of electrical and optical physical interfaces.   Enable very low system level failure in time ratings.   Allow use of crystal oscillators and low tolerance ceramic resonators.   Support of active star and bus topologies.   Low overall system cost.   Enable re-use of carry over components without embedding knowledge of future platform partitioning.       

     The objectives of the static segment are the following:
         Deterministic communication behavior in the time domain.   Global time implemented by a fault tolerant clock synchronization algorithm.   Immunity against accepting error-free sub-sequences of a message as valid messages (i.e. short message rejection).       

     The objectives of the dynamic segment are the following:
         Event driven dynamic communication possibility.   Flexible bandwidth allocation (for different nodes during runtime).   No interference with the static segment.   Support for prioritized bus access.   Support of variable length messages with at least 200 data bytes.       

     The global requirements are the following:
         Support for fault tolerance, but operation without fault tolerance must also be possible, i.e., a single bus (channel) connection must be possible for non-fault-tolerant nodes.   The communication network has to support a system architecture, where no single fault may lead to a functional degradation.   Protection against faults in accordance with a well-defined fault hypotheses.   Protect against up to and including five random bit errors per frame.   The communication protocol should be independent as far as possible from the topology.   For highly dependable and fault-tolerant applications an independent bus guardian to prevent the monopolization of the communication medium by a communication controller is required (so called “babbling idiot”).   Errors in hardware and configuration data have to be detected during initialization and operation by error detection mechanisms (EDMs). In case a critical error is detected the controller and transceiver must not be allowed to enter normal operation or immediately abort normal operation and report an error to the host.   Support of serviceability of system- and component-level faults.   The bit encoding technique must not introduce data dependent changes in the length of the resulting bit stream, e.g., bit stuffing is not allowed.   Automotive qualification of the communication controller, bus guardian, and the physical layer is required.   Configuration data must be readable/writeable by the host. It must be possible to prohibit writing during run-time.   Support of comprehensive self test at system communication startup.   Support of timely and highly reliable component re-integration and system-level startup.   Support of master-less system startup and shutdown.   Support of traceability of system- and component-level faults to identify root causes of failures.   Support of synchronized system shutdown without error indications.   Support of synchronous distributed application startup and shutdown with acceptable timing and fault tolerance characteristics.   Support of node and network moding with high security against critical inadvertant mode changes.   Logical line compatibility to the byteflight protocol, when using an optical physical layer must be possible.
 
Basic Concepts
       

     The communication protocol for the dependable automotive network according to the present invention has the following properties:
         Synchronous and asynchronous frame transfer.   Multi-master clock synchronization.   Guaranteed frame latency times and jitter during synchronous transfer.   Prioritization of frames during asynchronous transfer.   Error detection and signaling.   Error containment on the physical layer through an independent bus guardian device.   Scalable fault tolerance, e.g., one controller, one/two channels, one bus guardian for each channel.       

     The FlexRay protocol can be divided into various layers of a layer architecture comprising the following layers:
         The Physical Layer defines how signals are actually transmitted. Tasks of the Physical Layer are fault confinement and error detection and signaling. The Physical Layer comprises a signal level, a bit representation and a transmission medium. One task of the Physical Layer is to detect errors of the communication controller in the time domain. This is done by the so-called Bus Guardian.   The Transfer Layer represents the kernel of the protocol. It presents frames received to the presentation layer and accepts frames to be transmitted from the presentation layer. The transfer layer is responsible for timing, synchronization, message framing, error detection and signaling, and fault confinement.   The Presentation Layer is concerned with frame filtering and masking, frame status handling and contains the communication controller host interface.   The Application Layer is not part of this description.
 
Node (ECU) Architecture
       

       FIG. 103  shows the architecture of a node  100  (electronic control unit, ECU) of the communication system. Every node  100  consists of the five sub-components host controller  101 , communication controller  102 , bus guardian  103 , bus driver  104 , and power supply  105 . In the following description the requirements for the communication controller  102 , the bus guardian  103 , the bus driver  104  and the interfaces to the host  101  and the power supply  105  are described. 
     Two implementations for the communication controller  102  are possible, one configuration of a communication controller  102  that sends and receives on two redundant physical channels, and a second configuration which is solely connected to one physical channel. 
     Topology 
       FIG. 104  shows a possible topology configuration of the communication system  106  (network). A node  100  can either be connected to both channels  1  and  2  (node A, C, and E) or only channel  1  (node B) or only channel  2  (node D). A configuration, where all nodes  100  are connected by one channel only is also possible. 
     Frame Transfer 
     In FlexRay media access occurs within a communication cycle. Within one communication cycle FlexRay offers the choice of two media access schemes. These are a static time division multiple access (TDMA) scheme, and a dynamic mini-slotting based scheme. Communication in the communication system  106  is done in a communication cycle consisting of a static segment and a dynamic segment, where each of the segments may be empty. The first frame ID in a system with a static segment is ID number  1  (see  FIG. 105 ). In a pure dynamic system with a start of cycle (SOC) symbol (see  FIG. 106 ). The sending slots are represented through the ID numbers that are the same on both channels. 
     The sending slots are used deterministically (in a pre-defined time divisional multiple access (TDMA) strategy) in the static segment. In the dynamic segment there can be differences in the phase on the two channels (see  FIG. 106 ). Nodes  100  that are connected to both channels send their frames in the static segment simultaneously on both channels. Two nodes, that are connected to one channel only, but not the same channel, may share a slot in the static segment. 
     To guarantee the consistency of the clock synchronization only nodes  100  can participate that send frames, which are received by all other nodes (e.g., node A, C and E in  FIG. 104 ). All nodes execute the clock synchronization algorithm, but only the frames of the static segment are considered. It is possible to send different data in the same sending slot on different channels. 
     The following constraints should be respected in the communication system  106  according to the present invention:
         The communication controller  102  must allow to interface to an optical or an electrical physical layer.   The communication controller  102  must support a net data rate of at least 5 Mbit/s real application data transferred per seconds under the constraints of frame overhead (including CRC) and protocol timing overhead (inter frame gap, IFG) in static communication mode.   It must be possible to connect  2  up to a value CONTROLLER_MAX controllers  102  to one communication channel. CONTROLLER_MAX is the maximum number of controllers  102  connected to one communication channel and can have a value of 64, for example.   The maximum number of slots in the static segment is set to STATIC_SLOTS_MAX. STATIC_SLOTS_MAX is the maximum number of static slots in a static segment of a communication cycle and can have a value of 4095, for example.   The power supply  105  for the bus driver  104  (including the bus guardian  103 ) and the communication controller  102  must meet automotive requirements.
 
Comment
       

     Considering the FlexRay protocol as described in the previous part of the description the communication scheme of networked FlexRay nodes can be briefly characterized as follows:
         Each node  100  must be able to make use of the distributed clock.   Each node  100  must send frames inside a predefined static slot or/and inside the dynamic segment (collision free access)       

     The transmission of frames must be subdivided into 3 phases:
     1 st  a bus guardian  103  must enable the access to the bus;   2 nd  it must be signaled that a frame should be transmitted;   3 rd  the transmission of the frame itself.
 
Protocol Description
   

     Throughout the document the following notation is used:
     Req: Requirements   Comment: contains additional descriptions and explanations
 
General Requirements
       Req: The communication protocol shall be independent from the data rate.   
       

     Comment:
         It shall be possible to implement low end controllers e.g., 500 Kbit/s and high end controllers beyond 100 Mbit/s.   Req: The first communication controller must support a net data rate of at least 5 Mbit/s.       

     Comment:
         Net data rate: Real application data transferred per seconds under the constraints of frame overhead (including CRC) and protocol timing overhead (IFG) in static communication mode.   Req: A CRC code with a Hamming Distance of at least 6 must be used.   Req: The communication controller shall be able to operate in a current byteflight environment, i.e., the two protocol controllers have to support the same physical interface and the same representation at the logical line level. The byteflight compatibility is required for the optical physical layer only.       

     Comment:
         Compatibility of the interfaces between host CPU and the protocol controller (CHI) is not required. The electrical physical layer does not need to support byteflight compatibility The byteflight specification can be downloaded from the following web address: www byteflight.com.
 
Frame Transfer
       

     Data transfer in FlexRay is done in cycles, called communication cycles.
         Req: The communication cycle consists of a static and a dynamic segment as shown in  FIG. 105 . Each of the segments may be empty, that means there are three possible configurations of the communication cycle (pure static, mixed static and dynamic (a mixed system consists of at least two static slots) and pure dynamic).
           In a pure dynamic system the communication cycle starts with a SOC symbol. There are two different SOC symbols (alarm condition, normal condition). The sending slots are represented through the identifiers that are the same on both channels (see  FIG. 106 ).   The sending slots are used deterministically (in a pre-defined TDMA strategy) in the static segment. In the dynamic segment there can be differences in the phase on the two channels (see  FIG. 105 ). Nodes that are connected to both channels send their frames in the static segment simultaneously on both channels. A node that is connected to only one channel may share an identifier with another node that is only connected to the other channel.   The current communication cycle is determined by a cycle counter that is consistently incremented in every cycle (see  FIG. 108 ).   
           Req: The length of the communication cycle has to be stored in the configuration data.       

     Fit Criteria:
         The maximum cycle length is defined by CYCLE_LENGTH_MAX and can have a value of 64 ms, for example.   Req: A check mechanism has to be designed that ensures that no frame transmission is started within a certain interval so called forbidden region before the end of the communication cycle, to ensure that the beginning of the static segment in the next communication cycle is not disturbed.   Req: Multiplexing of sending slots of one controller must be supported in such a way, that the contents of frames can be multiplexed for a certain sending slot in different communication cycles.       

     Comment:
         So a communication matrix with nearly any possible communication patterns (periods of certain frames) based on the principle of communication cycles can be built up.
 
Static Segment
   Req: If the static segment of the communication cycle is not empty it consists of STATIC_SLOTS_MIN≦NUMBER_OF_SLOTS≦STATIC_SLOTS_MAX.   Req: The static segment is subdivided into a sequence of time slots. In each of these static slots only one controller may send one frame on each channel.       

     Comment:
         In the static segment of the communication cycle a TDMA media access strategy is used.   Req: There is one configuration parameter for the slot length (slot_length) in the static segment, that defines this value. The length of the slots is configurable off-line but fixed during runtime.
 
Dynamic Segment
   Req: In a pure dynamic system the communication cycle starts with the start of cycle (SOC) symbol.   Req: The dynamic segment of the communication cycle consists of zero or more dynamic identifiers (slots) within the communication cycle.   Req: Bus access in the dynamic segment is done via static frame priorities according to the byteflight specification.   Req: In the dynamic segment the media access strategy is based on wait times (mini-slotting scheme) and the priority of identifiers.
           Controllers transmitting frames with higher priority identifiers send before controllers transmitting lower priority frames.   
           Req: The frame length in the dynamic segment is variable during runtime.   Req: In pure dynamic mode an external triggered SOC generation and with it the start of the communication cycle has to be supported. The timing behavior of the external trigger has to be monitored by the communication controller.
 
Frame Format FlexRay
   Req: Two frame formats as specified below must be supported.       

     Comment:
         The mixture of the two frame formats need not be supported, i.e., all nodes connected to a FlexRay communication system can be configured using only the FlexRay format (see  FIG. 108 ) or the byteflight format (see  FIG. 109 ).
 
FlexRay Frame Format
       

     The following refers to the FlexRay frame format.
         Req: It must be possible to use the FlexRay format in a pure static, in a combined static and dynamic, and in a pure dynamic configuration.   Req: The first section of the data field in a frame according to the FlexRay format must be configurable as a message ID field. This data field must be filterable by the receiver.       

     In  FIG. 108  the following abbreviations are used:
     Res: Reserved bits, 4 bit, for future protocol extensions.   ID: Identifier, 12 bit, value domain: (1 10  . . . 4095 10 ), defines the slot position in the static segment and defines the priority in the dynamic segment. A lower identifier determines a higher priority. The identifier of a frame must be unique within a cluster. Each controller can have one or more identifiers (in the static and the dynamic segment).   SYNC: Synchronization field, 1 bit, indicates that the slot is used for clock synchronization.   DLC: Data length code field, 7 bit, DLC*2=number of data bytes (0 10 , 2 10 , . . . , 246 10 ).   H-CRC: 9 Bit Cyclic Redundancy Check—Sequence. The H-CRC is calculated over the SYNC- and DLC-field.   NF: Null frame indication field, 1 bit, indicates that the corresponding data buffer is not updated by the host before sending.   CYCO: Cycle Counter, 6 bit, the cycle counter is increased simultaneously in all nodes by the controller at the start of each new communication cycle.   Message ID: The Message ID field is configurable to be used as the message identifier or as the first two data bytes.   D 0  . . . D 246 : Data bytes, 0-246 bytes.   CRC: 24 Bit Cyclic Redundancy Check—Sequence. The CRC is calculated over the complete frame.
 
Byteflight Frame Format
   

     The following refers to the byteflight frame format (see  FIG. 109 ).
         Req: The byteflight frame format must be supported for pure dynamic configurations.       

     In  FIG. 109  the following abbreviations are used:
     ID: Identifier, 8 bit, value domain: (1 10  . . . 255 10 ), defines the priority in the dynamic segment. A lower identifier determines a higher priority. The identifier of a frame must be unique within a cluster. Each controller can have one or more identifiers.   Res: Reserved bits, 4 bits, for future protocol extensions.   LEN: Length field, 4 bit, LEN=number of data bytes (0 10  . . . 12 10 ), a value higher than 12 is handled as LEN=12.   D 0  . . . D 11 : Data bytes, 0-12 Bytes   CRC: 15 Bit Cyclic Redundancy Check—Sequence (x 15 +x 14 +x 10 +x 8 +x 7 +x 4 +x 3 +1).   FCB: Fill completion bit: an additional bit is added to the 15 bit CRC to fill the complete word. The bit is set to “0” as LSB.
 
Frame Scheduling—Multiplexing of Sending Slots
   

     The following refers to frame scheduling and multiplexing of sending slots.
         Req: The cycle counter can be used to distinguish between different frame contents.       

     Comment:
         For a sending slot different send and receive buffers can be defined in different cycles (slot multiplexing).       

     Comment:
         The cycle counter can be used as a logical extension to the identifier (in the case of multiplexing).
 
Frame and Bit Coding
       

     The following refers to frame and bit coding.
         Req: The coding algorithm in the communication controller has to be robust against:
           glitches
 
Optical Physical Layer
   
               

     The following refers to the optical physical layer.
         Req: The controller must support at least the byteflight optical bit encoding.       

     Comment:
         In byteflight, frames on the communication media are composed of individual bytes consisting of a start bit, eight data bits and a stop bit.   In addition, transmission of each frame begins with a start sequence consisting of 6 logical “0”-bits. This is illustrated by the diagram in  FIG. 110 . Due to certain effects in the optical transmission, it is possible for the start sequence to be become shorter or longer during optical transmission. This is why the receiver accepts start sequences in the region of 1 to 9 logical “0”-bits. This is illustrated by the diagram in  FIG. 111 .
 
Electrical Physical Layer
       

     The following refers to the electrical physical layer.
         Req: Frames on the communication media for the electrical physical layer are composed as shown in  FIG. 112 . The frame end sequence may be empty.   Req: A suitable bit coding scheme has to be selected, in accordance to bandwidth efficiency and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements.
 
Frame Timing
       

     The following refers to frame timing.
         Req: Frame timing of different communication controller implementations must be interoperable.
 
Frame Timing for the Static Segment
   Req: Looking at the frame timing for the static segment, the reception start window shall be defined in relation to the precision. I.e., the start window must be greater than the precision.       

     Comment:
         The actual value for the reception start window must be defined in the implementation specification.   Req: In the static segment accurate timing requirements have to be ensured for correct frame reception. Frames may only start within the reception start window.       

     Comment:
         The length of the frame determines the frame duration. Correct reception is given if the respective frame does not violate the temporal borders given by the access scheme. The judgment of temporal correctness is based on a rigid timing scheme.   Req: The time difference between the predicted start StartNom and the observed start of the frame (SOF) is used by the clock synchronization algorithm.   Req: The length of the inter frame gap (IFG) has to be minimized, in order to optimize the net communication rate.
 
Frame Timing for the Dynamic Segment
   Req: Looking at the frame timing for the dynamic segment, the frame timing in the dynamic segment must be defined due to the byteflight specification.
 
Start-Up
 
Requirements
       

     The following refers to the start-up of the communication system.
         Req: For each configuration (Pure Static, Pure Dynamic and Mixed Systems) the start-up of the communication network has to be possible as soon as two nodes are able to communicate.   Req: The integration of controllers that are powered on later must not disturb the start-up procedure of the other nodes.   Req: The start-up and re-integration of controllers shall not disturb the normal operation of the network.   Req: The worst-case start-up time under the fault conditions given above has to be provided and guaranteed by the supplier of the communication controller. The communication network must be operational after 100 ms.       

     Comment:
         The application designer has to consider the start-up time during the determination of the configuration parameters. Typical automotive applications require a worst case startup time of 100 ms. For system configurations with extremely long communication cycles longer startup times are acceptable.   Req: During start-up a communication controller sets the cycle counter according to the value in the received frame. The cycle time is derived from the frame ID and set accordingly.   Req: The startup must work without reliance on collision detection.       

     Comment:
         Collisions can occur on the bus during start-up and in the case of faults. In star topologies collision detection is not always feasible.
 
Principle of Operation—Protocol Modes
 
Pure Static System and Mixed System
   Req: The start-up has to work as a distributed algorithm.   Req: Only controllers that participate in clock synchronization (sync bit set) are allowed to start up the system.       

     Comment:
         In a dual channel system only controllers connected to both channels are allowed to execute the start-up in a heterogeneous topology (mixing controllers with single channel and controllers with dual channel).   Controllers connected to only one channel are not allowed to start-up the bus because they may corrupt the traffic of this channel in case of an incoming-link failure by sending frames after the listen-timeout (listen_timeout).   Req: The start-up of the communication network, the integration of nodes powered on later and the re-integration of failed nodes must be fault-tolerant against:
           the temporary/permanent failure of one or more communication controllers (down to one controller sending in the static segment for mixed or pure static configurations),   the temporary/permanent failure of one or more communication channel(s) in a redundant configuration, and   the loss of one or more frames.
 
Pure Dynamic System
   
           Req: A single master sends the SOC symbol. The master shall be defined at design time.
 
Shutdown
       

     The following refers to shut-down of the communication system.
         Req: The co-ordinated shutdown of the FlexRay cluster, including all nodes and all stars initiated by the application must be possible. The interference with the wake-up mechanism must be handled.   Req: The communication system has to support a synchronized system shutdown without error indications.
 
Clock Synchronization
       

     The following refers to clock synchronization of the nodes in the communication system. 
     Comment: 
     The proper synchronization of the individual clocks of the communication controllers is a pre-requisite for the TDMA communication scheme. 
     The following description refers to the FlexRay clock synchronization mechanism (based on the Fault-Tolerant Midpoint algorithm). 
     Pure Dynamic System 
     
         
         
           
             Req: In a pure dynamic operation the clock synchronization is performed by a master (SOC).
 
Pure Static and Mixed System
 
             Req: The global time is a vector of two values. Global time=&lt;cycle_counter, cycle_time&gt;. 
             Req: The cycle time is a counter incremented in units of macroticks. The cycle time is reset to 0 at the beginning of each communication cycle. 
             Req: The macrotick defines the resolution of the global time within one cluster. A resolution of 1 μs must be achievable in realistic configurations. 
             Req: The macrotick shall be independent of oscillator frequency. 
           
         
       
    
     Comment:
         In the implementation each (local) macrotick is an integer multiple of the (local) clock tick, i.e. depends on the oscillator frequency, but the factors of two different macroticks can be different, so over a cycle, independence can be achieved.   Req: The microtick defines the accuracy of the clock difference measurement. A resolution of &lt;=50 ns is required for the microtick.       

     Comment:
         Typical automotive applications require a resolution of 50 nanosecond. For system configurations with low bandwidth, higher values are acceptable.   Req: The clock synchronization mechanism must be able to keep all fault-free controllers within the precision. A clock synchronization precision within the different controllers of better than 1 microsecond is required.       

     Comment:
         Typical automotive applications require a precision of 1 microsecond. For system configurations with lower precision requirements, greater values are acceptable.   Req: The absolute value of the global time must be the same at every controller, within the limits defined by the precision. During start-up the first sending node determines the value of the global time.   Req: The fault tolerance of the clock synchronization mechanism must be scalable with the number of controllers. The level of fault tolerance depends on the number of actual nodes in the system (3k+1 to tolerate k asymmetric faults). In a reduced fault-tolerant configuration of less than four controllers (e.g., 2 or 3, in a degraded mode of operation) the synchronization must be possible. For 4 to 6 controllers the clock synchronization mechanism must be fault-tolerant against 1 (asymmetric) fault. For 7 or more controllers the clock synchronization mechanism must be fault-tolerant against 2 (asymmetric) faults.   Req: The clock synchronization mechanism must prevent the formation of cliques with different notions of time within the network.   Req: The clock synchronization mechanism must be able to operate with oscillators that have automotive quality. In particular the clock synchronization mechanism must be able to deal with the physical phenomena (drift, deterioration) that can occur during an automobile lifetime.   Req: A subset of controllers must be configured to send sync-frames (a frame with a set SYNC bit). In a dual channel system only controllers connected to both channels may belong to this subset.   Req: Only one static sending slot of each controller is allowed to contribute to the clock synchronization mechanism, i.e., a controller may send at most one sync-frame per communication cycle.   Req: Only correctly received sync-frames are used for clock synchronization.   Req: Every node has to use all available sync-frames for clock synchronization.   Req: The clock synchronization and the implementation of the clock synchronization shall be as resilient as possible against design violations resulting from environment or possible misuse.
 
Principle of Operation
       

     The following refers to the principle of operation. 
     Obtaining the Time Values 
     
         
         
           
             Req: In the static segment every node measures the time difference between the actual receive time and the expected receive time for the sync-frames with a resolution of a microtick. 
             Req: This time difference measurement is done for all channels. 
             Req: A start of frame (SOF)-window is placed around the expected receive time of an SOF. The length of the receive-window is equal to the length of the SOF-window. 
             Req: Time values are obtained for correct frames only. 
           
         
       
    
     Comment:
         Note that one of the reasons why a frame is considered incorrect is reception outside the receive window. The stringent application of the receive-window mechanism ensures that synchronization errors of nodes are detectable.
 
Measurement Method
   Req: The measurement of the clock deviations is done through measuring the differences between the expected arrival time and the actual arrival time. The expected arrival time of a frame is defined by the internal view of the cycle time.
 
Synchronization Algorithm
       

     The following refers to the synchronization algorithm.
         Req: The synchronization algorithm uses a fault-tolerant midpoint algorithm (FTM) that operates with an arbitrary number of controllers.       

     Comment, Description of the FTM:
         The measured values are sorted and the k largest and smallest values are discarded. k is adapted dynamically so that at least 2 measured values are remaining.   The largest and the smallest of the remaining values are selected for the calculation of the midpoint value, i.e., average of those two values. The resulting value in a node describes the deviation of the own clock from the global time base and serves as a correction term.   Req: The resulting correction term(s) shall be used for error detection of the communication controller. If the correction term cannot be applied, an error has to be signaled to the host.   Req: The clock correction term(s) calculated in the previous step shall be applied to the local clock.   Req: If equal or more than half of the frames are received outside the reception start window a synchronization error is indicated to the host. The synchronization error is a fatal error the controller has to reintegrate.       

     Comment
         This mechanism prevents the formation of cliques.
 
External Synchronization
       

     The following refers to the external synchronization
         Req: External synchronization must be supported.       

     Comment:
         External synchronization is necessary for the synchronization of a FlexRay network to an external time reference, e.g., a GPS receiver or a DCF77 receiver, or to synchronize several FlexRay networks.   Req: Each controller can add an additional external clock correction term(s) to the calculated clock correction term(s).   Req: The resulting clock correction term(s) shall not be greater than the maximum allowed correction term(s) or smaller than the minimum allowed term(s). The communication controller shall limit the applied correction term(s) to allowed values.   Req: The host shall be able to read the current (local) correction term(s) (current clock value) and set the external correction term(s).   Req: A hardware input signal at the communication controller for external synchronization is required.   Req: The hardware input signal shall be connected to the internal soft-reset of the controller. It shall be possible to release the controller from soft reset at a specific time by the host.
 
Support of Application Agreement Protocols
   Req: The protocol has to support the realization of application agreement protocols. This requires multiple sending slots to achieve agreement within one communication cycle.
 
Support of Network Management
   Req: Support of synchronous distributed application startup and shutdown with acceptable timing and fault tolerance characteristics.   Req: Support of node and network modes with high security against critical inadvertent mode changes.
 
Hardware Specification
       

     The following part of the description explains the hardware-related requirements for a FlexRay system. 
     General Requirements 
     Regarding the communication hardware, a distributed system of FlexRay nodes must offer some properties when being designed by using active stars and passive busses:
         Req: One and two channel solutions have to be supported.   Req: An electrical and optical physical layer must be supported.   Req: Communication via redundant physical links is optional. The communication system must support both communication via redundant and non-redundant physical links. A mix of redundant and non-redundant physical links must be supported.   Req: When using active stars several 1:1 links must be used.   Req: Wake-up of nodes and stars via the communication system must be supported. Signaling on one channel is sufficient for wake-up.   Req: A baud-rate from 500 kbit/s up to 10 Mbit/s must be supported.   Req: A power mode management must be supported.
 
Topology
   Req: The protocol has to be independent from the topology as far as possible. Mixed and homogeneous system topologies must be supported.   Req: A FlexRay network using a passive bus must be possible (see  FIG. 114 ).   Req: A FlexRay network using a passive star must be possible.   Req: A FlexRay network using a active star must be possible (see  FIG. 113 ).   Req: Support for different topologies/physical layers on different channels is desirable.   Req: Support for different physical layers on one channel is desirable.   Req: A distributed system of FlexRay nodes can be designed by combining the active star and the passive bus approach (see  FIG. 115 ). Several nodes may be connected to a branch.       

     Each node must adhere to the following requirements (see  FIG. 103 ):
         Req: Within a node  1  or  2  bus drivers must be connected to a single communication controller.       

     Each active star must adhere to the following requirements (see  FIG. 116 ):
         Req: No communication controller is required to perform the star functionality.   Req: No host is required to perform the star functionality.       

     Comment:
         An implementation may integrate the star within an ECU.   Req: A branch of an active star has to be de-activated if a faulty communication signal is detected:
           1) permanent “0” on the bus or   2) permanent “1” on the bus or   3) permanent noise on the bus.   
           Req: A de-activated branch may not influence the communication of the active modules (fail silent).   Req: A de-activated branch has to be re-activated if the failure condition which leads to a faulty communication signal is no longer available.
 
Automotive Constraints
       

     The communication system according to the present invention can be used in almost any environment. However, preferably it is used in vehicles of any kind, in particular in safety critical applications in the automotive sector. In that case the communication system has to fulfill the following automotive constraints:
         Req: FlexRay devices must meet automotive temperature requirements.       

     Comment
         General temperature requirements include a range of −40 to +125 degrees Celsius.   Special applications may require higher temperatures, e.g., near braking actuators.   Req: Each product has to be optimized to meet the automotive and legal EMC requirements. External filters may not be required but may well be used.       

     Comment:
         Listed severity levels as named won&#39;t be achievable when using a passive bus.   Req: The power consumption during the normal operating mode and the low power mode has to be minimized.       

     Comment:
         Typical values are given in the following table 1:       

     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 1 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Typical current consumption. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Function 
                 Min. 
                 Typ. 
                 Max. 
                 Unit 
                 Remarks 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Quiescent current 
                   
                 10 
                   
                 μA 
                 The bus driver 
               
               
                 (from the permanent 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 monitors wake-up 
               
               
                 power) of the 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 events, the voltage 
               
               
                 bus driver 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 regulator is switched 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 off 
               
               
                 Current for the bus 
                   
                 10 
                   
                 mA 
                 bus free - no actual 
               
               
                 driver and the 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 communication 
               
               
                 communication 
               
               
                 controller 
               
               
                 Current for the 
                   
                 50 
                   
                 mA 
                 bus busy - 
               
               
                 bus driver and the 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 communication active 
               
               
                 communication 
               
               
                 controller 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
         
         
           
             Req: The voltage supply for the communication controller should be the same as for commercially available ECUs. 
           
         
       
    
     Comment:
         Today most ECUs support 5 V. For optimizations e.g., 3 V are allowed.   Req: All inputs and outputs of the bus driver and the communication controller which are directly coupled to the wire harness have to fit the known electric requirements. Support of future high supply voltages (36/42 V instead of 12 V) must be supported.
 
Architecture—Power Modes
       

     This part of the description summarizes the requirements on the communication controller and the bus driver to run an ECU in several modes.
         Req: The power modes of the ECU must be sensitive to control signals from the host and wake-up signals from the transmission media, from the ECU internally (e.g., from the host) and optionally from the ECU externally (e.g., by a switch).   Req: At least 3 power modes must be distinguished for communication controllers and bus drivers and stars (see Table 2):
           Normal (voltage regulator(s) active, communication possible)   Standby (voltage regulator(s) active, communication not possible)   Sleep (voltage regulator(s) not active, communication not possible)   
               

     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 2 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Power modes 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Power Mode of the 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Node 
                 Communication 
                 Power Supply 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Normal 
                 available 
                 available 
               
               
                   
                 Standby 
                 not available 
                 available 
               
               
                   
                 Sleep 
                 not available 
                 not available 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
         
         
           
             Req: The power modes of the active star must be controlled by the bus drivers automatically. It is not desireable that a dedicated ‘wake-up’ and ‘shut-down’ command is send to the star or additional wiring is required.
 
Communication Controller
 
           
         
       
    
     The following refers to the Communication Controller:
         Req: A communication controller must include an interface to connect a host.   Req: Parts of the behavior visible to the host, e.g., application control, configuration, message area, communication controller status, interrupts, etc. have to be confirmed among the suppliers and specified.   Req: The time base of the redundant channels must be the same within each node (e.g., by a single state machine).   Req: The functionality of the communication controller must be independent of the existence of a bus guardian.   Req: For a stand-alone controller the pin-out must be completely specified and documented.
 
States and Operating Modes
   Req: Power-on and NOT (power-on) must be distinguished at least.   Req: The controller has to be passive outside the mode power-on.   Req: The controller has to be resetable externally.   Req: The controller has to support at least one low-power mode.   Req: The controller modes have to be defined in accordance with the bus driver modes.
 
Logical Line Operation on the Communication Media (e.g. bus)
   Req: At least the following information has to be distinguished:       bus busy: data or SOC symbol are transmitted.   bus idle.
       Req: The encoding/decoding method has to allow both optical and electrical communication networks. At least one method has to be supported:
           Non Return to Zero (NRZ) in the physical layer coding scheme (see byteflight specification).   
           Req: Bit sampling must be robust against disturbances typically inside vehicles e.g., signal delay, edge jitter, baud-rate jitter.   Req: Bit sampling must be able to deal with e.g., temperature variations or tolerances of electrical and physical parameters.
 
Optical Driver
   Req: See the byteflight specification.
 
Electrical Bus Driver
   Req: For a bus driver the pin-out must be completely specified and documented.   Req: For redundant configurations an implementation has to be chosen which minimizes the probability of common mode failures of both bus drivers (→each redundant communication is disturbed).   
       

     Comment:
         Two bus drivers to support redundant communication by a single communication controller may possibly not be implemented on a single die.   Two bus drivers to support redundant communication by a single communication controller can be integrated in one package, if any common mode failure can be excluded.   Req: The bus driver must provide status information and diagnostics information which can be read by any p-controller optionally.   Req: The bus driver must be protected against electrical over-voltage and short-circuits.
 
Voltage Monitoring
   Req: The bus driver must monitor the battery voltage and has to provide status information.   Req: The bus driver must detect an interrupted connection to the battery and has to provide status information.
 
States and Operating Modes
       

     The bus driver has to support several states or operating modes:
         Req: Power-on and NOT (power-on) must be distinguished
           →permanent power   →regulator voltage   
           Req: The bus driver has to support at least two low-power modes.   Req: The bus driver has to be able to signal an internal power down mode to an external voltage regulator.   Req: the bus driver has to support a “shutdown mode”
           →this mode has to be reached by secured mechanisms on demand of the host   →this mode must be left only by a power down   →the bus driver has to be passive and has to signal to the voltage regulator to switch off.   
           Req: The bus-levels have to be chosen by the bus driver automatically to support any net-wide power down modes.
 
Bus Guardian
   Req: The failure of a communication controller in the time domain, e.g., a communication controller sends in a time slot when it is not allowed to send, must be prevented by a bus guardian. The probability for common mode failures in the time domain affecting both, the communication controller and the bus guardian must be sufficiently low.   Req: The bus guardian must protect the static slots (controller) from each other. In the dynamic segment the bus guardian grants all controllers access to the bus.       

     Comment:
         One of the main reasons for an error in the time domain is an erroneous internal state that leads to an incorrect (timing) access to the communication media.   Req: The bus guardian must be able to detect errors in the physical clock source as well as errors in the internal representation of the time base of the communication controller.       

     Comment:
         One of the main reasons for an error in the time domain is an error in the clock source of the communication controller. Hence, the clock source check mechanism of the bus guardian must concentrate on the main physically possible failure modes of the clock source of the communication controller.   The bus guardian may have a clock source of its own. Two bus guardians, which are connected to the same communication controller can use the same clock source.   Req: The bus guardian must not disable access to more than one channel, i.e., one bus guardian per channel is required.   Req: It must be possible to implement the bus guardian as a stand-alone circuit. This circuit has to be combinable with the known state of the art physical layers.       

     Comment:
         The bus guardian could be integrated in the bus driver. The interface(s) towards the communication controller (and the bus driver) must be defined.   Req: It must be possible to implement the bus guardian as a stand-alone circuit in the star coupler. This circuit has to interact with the known state of the art physical layer.   Req: The bus guardian has to check the correct enabling of the driver output stage.   Req: The mechanism of separating the communication controller from the communication media must be checked. At least once per driving cycle (power on/power off) is sufficient.   Req: The bus guardian is configured via a configuration data interface.   Req: The bus guardian has to enable and disable the bus driver output stage according to a predefined timing pattern. If the bus guardian detects an error in the timing pattern of the communication controller it permanently disables access to the communication media and signals this.   Req: If an error in the bus guardian occurs the communication channel must not be disturbed (monopolized).   Req: The configuration data interface must be specified and documented. This mainly includes the logical contents of the timing pattern.
 
Wake-Up
   Req: Several wake-up mechanisms have to be taken into consideration.
 
ECU→Bus Driver
   Req: The bus driver has to be woken up by any source inside or outside the ECU (local wake-up).   Req: The wake has to be two edge sensitive.       

     EXAMPLE 
     e.g., edge at a Wakeup pin of the Bus Driver 
     Bus→Bus Driver 
     
         
         
           
             Req: From the host&#39;s point of view a general wake-up mechanism is required for both electrical and optical systems. 
             Req: The bus driver should be woken up via standard communication (message-pattern). 
             Req: The wake-up detector has to be robust against disturbances in vehicles like common mode signals by emission. 
             Req: The bus driver may not be woken up by any noise.
 
Bus Driver→Controller
 
             Req: The bus driver has to wake up the controller by any signal on the interface. A dedicated wake-up line is not required. 
           
         
       
    
     EXAMPLE 
     e.g., edge at the receive (Rx) pin produced by the bus driver 
     Bus Driver→Power Supply 
     
         
         
           
             Req: The bus driver has to signal its sleep state, e.g., to control the voltage regulator. 
           
         
       
    
     EXAMPLE 
     inhibit signal 
     Controller→Bus Driver 
     
         
         
           
             Req: The controller must be able to wake-up the bus driver by any signal on the interface. A dedicated wake-up line is not required. 
           
         
       
    
     EXAMPLE 
     Edge at the Send (Tx) pin 
     Selective Sleep 
     Req: The realization of selective sleep has to be supported. 
     Interfaces 
     The following refers to the interfaces provided within a node of the communication system: The interfaces between the single modules (host, controller, bus driver, bus guardian, and power supply) have to be agreed upon among the suppliers according to the general requirements defined in this document.  FIG. 117  shows an overview of all interfaces. 
     Communication Controller   Host Interface (CHI) 
     General Requirements 
     
         
         
           
             Req: The configuration data of the communication controllers must be securable (e.g., by soft reset) against accidental access and modifications. 
             Req: Protect against improper host modification of BG and CC configuration data. 
             Req: The interface between the host and the communication controller should be implemented as a 16 bit interface (selectable multiplexed/non-multiplexed bus interface). 
             Req: Functional compatibility between different suppliers has to be guaranteed at CHI level. 
             Req: The CHI has to be configurable into transmit and dedicated receive buffers and receive buffers with first in first out (FIFO) behavior. 
             Req: If the FIFO queue is full and new data arrives the oldest data is overwritten. The FIFO queue must set a diagnosis bit when data in the buffer is overwritten. 
             Req: Most significant bit/byte (MSB) first is used for frame transmission. 
           
         
       
    
     Comment:
         The status area of the CHI contains communication controller status fields, which are written by the controller and which are read-only for the host. The status fields will be defined in the protocol specification and interface specification.   The control area in the CHI contains fields that allow the host to control the behavior of the communication controller. The control fields will be defined in the protocol specification and interface specification.   The message area in the CHI contains a memory area where the frames to be sent/received are stored together with status information for each frame. The layout of this memory area is determined in the configuration data of each communication controller. The message buffer status fields will be defined in the protocol specification and interface specification.   Req: Support of traceability of system- and component-level faults to identify root causes of failures.   Req: The hardware implementation should verify that only one combination of frame ID and sync bit is considered valid for transmission.
 
Frame Filtering and Masking
   Req: Message Reception, every message buffer has to contain a channel, frame ID and cycle counter which are used for message filtering. Optionally the first two data bytes of each message buffer are used as message ID filter.
           Options for filtering:   1) Frame ID+channel   2) Frame ID+cycle counter+channel   3) Message ID+cycle counter+channel   
               

     Comment: 
     Filtering: Filtering of messages means that for each message buffer the message&#39;s frame ID, cycle count and message ID are parameters that define in which message buffer the correctly (correct CRC, time, etc.) received message is stored or if the message is discarded.
         Req: There must be at least one mask register per communication controller and channel that allows all combinations of masking.       

     Comment:
         Masking: Masking of message filters means that some (parts) of the filtering parameters may be configured to be disregarded (set to “don&#39;t care”).   Req: Message transmission, filtering parameters for transmission are frame ID and cycle counter; there is no masking possible for the frame ID. Each transmit buffer has its own mask for the cycle counter.
 
Interrupts
   Req: The host computer has to be able to request different interrupts from the communication controller: at least read interrupt (buffer), write interrupt (buffer), 2 independent timer interrupts.   Req: Timer interrupt: the host can request a time interrupt at any absolute point in the global time (across communication cycle borders).   Req: One interrupt line is required for a standalone controller implementation.   Req: Interrupts can be mapped to one or more interrupt lines in an integrated controller.
 
Host Bus Guardian Interface
   Req: The bus guardian configuration data is written during download and then stored in a local memory of the bus guardian.   Req: During normal operation no configuration data transfer from the host to the bus guardian is allowed.   Req: The bus guardian periodically updates a status field which can be accessed by the host/bus guardian interface containing at least the following status information:
 
State of the Bus
 
State of the Controller
 
Communication Controller Bus Guardian Interface
   Req: At least the following control information is required:
 
ARM Signal
 
Communication Controller Bus Driver Interface
   Req: This interface has to be confirmed among the suppliers.       

     EXAMPLE 
     Tx, TxEnable (TxEN) 
     Rx, RxEnable (RxEN) 
     Bus Guardian Bus Driver Interface 
     Bus Driver Power Supply Interface 
     
         
         
           
             Req: To perform the wake-up and sleep functionality an interface between bus driver and power supply is required.
 
Error Handling
 
           
         
       
    
     The following refers to the error handling. 
     The communication system and its components shall offer adequate error management mechanisms to deal with faults arising from the following levels:
         media   bit (coding)   frame   data   topology and   time.       

     The communication system furthermore shall offer diagnosis information to the host computer with respect to controller, bus (channel), and incoming/outgoing link failures. 
     Requirements 
     Req: The error management shall follow the “never-give-up” philosophy. 
     Comment:
         This means that the communication protocol has to support proper operation until a certain critical error states is reached.   Req: The non-arrival of periodic messages shall not be unrecognized.       

     Comment:
         It is okay, if, e.g. one, periodic message is missed, but this has to be detected. The fact, that a periodic message was missed should be signaled to the host.   Req: If a periodic message was missed, no random data shall be given to the host.   Req: Data content of messages, (periodic and spontaneous) must not be changed by the communication protocol.   Req: The change of data content shall be signaled to the host.   Req: After an error was detected at a communication partner in the network, the functionality of the other communication partners shall not be influenced.       

     Comment:
         The correct function may not depend from the correct function of a certain host, of a certain communication controller or of a certain power supply.       

     The communication controller shall detect the following list of errors:
         Req: Synchronization error. The communication controller is not any more synchronized to the global time on the bus.   Req: The communication network must offer diagnosis information to the host computer with respect to the bus (channel), incoming/outgoing link failures.   Req: The communication network must offer diagnosis information to the host computer within a defined maximum delay after the occurrence of the failure of the diagnosis element.   Req: The communication network is not required to provide consistent and agreed diagnosis information to the host computer.
 
Hardware Units
       

     The following faults have at least to be detected by the communication controller:
         Req: Defect time source (e.g., broken crystal).   Req: Low voltage.
           The following faults has to be recognized by the bus driver as errors:   
           Req: Faulty communication signals caused by e.g. any faulty transmission media (e.g., a broken line, short circuit to ground, . . . ).   Req: Incorrect communication with the host e.g., communication via the data interface.   Req: Incorrect communication with the communication controller e.g., bus-blocking transmit signals.   Req: De-activated branch.
 
Interfaces
   Req: Status information on detected errors must be provided. Additionally it is required that maskable interrupts for certain detected errors can be requested by the host.
 
Constant Definitions
       

     In the following part of the description the constants for a number of design parameters defined throughout the document are set to actual values. The values mentioned are examples and can be replaced by almost any desired value. 
     Table 3 shows Communication Network Constants (Min/Max). 
                     TABLE 3                  Definition of the constants used throughout the specification.                         Name   Value   Description                                 CONTROLLER_MAX   64   Maximum number of controllers               connected to one communication               channel.       CYCLE_LENGTH_MIN   250 μs   Minimum length of the               configurable communication               cycle.       CYCLE_LENGTH_MAX   64 ms   Maximum length of the               configurable communication               cycle.       DATA_BYTES_MAX   246   Maximum number of data bytes.       DYNAMIC_IDS   4095   Maximum number of               dynamic identifiers.       STATIC_SLOTS_MIN   2   Minimum number of static slots               in a static segment of a               communication cycle       STATIC_SLOTS_MAX   4095   Maximum number of static slots               in a static segment               of a communication cycle                    
Glossary
 
     In the following glossary some of the terms used for description of the present invention are defined. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Bus 
                 Consists of one or several channels. 
               
               
                 Bus Driver 
                 A bus driver connects a communication controller to one 
               
               
                   
                 channel. 
               
               
                 Bus Guardian 
                 A bus guardian protects one channel from timing failures of 
               
               
                   
                 the communication controller. It is therefore connected to one 
               
               
                   
                 communication controller and one bus driver. The bus 
               
               
                   
                 guardian must be independent from the protocol 
               
               
                   
                 communication controller. 
               
               
                 byteflight 
                 Communication network developed by BMW AG, Motorola, 
               
               
                   
                 ELMOS, Infineon, Siemens EC, Steinbeis Transferzentrum für 
               
               
                   
                 Prozessautomatisierung, IXXAT (see www.byteflight.com) 
               
               
                 Channel 
                 A channel is a physical connection between several 
               
               
                   
                 communication controllers. A redundant channel consists of 
               
               
                   
                 two channels connecting the same communication controllers. 
               
               
                 CHI 
                 Controller Host Interface. 
               
               
                 Clique 
                 Set of communication controllers having the same view of 
               
               
                   
                 certain system properties, e.g., the global time value, or the 
               
               
                   
                 activity state of communication controllers. 
               
               
                 Cluster 
                 Synonym for network within this specification. 
               
               
                 Cluster time 
                 Same as cycle time. 
               
               
                 Communication Controller 
                 A communication controller is connected to one or two 
               
               
                   
                 channels where it can send and receive frames. 
               
               
                 Communication Cycle 
                 Periodic data transfer mechanism. Structure and timing are 
               
               
                   
                 statically defined. However, a static and a dynamic segment 
               
               
                   
                 allows for the transmission of both, state and event 
               
               
                   
                 information. 
               
               
                 Controller 
                 see, Communication Controller. 
               
               
                 CRC 
                 Cyclic Redundancy Code attached to a frame. 
               
               
                 CYCLE 
                 The CYCLE field is used to transmit the cycle counter. The 
               
               
                   
                 cycle counter is increased simultaneously in all nodes by the 
               
               
                   
                 communication controller at the start of each new 
               
               
                   
                 communication cycle. 
               
               
                 Cycle Counter 
                 Contains the number of the current communication cycle. 
               
               
                 Cycle time 
                 Contains the time within a communication cycle in units of 
               
               
                   
                 macroticks. Same as cluster time. 
               
               
                 DATA 
                 Data field in a frame. 
               
               
                 DLC: 
                 Data length field 
               
               
                 Dynamic Segment 
                 Segment of the communication cycle where frames are 
               
               
                   
                 transmitted according to a mini-slotting algorithm. The 
               
               
                   
                 sending order is defined by a statically determined identifier. 
               
               
                   
                 Identifiers with smaller numbers have priority over identifiers 
               
               
                   
                 with higher numbers. A communication cycle may consist of 
               
               
                   
                 the static segment only. 
               
               
                 EOF 
                 End Of Frame. An optical or electrical physical layer may 
               
               
                   
                 require different end of frame sequences. 
               
               
                 ECU 
                 Electronic Control Unit. Same as node. 
               
               
                 EMC 
                 Electro Magnetic Compatibility. 
               
               
                 FIFO 
                 First In First Out. Buffers can be configured to work as a FIFO 
               
               
                   
                 memory for frames. 
               
               
                 Frame 
                 A frame consists of all information transmitted in one slot 
               
               
                   
                 (with one identifier) on one channel. 
               
               
                 FTA 
                 Fault Tolerant Average. The FTA is a fault tolerant clock 
               
               
                   
                 synchronization algorithm that is able to tolerate up to a pre- 
               
               
                   
                 defined number k of maliciously faulty clocks. This algorithm 
               
               
                   
                 is based on a sorted array of clock deviations. The lower and 
               
               
                   
                 upper k clock deviation values are discarded. From the 
               
               
                   
                 remaining clock deviation values the average value is 
               
               
                   
                 calculated and then used for the clock correction. 
               
               
                 FTM 
                 Fault Tolerant Midpoint. The FTM is a fault tolerant clock 
               
               
                   
                 synchronization algorithm that is able to tolerate up to a pre- 
               
               
                   
                 defined number k of maliciously faulty clocks. This algorithm 
               
               
                   
                 is based on a sorted array of clock deviations. The lower and 
               
               
                   
                 upper k clock deviation values are discarded. From the 
               
               
                   
                 remaining clock deviation values the median value is chosen 
               
               
                   
                 for the clock correction. 
               
               
                 Gateway 
                 A node may function as a gateway and connect two or more 
               
               
                   
                 networks. 
               
               
                 Global time 
                 Contains the combination of cycle counter and cluster time. 
               
               
                 Hamming Distance 
                 Minimum distance of any two code words within a code. 
               
               
                 Host 
                 The host is the part of an ECU where the application software 
               
               
                   
                 is executed, separated by the CHI from the communication 
               
               
                   
                 network. 
               
               
                 ID 
                 The frame identifier defines the slot position in the static 
               
               
                   
                 segment and defines the priority in the dynamic segment. A 
               
               
                   
                 lower identifier determines a higher priority. Identifier 0 is 
               
               
                   
                 reserved for the SOC symbol. The identifier of a frame must 
               
               
                   
                 be unique within a cluster. Each controller can have one or 
               
               
                   
                 more identifiers (in the static and the dynamic segment). 
               
               
                 Identifier 
                 see, ID. 
               
               
                 IFG 
                 Inter Frame Gap. 
               
               
                 LEN 
                 Length field of a frame. 
               
               
                 LLI 
                 Logical Line Interface. 
               
               
                 LSB 
                 Least Significant Bit/Byte. 
               
               
                 MAC 
                 Media Access Control. 
               
               
                 Macrotick 
                 Basic unit of time measurement within a network of 
               
               
                   
                 communication controllers. The clock synchronization 
               
               
                   
                 mechanism guarantees that the clock values at all non-faulty 
               
               
                   
                 controllers are equal. The uncertainty in the clock values is 
               
               
                   
                 bounded by the precision. 
               
               
                 Message 
                 Application data transported within a frame. Several 
               
               
                   
                 messages may be packed together to constitute a frame. 
               
               
                 Microtick 
                 Basic unit of time measurement within a communication 
               
               
                   
                 controller for measuring the time difference between the 
               
               
                   
                 controllers clock and the clocks of the other communication 
               
               
                   
                 controllers. Clock correction is done in units of Microtick. 
               
               
                 MSB 
                 Most Significant Bit/Byte. 
               
               
                 Network 
                 A network consists of a set of nodes (more than one node) 
               
               
                   
                 connected by communication subsystem. Networks are 
               
               
                   
                 connected by special nodes (gateways). Same as Cluster. 
               
               
                 Node 
                 A node may contain one or more communication controllers. 
               
               
                   
                 Equivalent to ECU (Electronic Control Unit). 
               
               
                 Nominal Precision 
                 The nominal precision is the clock synchronization precision 
               
               
                   
                 that can be reached by the local clock synchronization of a 
               
               
                   
                 cluster. 
               
               
                 NRZ 
                 Non Return to Zero physical layer coding scheme. 
               
               
                 Precision 
                 The precision is a time interval bounding the deviations 
               
               
                   
                 between the local clocks of all active communication 
               
               
                   
                 controllers. If a communication controllers clock deviates 
               
               
                   
                 more than the precision from the clocks of the other 
               
               
                   
                 controllers it must not participate in the communication any 
               
               
                   
                 longer. 
               
               
                 Slot 
                 Duration of time during which one communication controller 
               
               
                   
                 may access the communication medium. 
               
               
                 SOC 
                 Start of Cycle. Defines the start of a communication cycle in 
               
               
                   
                 the pure dynamic mode, and the start of communication for 
               
               
                   
                 start-up. 
               
               
                 SOF 
                 Start of Frame. An optical or electrical physical layer may 
               
               
                   
                 require different start of frame sequences. 
               
               
                 Star Coupler 
                 A star coupler is connected to one channel. 
               
               
                 Static Segment 
                 Segment of the communication cycle where frames are 
               
               
                   
                 transmitted according to a statically defined TDMA scheme. A 
               
               
                   
                 communication cycle may consist of the static segment only. 
               
               
                 SYNC 
                 Synchronization field. This field indicates that the slot is used 
               
               
                   
                 for clock synchronization. 
               
               
                 TDMA 
                 Time Division Multiple Access. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The following is a description of the notation used for variables, constants and parameters in this document. 
                     TABLE 4                  Naming Conventions                         Naming   Information           Convention   Type   Description               cName   Protocol   Values used to define characteristics or limits of the           Constant   protocol. These values are fixed for the protocol and can               not be changed.       vName   Node Variable   Values which will be changed depending on time, events,               etc.       gName   Cluster   Parameter which must have the same value in all nodes           Constant   in a cluster, is initialized during soft reset, and can only               be changed during soft reset       pName   Node Constant   Parameter which may differ in nodes of a cluster, is               initialized during soft reset, and can only be changed               during soft reset       fName   Frame Variable   Parameters which are transmitted as part of a FlexRay or               byteflight frame. These variables are set by the               transmitting node and read by the receiving nodes.       xdName   Time Duration   Value (variable, parameter, etc.) describing a time               duration, the time between two time points       xtName   Time   Value (variable, constant, etc.) describing an instant       xsName   Set   Set of values (variables, parameters, etc.)       xyName[ch]   Channel   Set of variables/parameters that are channel specific.           Specific Info   xyName[ch] represents the pair of variables, xyName[A]               represents the variable associated with channel A,               xyName[B] represents variable associated with channel               B.       S_Name   Event   Internal event signal sent between various portions of the               protocol description. These do not necessarily represent               actual parameters, but rather represent an abstract               method by which various protocol descriptions can               interact.       x       Stands for one of c, v, g, or p above       y       Optionally stands for one of d, t, or s above.                    
Pseudocode Conventions
 
     To specify functions and algorithms short code pieces are used. The pseudocode is loosely based on the programming language used by MATLAB. The following table 5 outlines some of the pseudocode conventions (functions and elements). 
                     TABLE 5                  Pseudocode Conventions                     Function or Element   Description               x = LENGTH(list)   Returns the number of elements in the list “list”       list = [ ]   Sets the list “list” to an empty list (i.e., a list           with no elements)       list = [list, x]   Appends element “x’” to the end of the list “list”       x = list(i)   “x” is the i-th element of the list “list”. list(1) is           the first element of the list “list”       x = SORT(list)   “x” is a sorted list containing the elements from           the n-element list “list” placed in decreasing           order such that           x(1) ≧ x(2) ≧ x(3) ≧ . . . . ≧ x(n − 1) ≧ x(n)       x = MIN(a,b)   Minimum function. If both a and b are valid it           returns a if a &lt; b, otherwise returns b; if a           invalid returns b, if b invalid returns a, if a and           b invalid returns an empty set       x = Midterm(list)   “x” is the result of the Fault Tolerant Midpoint           Algorithm executed on the list “list”. for the           definition of the Fault-tolerant Midpoint           Algorithm       x = Int[a]   Returns the integer part of the (real) number           “a”       x = |a|   Returns the absolute value of “a” (a if a ≧ 0, −a           if a &lt; 0)       x = MODULO(a,b)   The modulo or remainder function. “x” is the           remainder when integer “a” is divided by           integer “b”. For example, MODULO(6,2) = 0 and           MODULO(7,2) = 1.       //   Pseudocode comment. Characters on the line           after the “//” are considered comments (i.e.,           not part of the pseudocode).                    
Bus Topology
 
       FIG. 1  shows a possible topology configuration of a communication system  106  as a dual bus. A node  100  can either be connected to both channels A and B (nodes A, C, and E), only to channel A (node D) or only to channel B (node B). 
     A FlexRay communication system  106  can also be a single bus. In this case, all nodes  100  are connected to this bus. 
     Star Topology 
     Valid Star Network Configurations 
     A FlexRay communication system can be built as a multiple star topology. Similar to the bus topology, the multiple-star topology can support redundant communication channels. Each network channel must be free of closed rings, and the number of star couplers must be between 1 and cStarCouplersMax, inclusive, if there are sequentially connected (cascaded) star couplers. The total number of star couplers may be more than cStarCouplersMax if there are branches in the network. Each network line connecting a node to the star coupler or between two star couplers represents a properly terminated point-to-point connection. The incoming signal received by the star coupler is actively driven to all communication nodes. 
     The configuration of a single redundant star network is shown in  FIG. 2 . The logical structure (i.e., the node connectivity) of this topology is identical with that shown in  FIG. 1 . It is also possible to create a single, non-redundant star topology which has the same logical structure as the single bus mentioned above. 
       FIG. 3  shows a single channel network built with three star couplers. Each node has a point-to-point-connection to one of the three star couplers. Two of the star couplers (No.  1  and  3 ) are directly connected to the third star coupler (No.  2 ). 
     Note that it is also possible to have a redundant channel configuration with cascaded stars. An example of such a configuration is  FIG. 4 . Note that this example does not simply replicate the set of stars for the second channel—Star  1 A connects nodes A, B, and C, while Star  2 A connects nodes A, C, and E. 
     Star Coupler Behavior and Protocol Impact 
     For each node connected to a star coupler, the star coupler contains a bi-directional connection operating in half-duplex mode. 
     Before transmitting a frame, all connections in each star coupler must be dynamically set up to either receive or transmit 
     The FlexRay coding mechanism defines a Transmission Start Sequence (TSS), which is used to initiate a proper connection setup throughout the network before the actual FlexRay frame or symbol is transmitted. The transmission of the TSS is detected by the star coupler and is treated as a connection setup request. The star coupler returns to its idle state after the bus has been released to the idle state by the transmitting node. 
     At the end of each frame transmission, all star couplers must return to the initial state before the next connection setup request is initiated. This is necessary in order for the star coupler to be able to process the next configuration request correctly. 
     The minimum idle time between two consecutively transmitted frames must accommodate the times for connection setup and return to the initial state for the star couplers that are used in the system. 
     Hybrid Topologies 
     In addition to topologies that are composed either entirely of a bus topology or entirely of a star topology, it is possible to have hybrid topologies that are a mixture of bus and star configurations. The FlexRay system supports such hybrid topologies as long as the limits applicable to each individual topology are not exceeded. For example, the limit of cStarCouplersMax cascaded star couplers also limits the number of cascaded star couplers in a hybrid topology. 
     There are a large number of possible hybrid topologies, but only two representative topologies are shown here.  FIG. 5  shows an example of one type of hybrid topology. In this example, some nodes (nodes A, B, C, and D) are connected using point-to-point connections to a star coupler. Other nodes (nodes E, F, and G) are connected to each other using a bus topology. This bus is also connected to a star coupler, allowing nodes E, F, and G to communicate with the other nodes. 
     A fundamentally different type of hybrid topology is shown in  FIG. 6 . In this case, different topologies are used on different channels. Here, channel A is implemented as a bus topology connection, while channel B is implemented as a star topology connection. 
     Communication Cycle 
     The communication cycle is the fundamental element of the media access scheme within FlexRay. It is defined by means of a timing hierarchy. 
     Timing Hierarchy 
     The timing hierarchy consists of four timing hierarchy levels as shown in  FIG. 7 . 
     The highest level, the communication cycle level, defines the communication cycle. It contains the static segment, the dynamic segment, the symbol window and the network idle time (NIT). Within the static segment a static time division multiple access scheme is used to arbitrate transmissions. Within the dynamic segment a dynamic mini-slotting based scheme is used to arbitrate transmissions. The symbol window is a communication period in which one symbol out of a defined set of symbols can be transmitted on the network. The static segment, the dynamic segment and the symbol window form the network communication time (NCT), a period during which network wide communication takes place. The network idle time defines a communication-free period that concludes each communication cycle. 
     The next lower level, the arbitration grid level, contains the arbitration grid that forms the backbone of FlexRay media arbitration. In the static segment the arbitration grid consists of consecutive time intervals, called static slots, in the dynamic segment the arbitration grid consists of consecutive time intervals, called minislots. 
     The arbitration grid level builds on the macrotick level that is defined by the macrotick. The macrotick is specified further on. Specific macrotick boundaries are called action points. These are dedicated instants at which transmissions shall start (in the static segment, dynamic segment and symbol window) and shall end (only in the dynamic segment). 
     The lowest level in the hierarchy is defined by the microtick that is covered further on. 
     Communication Cycle Execution 
     The following specifies the communication cycle for the time-triggered distributed (TT-D) mode and for the time-triggered master-controlled (TT-M) mode. The communication cycle for the event-triggered (ET) mode is specified further on. The communication cycle for the byteflight mode is covered in the byteflight specification. 
     In both the TT-D mode and the TT-M mode the synchronized time triggers the execution of the communication cycle based on a periodically recurring principle with a period that consists of a constant number of macroticks. 
     The communication cycles are numbered from 1 to cCycleMax. Each node shall maintain a cycle counter vCycle that shall hold the number of the current communication cycle. Initialization of the cycle counter is specified further on. 
       FIG. 8  illustrates the execution of the communication cycle. 
     In the TT-D mode the static segment must contain at least two static slots (at least two frames must be sent with the sync bit set). The dynamic segment may exist optionally as well as the symbol window. Media access test, however, can only be performed if the symbol window exists. 
     In the TT-M mode the static segment must contain exactly one static slot (In this slot a frame must be sent with the sync bit set). In this mode the dynamic segment must exist, while existence of the symbol window remains optional. 
     Table 6 summarizes the protocol modes and the possible configurations of the communication cycle. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 6 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Network Communication Time Constituents vs. Protocol Modes 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 network communication time 
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 protocol 
                 static 
                 dynamic 
                 symbol 
                 media access 
               
               
                 mode 
                 segment 
                 segment 
                 window 
                 test usable 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 TT-D mode 
                 at least 2 static 
                 — 
                 — 
                 no 
               
               
                   
                 slots configured 
                   
                 configured 
                 yes 
               
               
                   
                 at least 2 static 
                 minislots 
                 — 
                 no 
               
               
                   
                 slots configured 
                 configured 
                 configured 
                 yes 
               
               
                 TT-M mode 
                 1 static slot 
                 minislots 
                 — 
                 no 
               
               
                   
                 configured 
                 configured 
                 configured 
                 no 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 ET mode 
                 see Chapter “Event Triggered Mode” 
               
               
                 BF mode 
                 see byteflight specification 
               
               
                 WU mode 
                 no communication cycle established 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     As described above, the FlexRay protocol supports clusters with a single communication channel (channel A only) or with dual communication channels (channel A and channel B). In the case of a dual channel cluster the channels are synchronized to one another. In the dual channel case nodes may be connected to either one or both of the communication channels. These topology options may be combined freely with the communication cycle. 
     Network Communication Time 
     Arbitration within the network communication time is performed by means of unique frame priorities and a slot counting scheme. 
     Arbitration assumes that unique frame priorities, referred to as frame identifiers, have been assigned to the frames among the nodes for each channel (The frame identifiers may either be assigned by an off-line configuration tool or during run-time using an application based assignment strategy. Note that in all cases the uniqueness of the frame identifiers per channel must be maintained to ensure collision-free arbitration). The frame identifiers shall range from 1 to cSlotIDMax. The frame identifier determines in which segment and when within the respective segment a frame shall be sent. 
     Each node shall maintain a slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] for each of the two respective channels. In the operation phase the slot counters shall be initialized with 1 at the start of each communication cycle. Initialization in the startup phase is specified further on. 
     Static Segment 
     Within the static segment a static time division multiple access scheme shall be applied to arbitrate transmissions. In this segment all communication slots are of equal, statically configured duration and all frames are of equal, statically configured length. 
     Structure 
     The static segment shall consist of gNumberOfStaticSlots static slots of equal duration. The number of static slots gNumberOfStaticSlots is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 1 and cSlotIDMax. 
     In any given node one static slot pSyncSlot may be configured to contain a synchronization frame, a special type of frame required for synchronization within the cluster. psyncSlot is a node specific value that equals the number of the static slot in which the sync frame shall be transmitted 
       FIG. 9  illustrates all transmission patterns that are possible for a single node within the static segment. 
     In slot  1  the node transmits a frame on channel A and a frame on channel B. In slot  2  the node transmits a frame only on channel A (An equivalent pattern is also possible in which a node transmits a frame on channel B and no frame on channel A. Different nodes can share a static slot across both channels as described above). In slot  3  no frame is transmitted on either channel. 
     Transmission Condition 
     In the static segment the condition whether a frame shall be transmitted or not differs depending on the current protocol phase. 
     In the startup phase a frame shall be transmitted on a channel
         1. if the slot is assigned to the node via the frame ID and channel specific assignment, and   2. if startup has enabled frame transmission, and   3. if the slot is configured to contain a sync frame, i.e. the respective slot counter matches pSyncSlot.       

     In the operation phase a frame shall be transmitted on a channel
         1. if the slot is assigned to the node via the frame ID and channel specific assignment, and   2. if the control state machine is in the operation state.       

     The frame shall be assembled as follows:
         1. The reserved bit shall be set to zero.   2. The sync bit shall be set to one if the respective slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] matches pSyncSlot, otherwise set to zero.   3. The network management bit shall be set to the value held in the CHI.   4. The frame ID field shall be set to the value of the respective slot counter vSlotCounter[ch].   5. The length field shall be set to gPayloadLengthStatic.   6. The header CRC shall be set to the value held in the CHI.   7. The cycle count field shall be set to the value of the current cycle counter vCycle.   8. If payload data is available from the CHI for the respective slot then
           a. the null frame indication bit shall be set to zero, and   b. the payload data shall be set to the values received from the CHI, and   c. any remaining payload data bytes shall be set to the padding pattern 0x00.   
           9. If no payload data is available from the CHI for the respective slot then
           a. the null frame indication bit shall be set to one, and   b. all payload data shall be set to the padding pattern 0x00.   
           10. The frame CRC shall be calculated using the procedure specified further on.
 
Timing and Slot Counter Housekeeping
       

     All static slots shall consist of an equal number of gdStaticSlot macroticks. The number of macroticks per static slot gdStaticSlot is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 2 and TBD. 
     Each static slot contains an action point that shall be offset from the start of the slot by gdActionPointOffset macroticks. Frame transmission shall start at the action point of the respective static slot. The number of macroticks within the action point offset gdActionPointOffset is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 1 and TBD. 
     Appropriate configuration of the static slot length must assure that the frame and the communication separator fit within the static slot. 
       FIG. 10  depicts the detailed timing of the static slot. 
     At the end of every static slot the slot counter for channel A vSlotCounter[A] and the slot counter for channel B vSlotCounter[A] shall be incremented by one (Note that this also holds for the last static slot within the static segment). 
     Configuration 
     The static slot length gdStaticSlot shall be chosen such that the static slot accommodates not only the transmission of the frame but also the channel idle detection latency under worst-case assumptions (The parameter gdStaticSlot shall be determined by an off-line configuration tool). The formula for determining this parameter and respective constraints are specified further on. The formula for determining the parameter gdActionPointOffset and respective constraints are specified further on, too. 
     Dynamic Segment 
     Within the dynamic segment a dynamic mini-slotting based scheme shall be used to arbitrate transmissions. In this segment the duration of communication slots may vary in duration in order to accommodate frames of different length. 
     Structure 
     The dynamic segment shall consist of gNumberOfMiniSlots minislots of equal duration. The number of minislots gNumberOfMiniSlots is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 0 and tbd. 
     The dynamic segment also consists of a set of consecutive dynamic slots that contain one or multiple minislots. The duration of a dynamic slot depends on whether or not communication, i.e. frame transmission or reception, takes place. The duration of a dynamic slot shall be established on a per channel basis. 
     The condition of whether or not communication takes place shall be evaluated at the end of every minislot: 
     The dynamic slot shall consist of one minislot if no communication takes place, i.e. the respective communication channel is in the channel idle state throughout the respective minislot. 
     The dynamic slot shall consist of multiple minislots if communication takes place. 
     Details of how the duration of a dynamic slot is determined for frame transmissions are specified in the subsequent subsection. Details of how this is determined in the case of frame reception are specified further on. 
       FIG. 11  outlines the media access scheme within the dynamic segment. 
     As shown in the figure the media access on the two communication channels does not occur in lock step. Both communication channels do share, however, the same arbitration grid.  FIG. 11  also shows how the duration of a dynamic slot adapts depending on whether or not communication takes place. 
     Transmission Condition 
     In the dynamic segment the condition that determine whether a frame shall be transmitted or not depend on the current protocol phase. 
     In the startup phase no frames shall be transmitted on either channel. 
     In the operation phase a frame shall be transmitted on a channel
         1. if the slot is assigned to the node via the frame ID and channel specific assignment, and   2. if the dynamic segment has not exceeded the pLatestTx minislot, which is a node specific upper bound, and   3. if the control state machine is in the operation state.       

     The frame shall be assembled as follows:
         1. The reserved bit shall be set to zero.   2. The sync bit shall be set to zero.   3. The network management bit shall be set to the value held in the CHI.   4. The frame ID field shall be set to the value of the respective slot counter vSlotCounter[ch].   5. The length field shall be set to the number of payload data bytes divided by two.   6. The header CRC shall be set to the value held in the CHI.   7. The cycle count field shall be set to the value of the current cycle counter vCycle.   8. If payload data is available from the CHI for the respective slot then
           a. the null frame indication bit shall be set to zero, and   b. the payload data shall be set to the values received from the CHI, and   c. any remaining payload data bytes shall be set to the padding pattern 0x00.   
           9. If no payload data is available from the CHI for the respective slot then
           a. the null frame indication bit shall be set to one, and   b. all payload data shall be set to the padding pattern 0x00.   
           10. The frame CRC shall be calculated using the procedure specified further on.
 
Timing and Slot Counter Housekeeping
       

     Timing within the dynamic segment is based on minislots. Each minislot shall contain an equal number of gdMinislot macroticks. The number of macroticks per minislot gdMinislot is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 2 and tbd. 
     Each minislot contains an action point that shall be offset from the start of the minislot by gdMsActionPointOffset macroticks. The number of macroticks within the minislot action point offset gdMsActionPointOffset is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 1 and tbd. 
       FIG. 12  shows the detailed timing of a minislot. 
     Frame transmission shall start at the minislot action point of the first minislot of the respective dynamic slot. In the dynamic segment frame transmission shall also end at a minislot action point. If the frame does not end at a minislot action point by virtue of its data length, then the transmitter shall extend the transmission using the dynamic trailing sequence (DTS) as described further on. The DTS prevents premature idle detection by the receivers. 
     In contrast to a static slot the dynamic slot distinguishes between the transmission phase and the dynamic slot idle phase. The transmission phase ranges from the start of the dynamic slot to the last minislot, in which the transmission terminates. The dynamic slot idle phase concludes the dynamic slot. The dynamic slot idle phase is defined as a communication-free phase that succeeds the transmission phase in each dynamic slot. It is required to account for the communication channel idle detection latency and to process the frame by the receivers. 
       FIG. 13  shows the detailed timing within the dynamic segment. 
     The start of the dynamic segment requires particular attention. The first action point in the dynamic segment shall occur after max(gdActionPointOffset, gdMsActionPointOffset) macroticks after the end of the static segment. 
     The two possible cases are illustrated in  FIG. 14 . 
     Each node shall perform slot counter housekeeping on a per channel basis. At the end of every dynamic slot the respective slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] shall be incremented by one until either
         1. the respective slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] has reached cSlotIDMax, or   2. the dynamic segment has reached the minislot gNumberOfMinislots, i.e. the end of the dynamic segment, or       

     Once one of these conditions is met the respective slot counter shall be set to zero and further increments shall be suspended for the respective communication cycle. 
     The arbitration procedure assures that all fault-free receivers agree implicitly on the dynamic slot in which the transmission starts. Further, all fault-free receivers also agree implicitly on the minislot in which slot counting is resumed. As a result, the slot counter of all fault-free receivers matches the slot counter of the fault-free transmitter and the frame identifier contained in the frame. 
     Configuration 
     Constraints concerning the configuration of the dynamic segment are specified further on. 
     Symbol Window 
     Within the symbol window a single symbol may be sent, i.e. either a normal symbol, an alarm symbol, a medium access test symbol or no symbol at all shall be sent. In general, arbitration among different senders is not provided by the protocol for the symbol window. If arbitration among multiple senders is required for the symbol window it has to be performed by means of a higher-level protocol. 
     Structure 
     The symbol window shall consist of a fixed number of gdSymbolWindow macroticks. The number of macroticks per symbol window gdSymbolWindow is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 0 and TBD. 
     Transmission Condition 
     As in the two communication segments the condition whether a symbol shall be transmitted or not differs depending on the current protocol phase. 
     In the startup phase no symbol shall be transmitted on either channel. 
     In the operation phase a symbol shall be transmitted on a channel
         1. if a symbol is released for transmission, and   2. if the control state machine is in the operation state.       

     Details specifying when a symbol is released for transmission are specified further on. 
     Transmission Timing 
     The symbol window contains an action point that shall be offset from the start of the slot by gdActionPointOffset macroticks. Symbol transmission shall start at the action point within the symbol window (see  FIG. 15 ). 
     Configuration 
     Constraints concerning the configuration of the symbol window are specified further on. 
     Network Idle Time 
     Within the network idle time the clock correction terms shall be calculated and the offset correction term shall be applied in one or multiple macroticks. Details of the clock synchronization process are described further on. 
     The network idle time shall also serve as a phase to perform implementation specific cluster cycle related tasks. 
     The network idle time shall contain gdNIT macroticks. The number of macroticks within the network idle time gdNIT is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 1 and TBD. 
     Constraints on the duration of the network idle time are specified further on. 
     Coding and Decoding 
     The following describes the coding and decoding methods used by the FlexRay system. 
     Since the FlexRay protocol is independent from the underlying physical layer, the following describes the coding and decoding rules of the interface signals as seen by the communication controller (i.e., TxENn, TxDn and RxDn, nε{A, B} in  FIG. 16 ). Further on additional information on this interface will be given. 
     In general, there are several non-ideal conditions (for example, clock oscillator differences, electrical characteristics of the transmission media and transceivers, etc.) that can cause variations of signal timing or introduce anomalies/glitches into the communication bit stream. The coding and decoding mechanisms described below are intended to be robust against such effects. 
     FlexRay uses a Non-Return to Zero (NRZ) signaling method for coding and decoding of frames and symbols. 
     Bit Stream Coding with NRZ 
     This section specifies the mechanisms used to encode the logical frames and symbols into a bit stream for transmission and how the transmitting node presents this bit stream to the Bus Driver for communication onto the network. The sender shall start the transmission of a frame or symbol by setting the TxENn signal to logical “0”. The sender shall stop the transmission of a frame or symbol by setting the TxENn and the TxDn signals to logical “1”. The logical frame is described further on. 
     Frame Coding 
     Frame coding transforms logical frames to a continuous bit stream by the following steps:
     Dividing the logical frame into single byte components   Building byte sequences by adding a Byte Start Sequence (BSS) at the beginning of each byte component   Assembling a continuous bit stream out of the byte sequences   Adding a Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) before the start of the bit stream   Appending a Frame End Sequence (FES) at the end of the bit stream   Appending a Dynamic Trailing Sequence (DTS) after the Frame End Sequence if the frame is transmitted in the dynamic segment of the communication cycle
 
Byte Coding
   

     Each byte sequence shall begin with a Byte Start Sequence (BSS). The BSS consists of a logical “1” bit followed by a logical “0” bit. A byte sequence consists of a BSS followed by eight data bits from the logical frame. 
     Transmission of the data bits within a byte sequence shall be such that the most significant bit of the data is transmitted first with the remaining bits of the data being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. This is shown in  FIG. 17 . 
     The purpose of the BSS is to provide bit stream timing information to receiving devices. The signal edge between the first and the second bit of the BSS is used to realign the bit timing of the receiver (i.e., bit clock resynchronization). 
     Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) 
     The Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) is inserted into the bit stream before the first byte sequence. The TSS consists of a continuous logical “0” level. The duration of the TSS shall be configurable between 1 to 15 nominal bit times. 
     Frame End Sequence (FES) 
     The Frame End Sequence (FES) is appended to the bit stream following the final byte sequence. The FES is a two bit sequence consisting of a logical “0” bit followed by a logical “1” bit. 
     Dynamic Trailing Sequence (DTS) 
     A dynamic trailing sequence (DTS) shall be transmitted immediately after the FES of a frame that is transmitted in the dynamic segment of a communication cycle. 
     The purpose of this sequence is to indicate the exact point in time of the minislot action point. 
     The DTS starts with a variable number of consecutive logical “0”s. The DTS length is greater or equal to 1 bit. The DTS is concluded with the transmission of a logical “1” bit. Note that the granularity of the length of the “0” portion of the DTS is microticks rather than bits. In general, the trailing “0” to “1” transition is not synchronous to a bit cell boundary. 
     Entire Bit Stream for a Frame in the Static Segment 
       FIG. 18  shows the entire bit stream of a frame transmitted in the static segment. 
     At the completion of the FES the transmitting node shall set the TxENn signal to logical one. 
     Entire Bit Stream for a Frame in the Dynamic Segment 
       FIG. 19  shows the entire bit stream of a frame transmitted in the dynamic segment. 
     At the minislot action point the TxDn output shall switch to logical “1” level, while TxENn shall switch to logical “1” one bit duration gdBit after the action point (This ensures that there is a duration of gdBit in which the TxDn output is at logical one prior to the transition of TxENn to logical one. This is required for the stability of certain types of physical layers.). 
     Symbol Coding 
     The FlexRay communications protocol defines six symbols; each of which is represented by specific bit pattern:
     Status Normal Symbol (SNS)   Status Alarm Symbol (SAS)   Media Access Test Symbol (MTS)   Collision Avoidance Symbol (CAS)   Event Indication Symbol (EIS)   Wake-Up Symbol (WUS).   

     The bit stream of each symbol is described in the following sections. 
     Status Normal Symbol (SNS) 
     The Status Normal Symbol shall be transmitted starting with the Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) followed by 2 gdbit times at a logical “1” level, 30 gdBit times at a logical “0” level, and a final gdBit time at a logical “1” level as shown in  FIG. 20 . 
     Status Alarm Symbol (SAS) 
     The Status Alarm Symbol shall be transmitted starting with the Transmission Start Sequence (TSS), followed by 2 gdBit times at a logical “1” level, 20 gdBit times at a logical “0” level, and a final gdBit time at a logical “1” level as shown in  FIG. 21 . 
     Collision Avoidance Symbol (CAS) 
     The Collision Avoidance Symbol shall be transmitted starting with the Transmission Start Sequence (TSS), followed by 30 gdBit times at a logical “0” level as is shown in  FIG. 22 . 
     Media Access Test Symbol (MTS) 
     The Media Access Test Symbol (MTS) shall be encoded in the same manner as the CAS symbol described above. 
     Event Indication Symbol (EIS) 
     The Event Indication Symbol (EIS) shall be encoded in the same manner as the SNS symbol described above. 
     Wake-Up Symbol (WUS) 
     At the TxD output the Wake-Up Symbol shall be transmitted starting with a configurable number of gdBit times at a logical “0” level (gdWakeupSymbolTxLow) followed by a configurable number of gdBit times at a logical “1” level (gdWakeupSymbolTxIdle). 
     At the TxENn output the WUS shall be transmitted identically to the TxD line, i.e., starting with a configurable number of gdBit times at a logical “0” level (gdWakeupSymbolTxLow) followed by a configurable number of gdBit times at a logical “1” level (gdWakeupSymbolTxIdle). 
     The Wake-up symbol shall be repeated for a configurable number of times (gWakeupPattern). The minimum number of repetitions is 2. The configuration parameters for the WUS are described more detail below. An example with a sequence of two WUS&#39;s is shown in  FIG. 23 . 
     Bit Stream Decoding with NRZ 
     This section specifies the mechanisms used to perform bit stream decoding, including the relevant parameter limits and configuration parameters with this function. The decoding function interprets the bit stream observed at the RxDn inputs of the CC. 
     The block diagram in  FIG. 24  shows the control flow of the receive signals through the Bit Stream Decoding (BSD) unit. 
     The bit stream decoding processes bit streams present on the physical media, extracts logical frame and symbol information, and passes this information to the FlexRay protocol engine. The following steps are performed:
     Bit clock alignment at dedicated edges during the bit stream detected at the RxDn input   Bit sampling and voting based on the aligned bit clock   Decoding of frame and symbol information from the bit sampling and voting output   

     The bit stream decoding processes of the individual channels on a multiple channel FlexRay node operate independently from one another. Specifically, the bit clock alignment, edge detection, sample voting, frame decoding, and symbol detection processes on the individual channels must be capable of independent operation. 
     Bit Clock Alignment 
     The Bit Clock Alignment function (BCA) synchronizes the local bit clock used for bit sampling and voting to the received bit stream at the RxDn input. 
     Edge Detection Window Control 
     The edge detection window determines the time window in which the next edge for bit clock alignment is expected. This window is set during frame reception around the expected logical “1” to “0” transition between the two bits of the next BSS. 
     Initial Edge Detection Window Determination 
     The initialization of the BCA is started as soon as channel idle is detected at RxDn (and signaled to the BCA via the decoder unit).  FIG. 25  shows the mechanism that determines the initial edge detection window when a frame is received. If the received bit stream is not a frame (e.g., symbol reception), the BCA shall be deactivated until the next channel idle is signaled to the BCA via the decoder unit. 
     The initialization of the BCA is performed through the following steps:
     Falling edge detection (potential start of a frame, i.e., the start of a TSS)   Rising edge detection (potential start of BSS)   Falling edge detection (potential falling edge in the middle of the BSS)   Alignment of bit stream to that falling edge   First edge detection window determination
 
Start of Frame Detection
   

     After channel idle the BCA waits for a falling edge that is potentially the start of a frame (TSS). In order to filter out glitches, a continuous number of pVotingSamples samples are taken for majority voting to validate the occurrence of the edge (see  FIG. 25  with pVotingSamples=3). 
     If the majority of pVotingSamples consecutive samples is logical “0”, a valid falling edge has been detected. 
     Start of BSS Detection 
     After detecting a valid falling edge the BCA waits for a rising edge that is potentially the start of a BSS. In order to filter out glitches, a continuous number of pVotingSamples samples are taken for majority voting to validate the occurrence of the edge (see  FIG. 25  with pVotingSamples=3). 
     If the majority of pVotingSamples consecutive samples is logical “1”, a valid rising edge has been detected. 
     Falling Edge Detection in the Middle of the BSS 
     After detecting a valid rising edge the BCA waits for a falling edge that is potentially the middle of a BSS. In order to filter out glitches, a continuous number of pVotingSamples samples are taken for majority voting to validate the occurrence of the edge (see  FIG. 25  with pVotingSamples=3). 
     If the majority of pVotingSamples consecutive samples are logical “0”, a valid falling edge has been detected. 
     Alignment of Bit Stream 
     After detecting a valid falling edge the bit clock is aligned to the bit stream as seen in  FIG. 26 . 
     The first sample of the next bit is determined by the central sample of the voting window.  FIG. 26  shows an example with pVotingSamples=3, where the second sample of the voting window shall be considered to be the first sample of the next bit. After aligning the bit sampling to this particular sample in the BSS, the first sample of each consecutive bit of the next byte is considered to occur pSamplesPerBit after first sample of the previous bit. 
     First Edge Detection Window Determination 
     The falling edge of the next BSS is expected 10*pSamplesPerBit samples after the falling edge of the current BSS. The bit time window is placed symmetrically around the expected edge in the next BSS with a size of 6 samples, i.e., the next edge detection window is set from three samples before to three samples after that expected falling edge (see  FIG. 27 ). 
     Bit Clock Alignment 
     During the edge detection window, the number of samples that equal logical “0” is counted as vEdgeLowSamples. Three cases have to be distinguished: 
     Case 1: vEdgeLowSamples=pEdgeSamples/2 
     In this case, the bit clock alignment is assumed to be correct. The falling edge is detected at the expected falling edge (see  FIG. 28 ). 
     Case 2: vEdgeLowSamples&gt;pEdgeSamples/2 
     In this case, the bit clock has to be aligned by −1 sample point (see  FIG. 29 ). 
     Case 3: vEdgeLowSamples&lt;pEdgeSamples/2 
     In this case, the bit clock has to be aligned by +1 sample (see  FIG. 30 ). 
     In general, shifting the bit start time is limited to plus or minus one sample point. 
     If there is no falling edge detected during the edge detection window (i.e., all samples have the same value), the resynchronization of the next bit sampling is performed according to the following rules 
     If only logical “0” values are sampled in the edge detection window, the bit clock is aligned −1 sample relative to the expected falling edge. 
     If only logical “1” values are sampled in the edge detection window, the bit clock is aligned +1 sample relative to the expected falling edge. 
     This condition does not constitute a coding error. 
     Edge Detection Window Determination During Frame Reception 
     The next edge detection window is determined from the aligned bit clock of the current detected falling edge. The falling edge of the next BSS is expected 10*pSamplesPerBit after the current detected falling edge. The bit time window is placed symmetrically around the expected edge in the next BSS, i.e., the next edge detection window is set from three samples before to three samples after that expected falling edge (see  FIG. 27 ). 
     Bit Sampling and Voting 
     The bit sampling and voting function decides whether the current bit value is to be considered as logical “1” or as logical “0”. This determination shall be performed on the signals RXDA and RXDB. 
     Initial Bit Start Determination 
     After initialization of the CC, the BSD unit starts bit sampling immediately, i.e., the local bit clock is started immediately and the bit stream is sampled with this (unaligned) bit clock. The first bit is assumed to start with the first sample. Bit clock alignment starts independently as described above. The number of samples of a bit is configured by the parameter pSamplesPerBit. pSamplesPerBit can be either 8 or 10. Each consecutive bit is assumed to start pSamplesPerBit after it&#39;s predecessor bit.  FIG. 31  shows an example of bit sampling with pSamplesPerBit=10. 
     Resynchronization of Bit Sampling 
     Once the bit clock alignment is activated, bit sampling is resynchronized to the received bit stream by using the aligned bit clock. The resynchronization of the bit sampling is only performed at the falling edges in the BSS. In general, the first sample of the next bit shall be set to the sample following the falling edge detected by the BCA. This mechanism is illustrated in  FIG. 32 . 
     After bit clock alignment bit sampling is performed without resynchronization for the next ten bits, i.e., until the falling edge of the next BSS. 
     Bit Value Voting 
     The number of samples to be considered for majority voting shall be odd. It is recommended to center the voting window on the supposed center of the bit cell. 
     The sample voting process defines a “window” of samples that are used to make the determination of the value of a received bit. This window is characterized by two parameters, pVotingOffset and pVotingSamples. An example with pVotingOffset=3 and pVotingSamples=5 is shown for the case of pSamplesPerBit=10 in  FIG. 33 . 
     The parameter pVotingOffset specifies the offset between the 1 st  sample of the bit and the start of the voting window. This offset defines the first sample of the bit that will be considered for the voting. Specifically, the first sample considered for voting is the sample after the first pVotingOffset samples of the bit (i.e., voting starts after pVotingOffset samples have been “skipped”). 
     The pVotingSamples parameter specifies the number of samples in the voting window. The window is defined by taking pVotingSamples consecutive samples starting with the sample indicated by pVotingOffset. 
     The bit value shall be determined by majority voting over the samples within the voting window (This implies that the number of samples within the voting window, pVotingSamples, must be odd.), i.e., if a majority of samples within the voting window have logical value “0”, the output value of the sampled bit shall be “0”; if a majority of samples within the voting window have logical value “1” the output value of the sampled bit shall be “1”. 
     Note the voting window and the bit sampling shall be resynchronized with every edge between the two bits of the Byte Start Sequence (BSS). This is the only edge to be used for the resynchronization. 
     Frame and Symbol Decoding 
     Note that due to certain effects on the physical transmission medium (e.g., optical transmission, truncation due to connection setup in the star coupler, etc.), it is possible that the TSS seen at the RxDn input may be shorter or longer than the TSS that was transmitted. All receivers shall accept Transmission Start Sequences with any duration in the range of 1 to 16 bit times (inclusive). 
     A valid start of frame or symbol shall be considered when the following conditions are met:
         the channel was detected as idle and   there was at least one transition from logical “1” to logical “0” and   the bit value associated with the transition being considered as start of the bit cell was considered to be logical “0” (bit value voting result)       

     Note: for glitch filtering and bit start time alignment at start of frame and/or symbol see the bit clock alignment section in this chapter. 
     Frame Decoding 
     The frame coding status shall be “valid coding”, if the following conditions are met:
     the TSS length was detected to be at least 1 bit and less or equal to 16 bits, and   all the expected BSS&#39;s were successfully detected (i.e. the first bit of the BSS was voted as a logical “1” and the second bit was voted as a logical “0”), and   the FES was successfully detected (i.e. the first bit of the FES was voted as a logical “0” and   the second bit was voted as a logical “1”).   

     Once the decoder unit detects an FES instead of an expected BSS, the BCA function is deactivated until channel idle is detected. 
     SNS Decoding 
     The detection of an SNS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the following conditions are met:
     a TSS is detected with a duration between 1 and 16 gdBit, and   two gdBit times logical “1” is detected, and   a subsequent logical “0” level is detected for a duration of 27 gdBit&lt;t —sns   —0 &lt;33 bit
 
SAS Decoding
   

     The detection of an SAS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the following conditions are met:
     a TSS is detected with a duration between 1 and 16 gdbit, and   two gdBit times logical “1” is detected, and   a subsequent logical “0” level is detected for a duration of 18 gdBit&lt;t —sas   —0&lt; 22 gdBit
 
EIS Decoding
   

     The detection of an EIS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the same conditions are met as for SNS decoding (see above). 
     CAS Decoding 
     The detection of a CAS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the following condition is met:
     the TSS is detected with a duration between 1 and 16 gdBit, and   a logical “0” level is detected for a duration of 27 gdBit&lt;t —cas   —0 &lt;33 gdBit
 
MTS Decoding
   

     The detection of an MTS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the same condition is met as for CAS decoding (see above). 
     WUS Decoding 
     The detection of a WUS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the following condition is met:
     a duration between 1 gdBit and gdWakeupSymbolRxLow at a logical “0” level is detected.
 
Channel Idle Detection
   

     The channel idle detection function is located in the decoder, using the input from the sampling and voting unit. The channel idle detection function is always active, including, for example during ongoing frame and/or symbol detection. When the CC is in low power mode and/or in the CC configuration state, then channel idle detection support is not performed. 
     Upon exiting the CC configuration state and/or the CC low power mode, the channel shall initially be assumed to be busy (i.e. not idle). The behavior is also required when an undefined communication element is detected. 
     The channel shall be considered to be idle as soon as 12 consecutive bits with the data value logical ‘1’ have been detected. 
     Presence of glitches while the channel is idle does not establish a coding error condition and there shall be no re-start of the channel idle detection timer. The channel idle detection counter shall be re-started when a logical “1” to “0” transition was detected where the associated bit voting result was “0”. 
     If the next start of frame or symbol is detected earlier than after successful channel idle detection then this establishes a channel idle condition violation (but not a coding error) and shall be signaled to the host. 
     Coding Error Signaling 
     After a frame or symbol start is detected, i.e., if a transition from channel idle to logical “0” is observed at RxDn and none of the conditions described in section  0  hold, the coding status shall be “invalid coding”. 
     After a valid frame or symbol is received, the CC shall perform the channel idle check. If the consecutive 12 bits after end of frame or symbol are not logical “1” a “channel idle coding violation” shall be signaled to the host. 
     Device is in Sleep Mode 
     As soon as a logical “0” condition is detected, this condition shall be captured and be considered as a potential start of a wakeup symbol. If the wakeup condition is verified as “valid”, then the appropriate startup actions shall be performed (see below), otherwise the device shall continue to stay in sleep mode. 
     Configuration Parameters 
     In order to be able to support a suitable set of different bit rates without having to modify the oscillator frequency, the number of samples per bit pSamplesPerBit shall be configurable to either 8 or 10. In addition, a scalable oscillator clock period multiplier should typically be provided. At a minimum, the node shall support clock period multiplier settings (prescaler settings) of 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16. The supported bit rates depend on the oscillator frequency that is used, the prescaler setting, and the samples per bit setting. 
     The following Table 7 gives an example of supported bit rates with a 12.5 ns oscillator period (e.g. f_osc=80 MHz nominal.). 
                     TABLE 7                  Example of supported bit rates with a 12.5 ns oscillator period                                         Sample   Sample                       Clock   Clock Period   Samples per   Bit Time   Bit Rate       Index   Prescaler   (ns)   Bit   (ns)   (Mbps)                                             1   1   12.5   8   100   10.000       2   1   12.5   10   125   8.000       3   2   25.0   8   200   5.000       4   2   25.0   10   250   4.000       5   4   50.0   8   400   2.500       6   4   50.0   10   500   2.000       7   8   100.0   8   800   1.250       8   8   100.0   10   1000   1.000       9   16   200.0   8   1600   0.625       10   16   200.0   10   2000   0.500                    
Overview
 
     The following describes the supported frame formats used by the FlexRay protocol and gives an overview. Then the description focuses on the frame formats. 
     The FlexRay protocol supports two distinct frame formats:
         the FlexRay frame format   the byteflight frame format       

     All controllers in a cluster must be configured to use the same frame format. Specifically, a system in which some controllers use the FlexRay frame format while other controllers use the byteflight frame format is not a valid system configuration. 
     The FlexRay frame format may be used for systems in time-triggered distributed mode (TT-D mode), in time-triggered master-controlled mode (TT-M mode), or event-triggered mode (ET mode). 
     The byteflight frame format may only be used in systems operating in byteflight mode (BF mode). 
     Both frame formats contain a header segment, a payload segment and a trailer segment, each of which contains specific fields. These are described for the FlexRay and byteflight frame formats, and illustrated, respectively, in  FIG. 34  and  FIG. 35 . 
     FlexRay Frame Format 
     An overview of the FlexRay frame format is given in  FIG. 34 . The frame shall be transmitted on the network such that the header segment appears first, followed by the payload segment, and then followed by the trailer segment, which is transmitted last. 
     FlexRay Header Segment 
     The FlexRay header segment consists of 5 bytes that contain several distinct fields; a reserved bit, a Network Management Indication Bit, a Null Frame Indication Bit, a Sync Bit, a Frame ID field, a Payload Length field, a Header CRC field, and a Cycle Counter field. These fields are described in detail in the following sections. 
     Within the header segment the fields shall be transmitted in the order indicated in  FIG. 34 , moving from left to right (i.e., the Reserved bit is transmitted first and the Cycle Counter field is transmitted last). 
     Reserved Bit (1 bit—fReservedBit) 
     This field consists of one bit that is reserved for future protocol use. This bit shall not be used by the application.
         In a transmitting node the Reserved bit shall be set to logical ‘0’.   In a receiving node the Reserved bit shall be ignored (The receiver uses the value of the Reserved Bit for the Frame CRC checking process, but otherwise ignores its value (i.e., the receiver shall accept either a 1 or a 0 in this field).).
 
Network Management Indication Bit (1 bit—fNMIndicationBit)
       

     This field indicates whether an optional network management vector is contained within the payload section of the frame.
         If the network management indication bit is set to fNMIndicationBit=1 the payload section of the frame contains a network management vector.   If the network management indication bit is set to fNMIndicationBit=0 the payload section of the frame does not contain a network management vector.
 
Null Frame Indication Bit (1 bit—fNullFrameIndicationBit)
       

     The Null Frame Indication bit fNullFrameIndicationBit indicates whether the current frame is a “null frame”, i.e., a frame that contains no usable data in the payload segment of the frame. (The Null frame indication bit indicates only whether valid data was available to the communications controller at the time the frame was sent. A Null Frame Indication Bit set to 1 means that received data in the payload segment is not valid. If the bit is set to 0 the data in the payload segment is valid from the transmitting communication controller&#39;s point of view. The receiver may have to do several other checks to decide whether the data is actually valid.)
         If the Null frame indication bit is set to fNullFrameIndicationBit=1 the payload segment contains no valid data.   If the Null frame indication bit is set to fNullFrameIndicationBit=0 the payload segment contains data.       

     Further information on null frames may be found below. 
     Sync Bit (1 bit—fSyncBit) 
     The sync bit fSyncBit determines whether the frame is to be used for various aspects of system synchronization.
         If the Sync Bit is set to fSyncBit=1 the frame is a candidate to be used for synchronization if it meets other criteria (see below).   If the Sync Bit is set to fSyncBit=0 the frame shall not be used for synchronization.       

     Examples of protocol mechanisms that make use of the Sync Bit include clock synchronization (described further on) and startup (described further on). In all cases, the condition fSyncBit=1 is only one of several conditions necessary for the frame to be used in the various synchronization mechanisms. 
     All frames transmitted in the dynamic segment (if present) shall be sent with fSyncBit=0. 
     If a node transmits a given frame on more than one channel it shall set fSyncBit to the same value on each channel. 
     A node shall not transmit a frame with fSyncBit=1 in more than one slot of a given communication cycle. If a node does transmit frames with fSyncBit=1, it shall do so in the same slot of every communication cycle. 
     A node shall only transmit a frame with fSyncBit=1 in a given slot of a communication cycle if it is configured to transmit on all configured channels for that slot (This implies that nodes transmitting frames with fSyncBit=1 on dual channel systems must transmit that frame on both channels of the system. Single channel systems implicitly meet this requirement—all frames are transmitted on all configured channels.). 
     Frame ID (12 bits—fFrameID) 
     This field contains the Frame Identifier for the frame. Each frame that may be transmitted in a cluster has a frame ID fFrameID assigned. 
     The frame ID fFrameID is a unique number per communication channel per communication cycle and defines the slot in which the frame is transmitted. 
     Valid values for fFrameID range from 1 to 4095 (In binary: from (0000 0000 0001) 2  to (1111 1111 1111) 2 ) during the protocol operation phase (POP). The Frame ID 0 is an invalid Frame ID. 
     The Frame ID field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fFrameID is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fFrameID being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     Payload Length (7 Bits—fPayloadLength) 
     The Payload Length field consists of a single parameter, fPayloadLength, that is related to the number of bytes contained in the payload segment of the frame. Specifically, fPayloadLength indicates the number of bytes in the payload segment divided by two. For example, a frame that contains a payload segment consisting of 72 bytes would be sent with fPayloadLength=36. A detailed definition of the contents of the payload segment of a FlexRay frame can be found below. 
     The payload length field does not include the number of bytes within the header and the trailer segments of the FlexRay frame. 
     The maximum payload length is cPayloadLengthMax, which corresponds to a payload segment containing 2*cPayloadLengthMax bytes. The payload field shall be less than or equal to the maximum payload length: fPayloadLength≦cPayloadLengthMax. 
     The payload length shall be fixed for all frames in the static segment of a communication cycle. For these frames the payload length field shall be transmitted with fPayloadLength=gPayloadLengthStatic. 
     The payload length fPayloadLength may be different for different frames in the dynamic segment of a communication cycle. In addition, the payload length of a specific dynamic segment frame may vary from cycle to cycle. Finally, the payload lengths of a specific dynamic segment frame may be different on each configured channel. All dynamic segment frames, however, shall have 0≦fPayloadLength≦cPayloadLengthMax. 
     The Payload Length field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fPayloadLength is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fPayloadLength being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     Header CRC (11 bits—fHeaderCRC) 
     The Header CRC field contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check code (CRC) computed over the Sync Bit, Frame ID, and Payload Length fields of the frame. 
     The CRC is computed in the same manner on all configured channels. The CRC polynomial shall be
 
 x   11   +x   9   +x   8   +x   7   +x   2 +1=( x +1)( x   5   +x   3 +1)( x   5   +x   4   +x   3   +x +1)
 
     This 11 bit CRC polynomial generates a (31,20) BCH code that has a minimum Hamming distance of 6. The codeword consists of the data to be protected and the CRC. In this application, this CRC protects exactly 20 bits of data (1 bit sync+12 bits frame ID+7 bits payload length=20 bits). This polynomial was obtained from T. Wadayama,  Average Distortion of Some Cyclic Codes , web site available at http://vega.c.oka-pu.jp/˜wadayama/distortion.html, and its properties were verified using the techniques described in P. Koopman, “32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Codes for Internet Applications,”  Proceedings of the International Conference on Dependable Systems and Networks  ( DSN  2002), Washington D.C., June 2002, pp. 459-468. The initialization vector of the register used to generate the header CRC shall be (1A) HEX . 
     With respect to the computation of fHeaderCRC, the Sync Bit, the Frame ID and the Payload Length fields shall be fed into the CRC generator in network order, specifically the Sync Bit shall be shifted in first, followed by the most significant bit of the Frame ID field, followed by subsequent bits of the Frame ID, followed by the most significant bit of the Payload Length field, and followed by subsequent bits of the Payload Length field. 
     The Header CRC field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fHeaderCRC is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fHeaderCRC being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     A detailed description of how to generate or verify the Header CRC is given further on. 
     Cycle Counter (6 Bits—fCycleCount) 
     The Cycle Counter field indicates the transmitting node&#39;s view of the cycle counter vCycle at the time of frame transmission. 
     The Cycle Counter field shall be set to fCycleCount=vCycle before transmitting a frame. 
     The Cycle Counter field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fCycleCount is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fCycleCount being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     FlexRay Payload Segment 
     The FlexRay payload segment contains 0 to 254 bytes (0 to 127 two-byte-words) of data written by the host. 
     Because of the limitations imposed on the representation of the length of the payload segment by the Payload Length field (fPayloadLength) of the header segment, the FlexRay Payload Segment shall consist of an even number of bytes. (The length of the payload segment indicated by fPayloadLength correlates with the number of bytes that are sent on the communication channel. It does not necessarily define the number of bytes used by the application in the payload section. The data provided by the application may be shorter than the payload section. A padding function in the communication controller fills the “missing” bytes if the configured transmit buffer is smaller than the configured payload length.) 
     Note that the frame CRC described below has a Hamming distance of six for payload lengths up to 248 bytes. For payload lengths greater than 248 bytes the CRC only provides a Hamming distance of four. 
     The first two bytes of the FlexRay payload segment may optionally be used as a message ID field, allowing receiving nodes to filter or steer data based on the contents of this field. 
     The subsequent bytes of the payload segment may optionally be used as network management vector. The length of the network management vector is configured by gNetworkManagementVectorLength during CC_SoftReset and cannot be changed during the protocol startup phase (PSP) or during the protocol operation phase (POP). gNetworkManagementVectorLength can be configured between 0 and 12 bytes, inclusive. The network management indication bit in the frame header indicates whether the payload section contains the network management vector (Frames that contain network management data are not restricted to containing only network management data—the other bytes in the payload section may be used to convey additional, non-Network Management data.). 
     If the optional message ID field is not used the network management vector (if present) starts with the first byte of the payload section. 
     The individual bytes within the Payload Segment shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of the byte is transmitted first with the remaining bits of the byte being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     FlexRay Trailer Segment 
     The FlexRay trailer segment contains a single field, a 24-bit CRC for the frame. 
     Frame CRC (24 bits—fFrameCRC) 
     The Frame CRC field contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check code (CRC) computed over the Header and Payload segments of the frame. The computation includes all fields in these segments (This includes the header CRC, as well as any Communication Controller-generated “padding” bytes that may be included in the Payload segment.). 
     The CRC is computed using the same generator polynomial on both channels. The CRC polynomial shall be
 
 x   24   +x   22   +x   20   +x   19   +x   18   +x   16   +x   14   +x   13   +x   11   +x   10   +x   8   x   7   +x   6   +x   3   +x+ 1=( x +1) 2  ( x   11   +x   9   +x   8   +x   7   +x   5   +x   3   +x   2   +x+ 1)( x   11   +x   9   +x   8   +x   7   +x   6   +x   3 +1)
 
     This 24-bit CRC polynomial generates a code that has a minimum Hamming distance of 6 for codewords up to 2048 bits in length and a minimum Hamming distance of 4 for codewords up to 4094 bits in length. The codeword consists of all frame data and the CRC. This corresponds to H=6 protection for FlexRay frames with payload lengths up to 248 bytes and H=4 protection for longer payload lengths. This polynomial was obtained from G. Castagnoli, S. Bräuer, and M. Herrmann, “Optimization of Cyclic Redundancy-Check Codes with 24 and 32 Parity Bits, ”  IEEE Trans. Commun ., vol. 41, pp. 883-892, June 1993., and its properties were verified using the techniques described in P. Koopman, “32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Codes for Internet Applications,”  Proceedings of the International Conference on Dependable Systems and Networks  ( DSN  2002), Washington D.C., June 2002, pp. 459-468. 
     The generation process of the CRC differs slightly depending on which channel the frame is being transmitted (Different initialization vectors are defined to prevent a node from communicating if it has crossed channels, connection of a single channel node to the wrong channel, or shorted channels (both controller channels connected to the same physical channel).):
         The initialization vector of the CRC generator shall be (FE DC BA) HEX  for frames sent on channel A.   The initialization vector of the CRC generator shall be (AB CD EF) HEX  for frames sent on channel B.       

     With respect to the computation of fFrameCRC, the frame fields shall be fed into the CRC generator in network order (that is, the first thing into the generator is the most significant bit of the Reserved Bit field, and the last thing into the generator is the least significant bit of the last byte of the Payload Segment). 
     The Frame CRC field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fFrameCRC is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fFrameCRC being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     A detailed description of how to generate or verify the Frame CRC is given further on. 
     Null Frames 
     Under certain conditions a transmitting node may send a “null frame” which is a frame that contains no valid data in the payload segment. Such a frame is sent when a transmitter is configured to send in a given slot and channel of the static segment but is not in possession of valid data at the time when transmission of that slot is scheduled to begin. This could be caused by the host locking a transmit buffer and not releasing it before transmission time, or by a transmitter being configured for cycle counter filtering (see further on) and the current cycle counter does not match the filter. Additionally, a transmitting controller may indicate a null frame if the host has not successfully updated the data since the last scheduled transmission. This behavior is optional (see further on). The transmitter indicates a null frame by setting fNullFrameIndicationBit=1. 
     A Null Frame consists of
         A header segment as described above, which has fNullFrameIndicationBit=1   A payload segment with all bits set to zero   A trailer segment as described above.       

     Null frames shall only be sent in the static segment, hence the payload length is defined by gPayloadLengthStatic. 
     The payload segment of a Null Frame shall be ignored by the receiver (The receiver uses the data in the Payload Segment for the Frame CRC checking process, but otherwise ignores the data.) but other fields of the frame may contain useful data (For example, the clock synchronization algorithm may make use of the arrival time of null frames with the Sync Bit field set to 1 (provided all other criteria for that frame&#39;s acceptance are met).). 
     byteflight Frame Format 
     An overview of the byteflight frame format is given in  FIG. 35 . The frame shall be transmitted on the network such that the header segment appears first, followed by the payload segment, and then followed by the trailer segment, which is transmitted last. 
     byteflight Header Segment 
     The byteflight header segment consists of 2 bytes that contain several distinct fields; the Frame ID, a field of reserved bits, and the frame length. These fields are described in detail in the following sections. 
     Within the header segment the fields shall be transmitted in the order indicated in  FIG. 35 , moving from left to right (i.e., the Frame ID field is transmitted first and the Frame Length field is transmitted last). 
     Frame ID (8 bits—fBfFrameID) 
     This field contains the Frame Identifier for the frame. Each frame that may be transmitted in a cluster has a frame ID fBfFrameID assigned. 
     The frame ID fBfFrameID is a unique number per communication cycle and defines the minislot in which the frame is transmitted. 
     Valid values for fBfFrameID range from (0000 0001) 2  to (1111 1111) 2 . 
     The Frame ID field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fBfFrameID is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fBfFrameID being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     Special Application Bits (4 Bits—fBfSpecialApplBits) 
     This field consists of four bits that may are used by the application. 
     The fBfSpecialApplBits field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fBfSpecialApplBits is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fBfSpecialApplBits being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     The fBfSpecialApplBits field in the transmitting node is written by the host (The four special application bits are written by the host of the transmitting node. The communication controllers on all nodes (transmitter and receiver) treat these bits as application data.). 
     Frame Length (4 Bits—fBfFrameLength) 
     The Frame Length consists of a single parameter, fBfFrameLength, which indicates the number of data bytes that are contained in the payload segment of the frame. 
     The frame length field does not include the number of bytes within the header and the trailer segment of the byteflight frame. 
     The shortest possible length is 0 bytes (fBfFrameLength=(0000) 2 ), the longest length is 12 bytes (fBfFrameLength=(1100) 2 ). A frame which is received with fBfFrameLength greater than 12 shall be treated as an error. 
     The Frame Length field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fBfFrameLength is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fBfFrameLength being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     byteflight Payload Segment 
     The byteflight payload segment consists of 0 to 12 bytes of data written by the host. 
     The individual bytes within the Payload Segment shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of the byte is transmitted first with the remaining bits of the byte being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     byteflight Trailer Segment 
     The byteflight trailer segment consists of 2 bytes that contain two distinct fields; a Frame CRC and the Frame Completion Bit. These fields are described in detail in the following sections. 
     Within the trailer segment the fields shall be transmitted in the order indicated in  FIG. 35 , moving from left to right (i.e., the Frame CRC field is transmitted first and the Frame Completion Bit is transmitted last). 
     Frame CRC (15 Bits—fBfFrameCRC) 
     The Frame CRC field contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check code (CRC) computed over the Header and Payload segments of the frame. The computation includes all fields in these segments. 
     The CRC generator polynomial shall be
 
 x   15   +x   14   +x   10   +x   8   +x   7   +x   4   +x   3 +1
 
     This is the same polynomial as used in the CAN protocol as defined in ISO/DIS 11898-1:1999 , Road vehicles—Controller area network  ( CAN )— Part  1 : Data Link Layer and Physical Signaling , International Standards Organization, 1999. It is optimized for code words of up to 127 bits. 
     The initialization vector of the byteflight Frame CRC shall be (00) Hex . 
     With respect to the computation of fBfFrameCRC, the frame fields shall be fed into the CRC generator in network order (that is, the first thing into the generator is the most significant bit of the Frame ID field, and the last thing into the generator is the least significant bit of the last byte of the Payload Segment). 
     The Frame CRC field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fBfFrameCRC is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fBfFrameCRC being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. 
     A detailed description of how to generate or verify the Frame CRC is given below. 
     Frame Completion Bit (1 Bit—fBfFCB) 
     The Frame Completion Bit, fBfFCB, is a single bit whose sole purpose is to allow the byteflight frame to end on a byte boundary. 
     The Frame Completion Bit field shall be transmitted with fBfFCB=0. 
     Dependencies 
     Message ID (Optional, 16 Bits—fMessageID) 
     The first two bytes of the payload segment of the FlexRay frame format can be used as receiver filterable data called Message ID.
         The Message ID is an application determinable number that describes the contents of the data segment.   The Message ID is 16 bits long.   At the transmitter the Message ID is written by the host as application data. The communication controller has no knowledge about the message ID and no mechanism inside the communication controller is based on the message ID.   At the receiver the storage of a frame may depend on the result of a filtering process that makes use of the Message ID. All frame checks done in Frame Processing (see further on) are unmodified (i.e., are not a function of the Message ID). The use of the Message ID filter is defined in the Host Interface chapter (see further on).   The optional use of Message IDs must be consistent in all frames in the whole cluster (Consistency means that a Message ID is used for ALL frames (both static and dynamic) in a cluster or it is not used for ANY frame. Partial use of the Message ID is not possible.).   If this mechanism is used, the most significant bit of fMessageID shall be placed in the most significant bit of the first byte of the payload segment. Subsequent bits of fMessageID shall be placed in the next payload bits in order of decreasing significance.
 
Frame CRC Calculation
       

     The Frame CRC calculation is done inside the communication controller before transmission or after reception of a frame. It is part of the frame transmission process or the frame reception process, respectively. 
     The variable vCheckCRC_x denotes the result of the check of the consistency of a frame and its CRC for the respective communication channel. The calculation may be described by the following pseudocode. 
     The values of the protocol constants cCrcSize, cCrcInit_x, and cCrcPolynomial depend on the frame format used, i.e. the FlexRay or byteflight frame format. For the FlexRay frame format the value of cCrcInit_x also depends on the channel that is used to transmit the frame: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 FlexRay frame format/channel A: 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 cCrcSize = 24; 
                 // size of the register is 24 bits 
               
               
                 cCrcInit = (FE DC BA) HEX ; 
                 // initialization vector of channel A 
               
               
                 cCrcPolynomial = (5D 6D CB) HEX ; 
                 // hexadecimal representation of 
               
               
                   
                 the CRC polynomial 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 FlexRay frame format/channel A: 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 cCrcSize = 24; 
                 // size of the register is 24 bits 
               
               
                 cCrcInit = (AB CD EF) HEX ; 
                 // initialization vector of channel B 
               
               
                 cCrcPolynomial = (5D 6D CB) HEX ; 
                 // hexadecimal representation of 
               
               
                   
                 the CRC polynomial 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 byteflight frame format: 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 cCrcSize = 15; 
                 // size of the register is 15 bits 
               
               
                 cCrcInit = 0 HEX ; 
                   // initialization vector 
               
               
                 cCrcPolynomial = (45 99) HEX ; 
                 // hexadecimal representation of  
               
               
                   
                 the CRC polynomial 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Short Description: Initialize the CRC shift register with the appropriate initialization value. As long as bits (vNextBit_x) from the header or payload segment of the frame are available the while-loop is executed. The number of bits available in the payload segment is derived from the payload length field. The bits (Transmitters use the bit sequence that will be fed into the coding algorithm, including any controller generated padding bits. Receivers use the decoded sequence as received from the decoding algorithm (i.e., after the removal of any coding sequences (e.g. Byte Start Sequences, Frame Start Sequences, etc.)).) of the header and payload segments are fed into the CRC register by using the variable vNextBit_x, bit by bit, in network order, e.g., for the FlexRay frame format the first bit used as vNextBit_x is the Reserved Bit field, and the last bit used is the least significant bit of the last byte of the Payload Segment. 
                             Procedure 1: Frame CRC Calculation                                    // Initialize the CRC register       vCrcReg_x(cCrcSize − 1 : 0) = cCrcInit_x;       while(vNextBit_x)                         // determine if the CRC polynomial has to be applied by taking           // the exclusive OR of the most significant bit of the CRC           // register and the next bit to be fed into the register           vCrcNext_x = vNextBit_x EXOR vCrcReg_x(cCrcSize − 1);           // Shift the CRC register left by one bit           vCrcReg_x (cCrcSize − 1 : 1) = vCrcReg_x(cCRCSize − 2 : 0);           vCrcReg_x(0) = 0;           // Apply the CRC polynomial if necessary           if vCrcNext_x                         vCrcReg_x(cCrcSize − 1 : 0) = (vCrcReg_x(cCrcSize −           1 : 0) EXOR           cCrcPolynomial;                         end;    // end if                 end;     // end while loop       The following comparison is only done in the receiver.       // compare fFrameCRC_x (frame CRC received on channel x) with CRC       // register content       if (vCrcReg_x == fFrameCRC_x)                         vCheckCRC_x = “T”;                 else                         vCheckCRC_x = “F”;                 end;                    
Header CRC Calculation
 
     Among its other uses, the Header CRC field of a FlexRay frame is intended to provide protection against improper modification of the Sync Bit field by a faulty communication controller (CC). The CC that is responsible for transmitting a particular frame shall not compute the Header CRC field for that frame. Rather, the CC shall be configured with the appropriate Header CRC for a given frame by the host. This makes it unlikely that a fault in the CC that causes the value of a Sync Bit to change would result in a frame that is accepted by other nodes in the network because the CRC would not match. Removing the capability of the transmitter to generate the CRC minimizes the possibility that a message that results from a CC fault would have a proper header CRC. 
     The CC that is responsible for the reception of a frame shall perform the CRC computations required to check the correctness of the Header CRC field relative to the other information that is received in the frame. 
     The variable vCheckHeaderCRC_x denotes the result of the check for the respective communication channel. The check may be described by the following pseudocode. 
     The value of the protocol constants cHCrcSize, cHCrcInit, and cHCrcPolynomial are defined as follows: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 FlexRay header CRC calculation: 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 cHCrcSize = 11; 
                 // size of the register is 11 bits 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 cHCrcInit := (1A) HEX ; 
                 // initialization vector of Header CRC  
               
               
                   
                 for both channels 
               
               
                 cHCrcPolynomial := (3 85 ) HEX ; 
                 // hexadecimal representation of the 
               
               
                   
                 Header CRC polynomial 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Short description: Initialize the CRC shift register with the appropriate initialization value. As long as bits (vHNextBit_x) from the Sync Bit, Frame ID and Payload Length fields of the frame are available the while-loop is executed. The number of bits available is fixed (at 20) by to the frame format definition. The bits of the indicated fields are fed into the CRC register by using the variable vHNextBit_x, bit by bit, in network order, i.e., the Sync Bit followed by the most significant bit of the Frame ID field followed by subsequent bits of the Frame ID, followed by the most significant bit of the Payload Length field, and followed by subsequent bits of the Payload Length field. Transmitters use the bit sequence that will be fed into the coding algorithm. Receivers use the decoded sequence as received from the decoding algorithm (i.e., after the removal of any coding sequences, etc.). 
     The same procedure is used as described in Procedure 1 except starting with:
         vNextBit_x=vHNextBit_x;   cCrcSize=cHCrcSize;   cCrcInit=cHCrcInit;   cCrcPolynomial=cHCrcPolynomial;       

     The following comparison is only done in the receiver: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 if (vCrcReg_x == fHeaderCRC_x) 
                 // compare fHeaderCRC_x 
               
               
                   
                 (Header CRC received on 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vCheckHeaderCRC_x = “T”; 
                 // channel x) with Header CRC  
               
               
                   
                   
                 register content 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 else 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vCheckHeaderCRC_x = “F”; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 end; 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The following covers the frame processing, and in particular frame reception procedure of the FlexRay protocol. 
     Overview 
     The protocol engine related frame processing consists of three steps: The first step is called frame decoding. In this step frame decoding takes place. Frame decoding shall occur according to the decoding rules specified above. The next step is called the frame reception. In this step the syntactical correctness of the frame is assured. The last step is called frame acceptance. In this step the protocol specific data that is contained in the header of each frame such as the cycle count is checked against reference values. 
     Frame Reception 
     Frame reception specifies how the syntactical correctness of a frame is established. 
     Syntactical Correctness 
     In general a frame is considered syntactically correct if no coding violations are detected during the reception of the frame, the header CRC is valid, the frame CRC is valid, and the number of bytes received corresponds to the frame length that is contained in the frame header. 
     Thus a frame shall be considered as syntactically correct when all of the following conditions are met:
         1. Beginning with the start of the reception the five frame header bytes are received without a coding error. The violation of this condition is considered to be a header-coding error (S_HeaderCodingError).   2. The header CRC verification according to the CRC calculation procedure returned with the result ‘valid’. The violation of this condition is considered to be an invalid-header-CRC error (S_InvalidHeaderCRCError).   3. The remaining (2*fPayloadLength+3) bytes of the frame are received without a coding error using the fPayloadLength value extracted from the header of the frame. The violation of this condition is considered to be a frame-coding error (S_FrameCodingError).   4. The frame CRC verification according to the CRC calculation procedure returned with the result ‘valid’. The violation of this condition is considered to be an invalid-frame-CRC error (S_InvalidFrameCRCError).   5. The frame end is reached without a coding error. The violation of this condition is considered to be a frame-coding error (S_FrameCodingError).   6. The node does not initiate an own transmission while reception is ongoing on the same channel. The violation of this condition is considered to be a transmission-conflict error (S_TransmissionConflictError).       

     The error-free reception of five frame header bytes, i.e. condition 1 of a syntactically correct frame is met, is considered to be a successful-header reception (S_SuccessfulHeaderReception). 
     A syntactically correct frame is considered to be a correct frame (S_CorrectFrame). 
     Frame Reception State Diagram 
       FIG. 36  shows the frame reception state diagram. The transitions are summarized in Table 8. 
                     TABLE 8                  Frame Reception State Transitions                                 Action       Transition Direction       taken on                             from   to   Condition for Transition   Transition               FR_Idle   FR_Active   Transition of the channel state                   from channel idle to channel               active       FR_Active   FR_Idle   Transition of the channel state               from channel active to channel               idle. In this case a syntactically               correct frame was received.       FR_Active   FR_Abort   header-coding error detected               OR invalid-header-CRC error               detected               OR frame-coding error detected               OR invalid-frame-CRC error               detected       FR_Abort   FR_Idle   Transition of the channel state               from channel active to               channel idle       FR_Soft   FR_Idle   Soft reset released       Reset       AND channel is in the channel               idle state       All states   FR_Soft   Soft reset initiated           Reset                    
FR_Idle State
 
     The reception state machine shall remain in the FR_Idle state as long as the channel is idle. In this state the node waits for the start of a reception, which occurs once the channel becomes active. The start of a reception shall cause a transition to the FR_Active state. 
     FR_Active State 
     Frame reception occurs in the FR_Active state. Hereby the syntactical correctness of a frame shall be established. The occurrence of a S_HeaderCodingError, S_InvalidHeaderCRCError, S_FrameCodingError, S_InvalidFrameCRCError shall cause a transition to the FR_Abort state. 
     The detection of idle at the end of a syntactically correct frame shall cause a transition to the FR_Idle state. 
     FR_Abort State 
     The reception state machine shall remain in the FR_Abort state until the channel idle state is reached on the respective channel. Once the channel idle state is reached the reception state shall change to FR_Ready. 
     FR_SoftReset State 
     The reception state machine shall remain in the FR_SoftReset state as long as the communication controller is in the CC_SoftReset state and the respective communication channel is not in the idle state. 
     Frame Acceptance 
     Frame acceptance differs depending on the current protocol phase. Whether a frame is accepted in a specific phase or not depends on the outcome of a number of checks. 
     FlexRay distinguishes between the startup acceptance criteria, the static segment acceptance criteria and the dynamic segment acceptance criteria. 
     Startup Acceptance Criteria 
     The startup acceptance criteria are applied when the node is in the integration path of the startup phase. 
     Thus a frame shall be considered compliant with the startup acceptance criteria when all of the following conditions are met that are applied to a correct frame:
         1. The frame ID included in the header of the frame is not larger than the number of the last static slot gNumberOfStaticSlots.   2. The sync bit is set.   3. The payload length included in the header of the frame is equal to the globally configured value of the payload length of a static frame held in gPayloadLengthStatic. The violation of this constraint is considered to be a payload-length-static error (S_PayloadLengthStaticError).       

     A frame that complies with the startup acceptance criteria is considered to be a valid-startup frame (S_ValidStartupFrame). 
     If the cycle count value included in the header of a valid-startup frame is even then the frame is considered to be a valid-even-startup frame (S_ValidEvenStartupFrame). 
     If the cycle count value included in the header of a valid-startup frame is odd then the frame is considered to be a valid-odd-startup frame (S_ValidOddStartupFrame). 
     Static Segment Acceptance Criteria 
     The static segment acceptance criteria are applied when the node is operating in the static segment prior to having the schedule in place. 
     A frame shall be considered compliant with the static segment acceptance criteria when all of the following conditions are met that are applied to a correct frame:
         1. The payload length included in the header of the frame is equal to the globally configured value of the payload length of a static frame held in gPayloadLengthStatic. The violation of this constraint is considered to be a payload-length-static error (S_PayloadLengthStaticError).   2. The frame ID included in the header of the frame is equal to the value of the slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] both at the start of the frame as well as at the end of the frame. The violation of this constraint is considered to be a frame-ID error (S_FrameIDError).  FIG. 37  illustrates this constraint.   3. The cycle count included in the header of the frame is equal to the value of the cycle counter vCycle both at the start of the frame as well as at the end of the frame. The violation of this constraint is considered to be a cycle-count error (S_CycleCountError).       

     A frame that complies with the static segment acceptance criteria is considered to be a valid-static frame (S_ValidStaticFrame). 
     Dynamic Segment Acceptance Criteria 
     The dynamic segment acceptance criteria are applied when the node is operating in the dynamic segment. 
     A frame shall be considered compliant with the dynamic segment acceptance criteria when all of the following conditions are met that are applied to a correct frame:
         1. The frame ID included in the header of the frame is equal to the value of the slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] at the start of the frame. The violation of this constraint is called a frame-ID error (S_FrameIDError).  FIG. 38  illustrates this requirement.   2. The cycle count included in the header of the frame is equal to the value of the cycle counter vCycle both at the start of the frame as well as at the end of the frame. The violation of this constraint is considered to be a cycle-count error (S_CycleCountError).   3. The sync bit included in the header is set to ‘0’. The violation of this constraint is considered to be a sync-bit error (S_SyncBitError).       

     A frame that complies with the dynamic segment acceptance criteria is considered to be a valid-dynamic frame (S_ValidDynamicFrame). 
     Clock Synchronization 
     Introduction 
     In a distributed communication system every node has its own clock. Due to temperature fluctuations, voltage fluctuations, and production tolerances of the timing source (e.g. oscillator), the internal time base diverges between the nodes after a short time, even if all internal time bases of the nodes are started concurrently. 
     A basic assumption for a time-triggered system is that every node in the cluster has practically the same view of time and this common global view of time is used as the local time base for each node. In this context, “the same” means that the differences between any two nodes&#39; views of the global time are bounded to a specified tolerance limit and that the maximum value for this difference is known as the precision. 
     The primary task of the clock synchronization function is to ensure the time differences between the nodes of a cluster stay within the precision. 
     Two types of time differences between nodes can be distinguished:
         Offset (phase) differences and   Rate (frequency) differences       

     To synchronize the local time base of different nodes, methods are known for offset correction and for rate correction. In FlexRay a combination of both methods is used. 
     Clock Synchronization Modes 
     FlexRay supports both time-triggered and event-triggered clock synchronization. This chapter describes the time-triggered modes. Further on it is described how the event-triggered mode works. The appropriate clock synchronization mode should be chosen based upon the requirements of the applications to be supported by the cluster. The cluster must then be configured accordingly. Table 9 illustrates the cluster configuration conditions for the various clock synchronization modes. 
     FlexRay supports two modes for performing time-triggered clock synchronization. 
                     TABLE 9                  Configuration Rules for Various Clock Synchronization Modes                         Operation Mode:                             FlexRay   byteflight                                 Multi-Master,   Single-Master,   Single-Master,       Synchronization   distributed clock   with rate   without rate       mode:   sync   correction   correction                                     Number of   [2 . . . 16]   1   1       Sync Nodes:       Number of   ≧ number of sync   ≧1   0       Static Slots:   masters       Number of   = number of sync   1   0       Sync Frames:   nodes       Number of   at least one   exactly one   exactly one       Cold Starters                    
Single-Master Clock Synchronization
 
     With Single Master Clock Synchronization, each node individually synchronizes itself to the cluster by observing the timing of transmitted sync frames from the clock sync master.
         Single-master clock synchronization shall be performed if the static segment is configured with only one static slot (gNumberOfStaticSlots=1).   The node that owns the static slot must transmit sync frames in this slot in every cycle. This node is the only node in the cluster that transmits sync frames. It is the clock synchronization master and the remaining nodes are slaves.   All other nodes shall receive the sync frames and perform the clock synchronization algorithm as if the node were in a cluster using distributed clock synchronization (see below).   The behavior in case of a fault is described further on. The conditions to signal an fault are different for the master and for the salves and they are listed in Table 10 below.
 
Distributed Clock Synchronization
       

     With Distributed Clock Synchronization, each node individually synchronizes itself to the cluster by observing the timing of transmitted sync frames from other nodes. A fault-tolerant algorithm is used.
         Distributed clock synchronization shall only be performed if the cluster is configured with a static segment (gNumberOfStaticSlots&gt;1).   At least two nodes shall transmit sync frames.       

     The time representation and the principles of the (distributed) clock synchronization are described in detail below. 
     Differences Between Distributed and Single Master Clock Synchronization 
     In both modes (single-master and distributed clock synchronization) the same clock synchronization algorithm is used. Differences between both modes exist
         in the configuration (see Table 6),   in the start-up (see further on) and   signaling of a fault to the error management.       

     The following tables list the relevant differences for the error signaling. 
                     TABLE 10                  Differences in the Error Signaling Between Distributed and Single Master       Clock Synchronization                             Multi-Master,   Single-Master, with rate       Synchronization mode:   distributed clock sync   correction                                     Missing Rate Correction   master   no sync frame pair in an   never       Signal (MRCS) set to 1   slave   even/odd double cycle   no sync frame pair in an                   even/odd double cycle       Missing Offset Correction   master   no sync frame in odd cycle   never       Signal (MOCS) set to 1   slave       no sync frame in odd cycle       Clock Correction Limit   master   calculated offset or rate   never       Reached (CCLR) set to 1   slave   correction value outside   calculated offset or rate               the specified limits   correction value outside                   the specified limits                    
Time Representation
 
     Local Time Representation
         Internally, nodes can time their behavior with microtick resolution. Microticks are time units derived from the (external) oscillator clock tick, optionally using a prescaler. Microticks are controller-specific units. They may have different durations in different controllers. The precision of a node&#39;s local time difference measurements is a microtick.   Local controller time is based on cluster-wide synchronized cycle and macrotick values provided by the distributed clock synchronization mechanism. Finer resolution local timing shall be done using the node-specific microtick. The value vMacrotick.vMicrotick represents the controller local view of time within a given cycle.   vCycle is the (controller-local) cycle number and is increased once every communication round. At any given time all nodes should have the same value for vCycle (except due to imperfect synchronization at cycle boundaries).   Cycle counter values (vCycle) range from zero (00 0000) 2  to cCycleMax (11 1111) 2 .   When cCycleMax is reached, the cycle counter vCycle shall be reset to zero (00 0000) 2  in the next communication cycle (see Procedure 3)   vMacrotick is the current value of the (controller-local) macrotick counter.   gMacroPerCycle defines the (integer) number of macroticks per cycle (see  FIG. 39 ).   Within tolerances, the duration of a macrotick is constant throughout the cluster on synchronized nodes.   Every node in the cluster has its own local view of the global time. The local view of global time is represented by a vector consisting of the current cycle number (vCycle) and the current macrotick value (vMacrotick). The value vCycle.vMacrotick is the (controller-local) view of the global time in the cluster. It is visible to the application.   pMicroPerMacroNom is the (controller-specific) nominal number of microticks per macrotick.   vRateCorrection is the (integer) number of microticks that shall be added to the pMicroPerMacroNom*gMacroPerCycle microticks in the current cycle to produce the correct cycle length. vRateCorrection may be negative. The value of vRateCorrection is determined by the clock synchronization algorithm. It may only change once (usually at the beginning) per cycle.   pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom is the initial configuration value of vRateCorrection.   The duration of the current controller-local macrotick is an integer multiple of controller-local microticks and is represented by vMicroPerMacroCorr. The value of vMicroPerMacroCorr within one controller may change from macrotick to macrotick.   In any given cycle, vRateCorrection microticks shall be distributed across the gMacroPerCycle macroticks comprising the cycle in order to adjust the cycle length to the proper duration. Consequently, vMicroPerMacroCorr does not remain constant. In general, vRateCorrection is nonzero and is not a multiple of gMacroPerCycle. Consequently, the process of distributing the vRateCorrection microticks across the gMacroPerCycle macroticks conceptually introduces fractional macroticks.   At the beginning of the first communication cycle the “local time variables” shall be initialized (see Procedure 2).       

     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Procedure 2: Initialization of a Node 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 [vCycle, vMacrotick, vMicrotick, vMicroPerMacroCorr] = 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 NodeInitialization( ) // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vCycle = 0; 
                 // reset cycle counter 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMacrotick = 0; 
                 // reset macrotick counter 
               
               
                   
                 vMicrotick = 0; 
                 // reset microtick counter 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMicroPerMacroCorr = pMicroPerMacroNom; 
                 // set the predefined 
               
               
                   
                 vRateCorrection = pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom; 
                 // value for 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // microticks per macrotick 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The initialization of the first three values differs if the node reintegrates into a running cluster (see Chapter “Wakeup, Startup and Reintegration”). 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Procedure 3: Incrementing the Cycle Count 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 [vMacrotick, vCycle] = ChangeOfCycleCount(vMacrotick, vCycle) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 if vMacrotick ≧ gMacroPerCycle   // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vCycle++; 
                 // increment cycle counter 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMacrotick = 0; 
                 // reset macrotick counter 
               
               
                   
                 if vCycle &gt; cCycleMax 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vCycle = 0; 
                 // reset cycle counter 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The host shall be able to read the cycle counter and the macrotick counter. The update of the cycle counter shall be atomic with the macrotick counter. An atomic action is an action where no interruptions is possible. 
     The duration of a Macrotick shall be an integer number of a Microticks, however, the number of microticks per macrotick may differ from macrotick to macrotick. Before the first correction value is calculated the clock synchronization algorithm shall work with nominal macroticks, using vMicroPerMacroCorr=pMicroPerMacroNom+pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom (see Procedure 4). 
     The number of microticks per nominal macrotick may differ between nodes and depends on the oscillator frequency and the prescaler. 
     The duration of one cycle shall be an integer number of a macroticks. The number of macroticks per cycle is intended to be identical in all nodes in a cluster (see  FIG. 39 ). 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Procedure 4: Incrementing the Macrotick Counter 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 [vMicrotick, vMacrotick] = IncrementMacrotickCounter(vMicroPerMacroCorr, vMicrotick, 
               
               
                 vMacrotick) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // uses microtick pulses 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 while(1) 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 wait(Microtick_duration); 
                 // every microtick increase 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMicrotick++; 
                 // microtick counter by one 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 if vMicrotick ≧ vMicroPerMacroCorr // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMicrotick = 0; 
                 // Reset microtick counter 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMacrotick++; 
                 // Increment macrotick 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 counter 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     For a given cycle (without offset correction) the average length of a macrotick is given by pMicroPerMacroNom+vRateCorrection/gMacroPerCycle. 
     Procedure 5: Uniform Distribution of Microticks 
     The following example only addresses the distribution of microticks over the macroticks comprising the cycle. The more complete solution must also deal with offset corrections and is described in Procedure 10. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 InitRateStartOfCycle(vRateCorrection) // execute at beginning of 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 cycle 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // sufficient every second 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 cycle 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMicroPerCycle = gMacroPerCycle * pMicroPerMacroNom // total 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 number of microticks 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 + vRateCorrection; 
                 // for this cycle 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRatioMicroMacro = vMicroPerCycle/gMacroPerCycle;   // real 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 division, not integer 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vIntegerRatio = Int[vRatioMicroMacro];   // Integer part of ratio 
               
               
                   
                 vRest = vRatioMicroMacro − vIntegerRatio; // Fractional part of 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 ratio 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRest; // Initialization values 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vDeltaCorrect=0; 
                 // for variables 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 DistributeMicroOverMacroRate 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 while(1) 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMicroPerMacroRateCorr = vIntegerRatio + vDeltaCorrect; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // Calculate new MicroPerMacro 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts + vRest; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // fractional history term 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 if vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts ≧ 1 
                 // If sum of fractional 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vDeltaCorrect = 1; 
                 // parts becomes greater 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts −1; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // increase macrotick length by 1 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vDeltaCorrect = 0 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMicroPerMacroCorr = vMicroPerMacroRateCorr;   // if no offset 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 correction present 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 [vMicrotick, vMacrotick] = IncrementMacrotickCounter(vMicroPerMacroCorr, 
               
               
                 vMicrotick, vMacrotick) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Notes on the Above Procedure: 
     Offset correction has an additional influence. Therefore there is a difference between the variables vMicroPerMacroCorr and vMicroPerMacroRateCorr. 
     Since there is no real division available in hardware, the implementation will not precisely replicate the above procedure. Most likely the variable vMicroPerMacroCorr will not be explicitly calculated in hardware. 
     As is typically true with pseudocode, the above procedure provides insight into the behavior of the mechanism, but not its implementation. 
     Global Time Representation 
     In a FlexRay node activities, including communication, shall be based on the concept global time, even though each individual node maintains its own view of it. It is the clock synchronism mechanism that differentiates the FlexRay cluster from other node collections with independent clock mechanisms. The global time is a vector of two values, the cycle (cycle counter) and the macrotick counter (cycle time). 
     General Concepts 
     The node (or nodes in the case of a startup with collisions) that transmits the first CAS during startup, shall initialize the cycle counter and the cycle time to zero at the beginning of the communication cycle following the transmission of the CAS. See above for details. 
     The duration of a static slot gdSlot, a communication cycle gdCycle, and the idle time at the end of a communication cycle gdNetworkIdle shall be all expressed as an integer number of macroticks. 
     Each node with pChannels==gChannels that is configured to send in the static segment of the communication cycle may send at most one frame per communication cycle with the sync bit set. 
     The sync bit may only be set in frames that are transmitted on all channels (gChannels—one or two channel configuration). 
     Not all nodes that are configured to send in the static segment of the communication cycle need to send frames with the sync field set. 
     The communication controller shall count all correctly received frames where the sync bit is set. The counter is reset at the start of the communication cycle. This number of the correct received sync frames of the previous communication cycle is presented by vValidSyncFrameCount and shall be accessible to the host. 
     If a controller receives more than gSyncNodeMax the first gSyncNodeMax shall be used for clock synchronization. 
     The calculation of the correction values shall take place every second communication cycle during the network idle time (NIT). 
     The clock synchronization can be realized with four processes called measurement, calculation, offset correction, and rate correction. The offset correction, measurement, and calculation processes are performed sequentially. Rate correction is performed in parallel to the other three.  FIG. 40  shows the relative execution timing of these four processes. 
       FIG. 41  illustrates the internal structure of the clock synchronization mechanism in more in detail. The blocks in the illustration correspond to the pseudocode procedures in this chapter. 
     The black boxes describe the tasks performed and the adjacent blue text gives the corresponding procedure name. Note: For boxes with no corresponding procedure name (no blue text) there is no procedure that corresponds precisely to the task. Pseudocode fragments for these tasks are interspersed with the text. 
     Time Measurement 
     Every node shall measure and store, by channel, the time differences vMeasureChx (in microticks) between the expected and the observed arrival time of all sync frames received during the static segment. Difference observations are marked as invalid until the frame is received completely and has passed the required validity checks. 
     The expected arrival time of a frame is the Minislot action point of the corresponding slot. It is represented by vExpectedArrivalTime=vMacrotick Expected .vMicrotick Expected , where vMacrotick Expected  and vMicrotick Expected  are the macrotick and microtick timer values at the instant of the minislot action point. 
     The observed arrival time of a frame is the instant of reception of the 1/0-edge in the middle of the first Byte Start Sequence after the Frame Start Sequence. It is represented by vObservedArrivalTimeChx=vMacrotick Observed .vMicrotick Observed , where vMacrotickObserved and vMicrotick Observed  are the macrotick and microtick timer values at the instant of reception of this edge. 
     The time difference between expected and observed arrival time is calculated as follow:
 
vMeasureChx=vObservedArrivalTimeChx−vExpectedArrivalTime−gdFrameStartSequence−1 gdBit−pDelayCompensationChx
 
     The global parameters gdFrameStartSequence and gdBit are specified in units of bit times that can differ between nodes if clock sources with different frequencies are used. Internally these parameters are represented in microticks. 
     The sync frame validity checks used during startup and reintegration and during normal operation are described in Section “Frame Processing”. 
     The time difference measurement shall be done for all channels pChannels. 
     If there are time difference measurements from more than one channel for a given sync frame, the smallest value shall be taken. 
     If only one valid frame is received within a given static slot, this single observation shall be used for the Time Difference Measurement. 
     Every node has to be able to store measurement values with their associated Frame IDs for gSyncNodeMax sync nodes. A counter vValidSyncFrameCount is increased when a valid sync frame is received. If a node receives more than gSyncNodeMax sync frames in one communication cycle it is communication to the Error Management but uses the first gSyncNodeMax observations for the calculation of the rate and drift correct values. The counter vValidSyncFrameCount is set to zero when a new communication cycle starts. 
     Note, the Frame Identifiers of sync frames expected to be received are not stored in the configuration of a node. 
     Individual delay compensation values pDelayCompensationChA and pDelayCompensationChB can be configured for each channel. The compensation values should be set to the minimum propagation delay time experienced by any node in the cluster. 
     Procedure 6: Measurement 
     The following procedure shall be executed during normal operation following the reception of each frame in the static segment. 
                                [vsMeasureOddList, vsMeasureEvenList] = Measurement(vCycle, vsMeasureOddList,       vsMeasureEvenList);                             if fSyncBit == 1;   // sync bit in message set                             if messageChA == valid   // message is valid                         vMeasureChA = vObservedArrivalTimeChA − // measurement on                         channel A                         vExpectedArrivalTimeChA − gdFrameStartSequence − // minus                         compensation value                         1 gdBit − pDelayCompensationChA; //                             else   //                             vMeasureChA = ‘invalid’;   // mark message as invalid                             end;   //                         if messageChB == valid            // message is valid                         vMeasureChB = vObservedArrivalTimeChB − // measurement on                         channel B                         vExpectedArrivalTimeChB − gdFrameStartSequence − // minus                         compensation value                         1 gdBit − pDelayCompensationChB;  //                             else   //                             vMeasureChB = ‘invalid’;   // mark message as invalid                             end;   //                         if vMeasureChA == ‘invalid’    //                             if vMeasureChB == ‘invalid’   //                             vMeasureMin = ‘invalid’;   //                             else   //                         vMeasureMin = vMeasureChB;  //                             end;   //                             else   //                         if vMeasureChB == ‘invalid’  //                             vMeasureMin = vMeasureChA;   //                             else   //                         vMeasureMin = MIN(vMeasureChA, vMeasureChB); // save the                         minimum value of                         // both                         if vMeasureMin ~= ‘invalid’   //                             if MODULO(vCycle, 2) == 1   // separate in odd and even                         // cycles                         vsMeasureOddList = [vsMeasureOddList; [fFrameID, vMeasureMin]];                                 // to list           else   // measured value                         vsMeasureEvenList = [vsMeasureEvenList; [fFrameID, vMeasureMin]];                             end;   // measured value                             end;   //                             end;   //                        
Correction Term Calculation
 
Fault-Tolerant Midpoint Algorithm
 
     The technique used for the calculation of the correction terms is a fault-tolerant midpoint algorithm (FTA/FTM). The algorithm works as follows (see  FIG. 43  and Procedure 7):
         1. The measured values are sorted and the n largest and the n smallest values are discarded.   2. The value of n is adapted dynamically to the number of values in the sorted list.       

                                             Number of               Values   n                          1-2   0           3-7   1            8-16   2                        
Table 11: FTA/FTM Term Deletion as a Function of List Size
         3. The largest and the smallest of the remaining values are averaged for the calculation of the midpoint value. The resulting value is assumed to represent the node&#39;s deviation from the global time base and serves as the correction term (see  FIG. 43 ).       
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Procedure 7: FTM/FTA Algorithm 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 function: vCorrectValue = Midterm(list); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 n = LENGTH(list); 
                 // number of elements in the list 
               
               
                   
                 if n &gt; 0 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 list = SORT(list); 
                 // order list by values 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 if n &lt; 3 
                 // k=0 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vCorrectValue = (list(1) + list(n)) / 2; // choose largest 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 and smallest value 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 if n &lt; 8 
                 // k=1 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vCorrectValue = (list(2) + list(n−1)) / 2; // choose 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 second largest and second 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
                 // smallest value 
               
               
                   
                   
                 // k=2 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vCorrectValue = (list(3) + list(n−2)) / 2; // choose 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 third largest and third smallest value 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vCorrectValue = 0; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     If the list contains only one value this value is used for clock synchronization. 
     Calculation of the Offset Correction Value 
     
         
         
           
             1. The Offset Correction Value vOffsetCorrection is a (signed) integer indicating by how many microticks the node should shift its start of the cycle. 
             2. Offset calculation shall be finished before start of cycle, and it may only start after end of last synchronization slot. 
             3. The node&#39;s own offset value (most likely zero, depending on the measurement principle used) shall be included if it transmits a sync Frame. 
             4. The calculation of the offset correction value shall be done every communication cycle, but the offset correction shall be only done in the odd numbered cycles. In even numbered cycles no offset correction shall be done. 
             5. The calculated offset correction value shall be checked against the limit values every cycle. If the calculated offset correction value outside of the allowed range a warning shall be raised to the host (further behavior is specified in the following text). 
             6. If the node transmits sync frames, its own offset time shall be included by adding one instance of the value zero (depending on measurement method) to the list of measured time difference values from the last cycle. 
             7. The offset correction value shall be determined by applying the FTA/FTM to the list of measured time differences. 
           
         
       
    
                             Procedure 8: Offset Correction Value Calculation                                    vOffsetCorrection = OffsetCalculation(vsMeasureOddList)                             list = [ ];   // initialize list                         list = vsMeasureOddList(:,2) // take all measure values without                         // frame ID in a list (:,2) = all           // lines, second colum)                         if LENGTH(vsMeasureOddList) == 0 AND SingleMaster == 0 // if no                         sync frame in the odd cycle                             MOCS = 1;   // was received set the Missing                         Offset                             else   // Correction Signal to 1 for the                          Error                             MOCS = 0;   // Signaling otherwise to 0                             end;   //               //                         if sync_master == 1 AND ErrorState == ‘green’ AND OperationState ==           (‘ColdStartICW’ OR ‘ColdStartVCW’ OR ‘NormalOperation’)                         // if node is a sync master (means the                         // node transmits sync messages)                             list = [list, 0];   // add one zero value to the list                             end;   //                             if LENGTH(list) &gt; 0   // at least one value                         vOffsetCorrection = Midterm(list); // calculate offset                         correction term                             else   //                             vOffsetCorrection = 0;   // no offset correction                             end;   //                        
Calculation of the Rate Correction Value
         1. The calculation of the rate correction value shall be done after every second communication cycle, in the odd numbered cycles (see  FIG. 44 ).   2. The rate correction value shall be determined by comparing the corresponding measured time differences from two successive cycles. Specifically, a new list of values shall be created whose elements are calculated by taking the differences between the most recent cycle&#39;s measured time difference and the previous cycle&#39;s measured time difference. Only time values corresponding to frames passing the validity checks on both channels shall be used.   3. If the node transmits sync frames its own rate correction influence shall be considered by adding an instance of the value zero to the list of calculated time difference.   4. In the next step the FTA/FTM algorithm described above shall be applied to the list of time difference values built in the previous two steps.   5. After calculating the correction term, the stored measurement values shall be deleted so that the next calculation starts with a new set of values.   6. The ideal new rate correction value is the sum of the value calculated in the previous step and the current correction value.   7. To prevent cluster drift that can result from an accumulation of rounding errors the rate correction term actually used is not the ideal rate correction, but a slight modification of this term towards the configuration value. The modification term is a positive integer pClusterDriftDamping that is part of node&#39;s static configuration.       
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Procedure 9: Rate Correction Value Calculation 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 vRateCorrection = RateCalculation(vsMeasureOddList, vsMeasureEvenList, vCycle, 
               
               
                 vRateCorrection) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 if MODULO(vCycle, 2) == 1 
                 // if cycle number is odd 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 for i=1 to LENGTH(vsMeasureOddList) 
                 // for all elements of list1 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 for j=1 to LENGTH(vsMeasureEvenList) // and list2 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 if vsMeasureOddList(i,1) = vsMeasureEvenList(j,1) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // if same frameID 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 diff = vsMeasureOddList(i, 2) − vsMeasureEvenList(j, 2); 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // build difference 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vsMeasureDiffList = [vsMeasureDiffList, diff]; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                 // and save in difference list 
               
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
               
                   
                   
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 if LENGTH(vsMeasureDiffList) == 0 AND SingleMaster == 0 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                   // if no sync frame pair was received 
               
               
                   
                 MRCS = 1; 
                 // set the Missing Rate Correction 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
                   // Signal to 1 for the Error Signaling 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 MRCS = 0; 
                 // otherwise to 0 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                   // 
               
               
                   
                   
                   // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 if sync_master == 1 AND ErrorState == ‘green’ AND OperationState == (‘ColdStartICW’ 
               
               
                   
                 OR ‘ColdStartVCW’ OR ‘NormalOperation’) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // if node is a sync master 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 vsMeasureDiffList = [vsMeasureDiffList, 0];// add one instance 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 of zero to list 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
               
                   
                   
                 // number of sync frames pairs used 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vValidSyncFramesCount = LENGTH(vsMeasureDiffList) // for rate 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 correction calculation is 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                 // supported to the host 
               
               
                   
                 if LENGTH(vsMeasureDiffList) &gt; 0 
                 // at least one value in the list 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vIdealRateCorrection = Midterm(vsMeasureDiffList) + 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // calculate the rate correction term 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRateCorrection; // plus old correction value 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 if vIdealRateCorrection ≧ pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom + pClusterDriftDamping 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRateCorrection = vIdealRateCorrection − pClusterDriftDamping; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 elseif vIdealRateCorrection ≦ pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom − pClusterDriftDamping 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRateCorrection = vIdealRateCorrection + pClusterDriftDamping; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRateCorrection = vIdealRateCorrection; 
                 // no damping 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
                 // no valid sync frames 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRateCorrection = vRateCorrection; // no new rate correction 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 value, 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
                 // take old value; no damping; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 end; 
                 // warning! 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     pClusterDriftDamping should be configured in a way that the damping value in all controllers has nearly the same duration. A configuration value is used to adapt in case of different Microtick duration in different controllers. 
     After calculation of the rate correction value the memory for the measurement values is cleared and marked empty. It should be clear that the offset correction value is calculated before the memory is cleared. 
     External Clock Synchronization (Optional) 
     During normal operation, two independent clusters can drift significantly (e.g., by the damping factor of each cluster). If synchronous operation is desired across the two clusters, external synchronization is necessary; even though the nodes within each cluster are synchronized. This can be accomplished with the synchronous application of host-deduced rate and offset correction terms to both clusters. 
     External clock synchronization is an optional feature of a FlexRay controller that means is not required for any controller to meet protocol conformance. However, if this feature is used in a cluster all nodes in this cluster should support this feature in order to make it useful. 
     External offset correction shall be performed in the same cycle in all nodes of a cluster; external rate correction shall be performed in the same double cycle in all nodes of a cluster. The external correction terms (offset and rate correction terms) available to the communication controller when the network idle time starts are the values that are used. If no values are available the external correction values shall be set to zero for the next double cycle. 
     The external correction terms shall be checked against limits and applied following the corresponding tasks are performed for the internal correction terms. This shall take place during the Network Idle Time. 
     Following the Network Idle Time, an aggregate rate correction term consisting of correction components from the internal and external rate correction terms, shall be applied during the next two communication cycles. 
     The aggregate offset correction term, consisting of correction components from the internal and external offset correction terms, shall be applied in the remainder of the Network Idle Time, before the next cycle starts. 
     In soft reset, the initial external rate correction may be accomplished by setting the external rate correction term by the host. 
     Value Limitations 
     Before applying them, the calculated correction values shall be checked against pre-configured limits. These limits define two regions that are referred to as the “red” and “green” regions, where the colors reflect the acceptability of the calculated value (see  FIG. 45 ). The green region is between −gRateCorrectionOut and +gRateCorrectionOut and the red region is outside these boundaries. 
     If correction values are in the green region, the node is fully synchronized. No further actions are necessary. 
     If one of the correction values is in the red region, the node is out of synchronization. This corresponds to an error condition. Information on the handling of this situation is specified further on in the text. 
     The correction values are in the green region if: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 −gRateCorrectionOut ≦ vRateCorrection ≦ +gRateCorrectionOut AND 
               
               
                 −gRateCorrectionOut ≦ vRateCorrection + vRateCorrectionExtern ≦ 
               
               
                 +gRateCorrectionOut 
               
               
                 −gOffsetCorrectionOut ≦ vOffsetCorrection ≦ 
               
               
                 +gOffsetCorrectionOut AND 
               
               
                 −gOffsetCorrectionOut ≦ vOffsetCorrection + vOffsetCorrectionExtern ≦ 
               
               
                 +gOffsetCorrectionOut 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     If both correction values are in the green area the correction is done.
     −gRateCorrectionOut is the lower boundary and +gRateCorrectionOut is the upper boundary or the green area for the rate correction.   −gOffsetCorrectionOut is the lower boundary and +gOffsetCorrectionOut is the upper boundary of the green area for the offset correction.   

     The correction value is in the red region if 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 −gRateCorrectionOut &gt; vRateCorrection OR 
               
               
                 +gRateCorrectionOut &lt; vRateCorrection OR 
               
               
                 −gRateCorrectionOut &gt; vRateCorrection + vRateCorrectionExtern OR 
               
               
                 +gRateCorrectionOut &lt; vRateCorrection + vRateCorrectionExtern 
               
               
                 − gOffsetCorrectionOut &gt; vOffsetCorrection OR 
               
               
                 +gOffsetCorrectionOut &lt; vOffsetCorrection OR 
               
               
                 −gOffsetCorrectionOut &gt; vOffsetCorrection + 
               
               
                 vOffsetCorrectionExtern OR 
               
               
                 +gOffsetCorrectionOut &lt; vOffsetCorrection + vOffsetCorrectionExtern 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The significance of having correction values in the red region depends on whether the node is in the process of startup, or not. During normal operation this is to be considered a fault condition. If vRateCorrection OR vRateCorrection+vRateCorrectionExtern is outside the specified area the error signal CCLR is set to 1. If vOffsetCorrection OR vOffsetCorrection+vOffsetCorrectionExtern is outside the specified area the error signal CCLR is set to 1, too. During startup and reintegration this condition is treated differently (see further on in the text). 
     The values of gRateCorrectionOut and the gOffsetCorrectionOut are identically specified for all nodes in the cluster. They are defined in terms of macroticks or fractions of a macrotick. From these cluster-wide values the configuration data for each node shall be calculated (measured in microticks). These values shall be included in the configuration interface. These calculations are summarized as follows:
 
pOffsetCorrectionOut=gOffsetCorrectionOut*pMicroPerMacroNom
 
pRateCorrectionOut=gRateCorrectionOut*pMicroPerMacroNom
 
Clock Correction
 
     Once calculated, the correction terms shall be used to modify the local clock in a manner that synchronizes it more closely with the global clock. This shall be accomplished by using the correction terms to adjust the number of microticks in each macrotick. 
     Rate correction shall be accomplished by modifying the value of vRateCorrection (see Procedure 9), which shall be subsequently distributed over the macroticks comprising the next cycle. 
     Offset correction shall be accomplished by modifying the value of vOffsetCorrection (see Procedure 8), which shall be subsequently distributed over the macroticks comprising the current Network Idle Time. 
     Rate Correction 
     The rate correction term shall be uniformly distributed over the entire cycle (see  FIG. 44 ). 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Procedure 10: Distribution of Microticks over Macroticks 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 [vIntergerRatio, vRest, vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts, vDeltaCorrect, vOffsetRemainder] 
               
               
                 = InitStartOfCycle(vRateCorrection, vOffsetCorrection, vRateCorrectionExtern, 
               
               
                 vOffsetCorrectionExtern) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // This replaces InitRateStartOfCycle 
               
               
                   
                 // execute at the beginning of every 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMicroPerCycle = gMacroPerCycle * pMicroPerMacroNom // second cycle 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 + vRateCorrection + vRateCorrectionExtern;    // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRatioMicroMacro = vMicroPerCycle / gMacroPerCycle; // 
               
               
                   
                 vIntegerRatio = Int[vRatioMicroMacro];          // 
               
               
                   
                 vRest = vRatioMicroMacro − vIntegerRatio; // value between 0 and 1 
               
               
                   
                 vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRest;      // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vDeltaCorrect = 0; 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vOffsetRemainder = vOffsetCorrection + vOffsetCorrectionExtern; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // Additional variable 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 [vMicroPerMacroCorr, vIntegerRatio, vDeltaCorrect, vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts, vRest, 
               
               
                 vOffsetRemainder] = DistributeMicroOverMacro(vIntegerRatio, vDeltaCorrect, 
               
               
                 vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts, vRest, vOffsetRemainder) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // This replaces DistributeMicroOver 
               
               
                   
                 // MacroRate 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 while(1) 
                 // 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMicroPerMacroRateCorr = vIntegerRatio + vDeltaCorrect; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // Rate correction part 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts + vRest; 
               
               
                   
                 if vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts ≧ 1 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vDeltaCorrect = 1; 
               
               
                   
                 vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts −1; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vDeltaCorrect = 0; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                 if vMacrotick ≧ OffsetCorrectionStart AND vMacrotick &lt; OffsetCorrectionEnd 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMicroPerMacroCorr = OffsetCorrection(vOffsetRemainder, 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 vMicroPerMacroRateCorr) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vMicroPerMacroCorr = vMicroPerMacroRateCorr; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                 [vMicrotick, vMacrotick] = IncrementMacrotickCounter(vMicroPerMacroCorr, 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 vMicrotick, 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Macrotick) 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 end; 
               
               
                 [vMacrotick, vCycle] = ChangeOfCycleCount(vMacrotick, vCycle) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Procedure Notes: 
     This is only an example. 
     As previously mentioned, it seems to be unlikely that the variable vMicroPerMacroRateCorr can be calculated explicitly in hardware. It is more likely that the IncrementMacrotickCounter procedure will be an intrinsic part of at least the rate part of the microtick distribution state machine. 
     Offset Correction 
     Offset correction shall be done during the network idle time by increasing or decreasing the size of macroticks depending on the value of vOffsetCorrection. 
     It is not required that all controllers perform their offset correction identically. However, they shall perform the offset correction in the Network Idle Time. The offset correction should be completed at least one macrotick before the end of the NIT and therefore before the communication cycle ends. 
     The offset correction term, vOffsetCorrection, is a signed integer that shall be visible to the application. The maximum number of microticks by that a macrotick can be increased (due to offset correction and rate correction combined) shall be bounded by a configuration constant pMicroPerMacroMax. The offset correction term, vOffsetCorrection, shall be distributed across the first, and subsequent macroticks to the limit allowed by pMicroPerMacroMax, until the total offset term is distributed. 
     The maximum number of microticks by that a macrotick can be decreased (due to offset correction and rate correction combined) shall be bounded by a configuration constant pMicroPerMacroMin. The offset correction term, vOffsetCorrection, shall be distributed across the first, and subsequent macroticks to the limit allowed by pMicroPerMacroMin, until the total offset term is distributed.
     pMicroPerMacroMax is the maximum length of a macrotick in microticks.   pMicroPerMacroMin is the minimum length of a macrotick in microticks.   

                             Procedure 11: Offset Correction                                    [vMicroPerMacroCorr] = OffsetCorrection(vOffsetCorrection, vMicroPerMacroRateCorr)                     if networkIdleTime == true   //                             if vOffsetCorrection &gt; 0   // positive offset                         if vOffsetCorrection &gt; pMicroPerMacroMax − vMicroPerMacroRateCorr;                         vMicroPerMacroCorr = pMicroPerMacroMax;           vOffsetCorrection = vOffsetCorrection −                         (pMicroPerMacroMax − vMicroPerMacroRateCorr);                             else   //                         vMicroPerMacroCorr = vOffsetCorrection + vMicroPerMacroRateCorr;                             vOffsetCorrection = 0;   //                             end;   //                             else   //                         if (vMicroPerMacroRateCorr − pMicroPerMacroMin) &lt; |vOffsetCorrection|                         vMicroPerMacroCorr = pMicroPerMacroMin;           vOffsetCorrection = vOffsetCorrection +                         (vMicroPerMacroRateCorr − pMicroPerMacroMin);                         else                         vMicroPerMacroCorr = vMicroPerMacroRateCorr + vOffsetCorrection;                             vOffsetCorrection = 0;   //                             end;   //                             end;   //                     else   //                             vMicroPerMacroCorr = vMicroPerMacroCorr;   //                     end;   //                    
Clock Synchronization Parameters
 
     The following parameters are specific to clock synchronization 
                                                 Range/           Name   Description   Value   Units                                            vDeltaCorrect   Additional microticks per macrotick necessary as a   μT           result of clock rate correction       vIntegerRatio   The integer portion of the corrected microtick to   —           macrotick ratio vRatioMicroMacro.       vMicroOverheadPerCycle   The integral number of microticks that must be   μT           added to (or subtracted from, if negative) the           current cycle in order for the cycle to have the           correct length.       vMicroPerMacroRateCorr       μT       vOffsetRemainder       vRatioMicroMacro   Floating-point number representing the ratio of the   —           number of microticks to the number of macroticks           per cycle. vRatioMicroMacro = vIntegerRatio +           vRest       vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts   Floating-point number used for clock rate correction   μT           that indicates the total fractional microticks that           have not yet been corrected by the insertion or           deletion of a microtick from a macrotick. When the           absolute value exceeds 1 a microtick is added or           removed.       vRest   Floating-point number indicating the fractional   —           portion of vRatioMicroMacro.                    
Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration
 
Introduction
 
     This section describes the FlexRay wakeup and startup mechanisms. Before the startup can be performed, the cluster has to be awake, so the wakeup has to be completed before startup can commence. 
     First a simplified description of both processes is given. The intent of these descriptions is to provide an overview of the process to facilitate a basic understanding. The technical details are intentionally deferred to later in the chapter. 
     Afterwards, the wakeup is described in more detail. Two examples are provided to give insights into the combined effort of the Hosts and communication controllers of the cluster in performing the wakeup. 
     After the wakeup section, the startup is described, first for FlexRay cluster in one of the time-triggered protocol modes, then for FlexRay cluster using the byteflight protocol mode or the event-triggered protocol mode extension. 
     FlexRay Wakeup and Startup—A Functional Description 
     This section explains the principal workings of the FlexRay wakeup and startup procedure using high-level flow charts and textual description. Later in this chapter the wakeup and startup processes are defined using state machines, giving an exact definition of those details that were left intentionally out of this section. 
     Wakeup 
       FIG. 47  shows a global structure of the Wakeup. At any point in time some nodes (possibly all but one) in the FlexRay cluster may be in a power-saving mode. At least one of those nodes that are awake may want to initiate a startup of the whole cluster. However, before a node can communicate with the other nodes, they must be awake, so the wakeup process must precede the startup process. 
     The protocol defines a wakeup pattern that, if sent over the bus without error, causes all other nodes to wake up. The communication controller provides the Host a procedure to transmit this pattern on its channels. To limit the dangers of disturbing ongoing communication, the communication controller is only allowed to transmit this pattern on one of its possibly two connected channels at a time. 
     The Host initiates the wakeup process, whereupon the communication controller monitors its channels for meaningful communication consisting of frames, wakeup symbols, or CAS symbols. The result of this monitoring determines further wakeup behavior. If nothing meaningful is received, the wakeup pattern is transmitted; otherwise the communication controller aborts the wakeup attempt with an error message to the Host. The transmission of the wakeup pattern is aborted if a collision is sensed during the transmission. In this case the communication controller monitors the channel(s) again to determine the reason for the collision. 
     The FlexRay protocol does not support partial networks, i.e., networks in which some nodes are awake and some nodes are asleep. This implies that the wakeup process attempts to wake all nodes on all available channels before startup is initiated. It also implies that a cluster that is already communicating is already fully awake and does not require any further wakeup procedures. 
     Wakeup Channel Monitoring 
       FIG. 48  shows a structure of the Wakeup Channel Monitoring. For easier presentation, the process of listening for frames and wakeup symbols has been depicted serially, while these processes should actually run concurrently. 
     The ‘Wakeup channel monitoring’ phase ensures that no ongoing communication is disturbed by the transmission of the wakeup pattern. A listen time is defined, during which the communication controller tries to detect meaningful communication on its connected channels. 
     If frames are received, the wakeup is immediately aborted. A ‘received frame’ within this context is considered to have occurred if the S_SuccessfulHeaderReception event occurs for one of the configured channels. Since other nodes are already communicating with one another, no wakeup is necessary (whoever initiated the cluster startup ensured that all available channels are awake). The same applies if a wakeup symbol is received on the channel that the communication controller is attempting to awaken. 
     The reception of a CAS symbol prolongs the listen phase. As is described in the following sections, a frame can be expected to follow soon after the CAS if it really was a CAS symbol and not noise, so the reception of that frame is relied upon to trigger the abort. This reduces the sensitivity of the process to noise because noise perceived as a CAS symbol does not abort the process. 
     When the listen phase is over, the communication controller waits for at least one channel to become idle. This reduces the risk of interrupting communication that is just received. It cannot be required that both channels in a two-channel system be idle since then a faulty, noisy channel could prevent the system wakeup. Most symbols and frames, especially during the startup phase where communication is more sparse and thereby more easily overlooked than during later phases, occur on both channels at the same time. E.g. the CAS symbol is transmitted simultaneously on both channels. Requiring at least one channel to be idle prevents the wakeup from beginning to transmit while such a symbol is received on both channels but before it is recognized. The communication controller allows only a predefined number of attempts to transmit the wakeup pattern. If this number is exceeded, the wakeup process is aborted. 
     Wakeup Pattern Transmission 
       FIG. 49  shows a structure of a Wakeup Pattern Transmission. The wakeup pattern consists of several repetitions of the wakeup symbol. The wakeup symbol (defined above) consists of an active and an idle period. The communication controller listens during the idle period for channel activity. If this activity exceeds a threshold, the transmission is aborted. This mechanism resolves collisions between several nodes beginning to transmit the wakeup pattern at nearly the same time. This threshold is chosen to ensure that at least one node continues transmitting the pattern. While the wakeup pattern itself is collision resilient and is still recognizable when two such patterns collide, it is this sensing in the idle period that makes the wakeup mechanism robust against any number of collisions. 
     If such a collision is sensed, the communication controller returns to the ‘channel monitoring’ phase. There, a collision with another wakeup pattern can be verified and signaled to the Host. 
     After successful transmission of the wakeup pattern or the abort of the wakeup attempt, the communication controller returns to its reset state and awaits instructions from the Host. 
     FlexRay Startup—Time-Triggered Protocol Mode 
     Startup assumes all nodes in the cluster are awake (at least in the error-free case). Only nodes connected to all available channels may be configured as sync nodes (which are allowed to start up the cluster). Thus, in the absence of faults, the transmissions of a sync node are visible to every node in the cluster. 
     Startup establishes a global timing scheme that—within certain bounds—is the same within all nodes in the cluster. The ability to calculate the proper point in time for transmitting and/or receiving each frame relies on it. Also, the clock synchronization algorithm relies on this basic timing scheme so that all nodes can apply clock correction terms simultaneously (at the end of odd-numbered cycles). 
     The maximum clock drift that can occur between any two nodes in the cluster within one cycle has to be known in order to configure the necessary listen timeouts. 
     Until a node enters the protocol operation phase that succeeds the protocol startup phase (see below), its message buffers do not need to be updated. No data frame transmission and reception is possible before that time.  FIG. 50  shows a global structure of startup. 
     Each correctly configured node begins the startup process (after finishing the wakeup process for coldstart capable nodes) by entering the ‘channel monitoring and selection of startup path’ phase. Each node that is allowed to start up the cluster monitors its connected channels and participates in the process of selecting the initiator of the coldstart process. This process is designed to eliminate all but one sync node, which then assumes the responsibility for performing the coldstart. This coldstart initiator traverses the right path in  FIG. 50 . 
     All other nodes passively wait for the selected node to initiate communication. The reception of a sync frame with an even cycle counter (indicated by S_ValidEvenStartupFrame) causes them to enter the integration path shown on the left of  FIG. 50 . 
     After the designated check has been successful, the node enters normal operation and is allowed to transmit data frames. 
     Channel Monitoring and Selection of Startup Path 
       FIG. 51  shows a structure of the Channel Monitoring and Selection of a Startup Path. The ‘startup channel monitoring’ phase is similar to the channel monitoring phase of the wakeup. Each node listens to its connected channels and tries to recognize ongoing communication. If an S_ValidEvenStartupFrame is received, the node enters the integration path. The sync nodes that are allowed to start up the cluster wait for their listen time-out to expire. A received frame (S_SuccessfulHeaderReception) or CAS symbol (S_CASReception) prolongs the time-out. When the time-out expires, the node enters the coldstart path. In case no activity at all is detected, a special timeout expires and thereby enables a fast startup. 
     Selection of ColdStart Initiator 
       FIG. 52  shows a structure of the Selection of a ColdStart Initiator. After the expiration of the listen timeout in the channel monitoring phase, the sync nodes configured to do so, transmit a CAS symbol. This CAS symbol resets the listen-timeout of other potential coldstart initiators still in the listening phase, causing them to remain in the monitoring phase. After the transmission, these nodes initialize their communication schedule and await their assigned slot, where they will transmit a sync frame with cycle counter zero. This sync frame will force all nodes in the monitoring phase to enter the integration path. 
     Several nodes may enter the selection phase nearly simultaneously and transmit their CAS symbol at nearly the same time. This situation is resolved by requiring nodes in this phase to reenter the monitoring phase if they receive a sync frame or a CAS symbol. Due to the unambiguous assignment of slots to the various nodes, all nodes but one (usually the one the earliest slot) will leave this phase after at most three cycles (clock oscillator deviations may require a second or third cycle for collision resolution). 
     After three cycles the node enters the ‘Communication established’ check. 
     Check on Successfully Established Communication 
       FIG. 53  shows a check on a successfully established communication. The coldstart initiator has transmitted three sync frames without being interrupted. Now it can expect the first replies of other sync nodes. It continues transmitting its sync frame in the designated slot. 
     At the end of each cycle it reviews the sync frames it has received during the current cycle. If it has received more sync frames that do not fit into its communication schedule than sync frames that do, it aborts the startup and reenters the monitoring phase. This behavior prevents the creation of several cliques with disagreeing perceptions of time. 
     At the end of each odd cycle, the coldstart initiator performs additional tests. If at least one pair of sync frames has been received, it performs the clock synchronization using these pairs (see Chapter “Clock Synchronization”). If the resulting correction values are outside specified bounds, it aborts the coldstart and reenters the monitoring phase. If the values are within the specified bounds, and at least one pair of sync frames has been received, it enters normal operation mode. This ensures that at least two sync nodes agree upon the timing schedule before any data frames may be transmitted. It enables stable clock synchronization for the two nodes and all other nodes that subsequently integrate into the now established communication. 
     A counter observes how many cycles the coldstart initiator spends in the coldstart path. If too many cycles pass without this node entering the normal operation mode, startup is aborted and the node may not again try to start up the cluster. This prevents faulty nodes from persistently disturbing the startup. 
     Initial Synchronization 
       FIG. 54  shows a structure of an initial synchronization. If a node in the monitoring phase receives a sync frame with even cycle counter (S_ValidEvenStartupFrame), it enters the integration path. The node that has transmitted the sync frame automatically becomes the reference node for the receiver. 
     If this reference node has been the reference node in a previous unsuccessful integration attempt, it is not selected and another sync frame is awaited. If no sync frame from another node is received within a specified amount of time, the previously unsuccessful reference node is given another chance. 
     The integrating node sets its own cycle counter to the value received in the sync frame and awaits the sync frame of the reference node in the following odd cycle. Using this pair of frames, the integrating node corrects its clock towards the timing of the transmitter of these frames. If no sync frame with an odd cycle counter follows the even-numbered frame that triggered the integration attempt, the node aborts the integration. 
     Check on Successful Integration 
       FIG. 55  shows a check on a successful integration. During this check phase, the node is still not allowed to transmit any frames. It now has an understanding of time derived from its reference node. During the subsequent cycle it listens for sync frames from all nodes, not just from its reference node. The node checks the timing information that it has derived from the reference node against all observable communication, considering sync frames only. 
     At the end of each cycle, it determines if the majority of the observed sync frames are consistent with the timing scheme it has derived. If not, it declares its integration attempt failed and reenters the monitoring phase. Note that it tries to select another sync node as reference node for the ensuing new integration attempt as described above. 
     At the end of each odd cycle, it performs the offset clock correction as described in Chapter “Clock Synchronization”. The calculated clock correction terms for offset and rate are compared to specified boundaries. The boundaries for the offset correction are more relaxed during the first time the correction is performed after entering this check phase. If either rate or offset correction value is outside the defined boundaries the integrating node aborts the integration attempt and reenters the monitoring phase. 
     Also at the end of each odd cycle, the node counts the number of slots where it has received even/odd cycle pairs of sync frames. If no pairs have been received the node aborts the integration attempt because sync frames should have been received from the reference node if nothing else. If more than one pair has been received, the node enters the normal operation mode. If the integrating node is allowed to transmit sync frames itself and one pair of sync frames has been received, it also enters normal operation. In normal operation, i.e. during protocol operation phase, the node is allowed to transmit data and sync frames (if not configured otherwise). 
     Wakeup and Startup Modes—Global Structure 
     From the CC_SoftReset state, the host shall be able to initiate the cluster wakeup via the transition G 1  (see  FIG. 56 ). For wakeup as well as for the distinct startup procedures the communication controller operates in the top-level HW state CC_Normal. Furthermore, from the CC_SoftReset state one of three distinct startup state machines shall be entered depending on how the configuration settings are chosen. 
     In the time-triggered protocol modes mode, i.e., the time-triggered distributed (TT-D) mode and the time-triggered master-controlled (TT-M) mode, a startup mechanism based on sync frames shall be triggered by the transition G 2 . 
     For FlexRay clusters running in TT-D mode a fault-tolerant, distributed startup shall be performed. In TT-M mode a master controlled startup shall be performed, but still all mechanisms build on a time-triggered communication cycle. 
     For the byteflight (BF) protocol mode and the event-triggered (ET) protocol mode the necessary startup machine transition (G 3 , G 4  or G 5 , G 6  respectively) depends on whether a node is configured as a master node or not. 
     For the event-triggered protocol mode, the startup behavior is described further on. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 12 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Global Startup State Transitions and Respective Conditions for Execution 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Transition 
                   
                   
               
               
                 State 
                 Direction 
                   
                 Actions taken on 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Transition 
                 from 
                 to 
                 Condition for Transition 
                 Transition 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 G1 
                 CC_SoftReset 
                 CC_WakeUpListen 
                   
                 soft reset released 
                 vWakeupCount, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (in the respective control register) 
                 vdWakeup and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 wakeup mode configured 
                 vdWakeupNoise are set 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 to zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 The wakeup status 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 vector is cleared 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (vWakeupFrameHeader 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Received, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 vWakeupSymbolReceived, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 vWakeupFailed and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 vWakeupComplete). 
               
               
                 G2 
                   
                 CC_StartupListen 
                   
                 soft reset released 
                 vdStartup, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (in the respective control register) 
                 vdStartupNoise and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 static, mixed or dynamic mode 
                 vColdStartCount are 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 configured 
                 set to zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (gNumberofStaticSlots greater than 
                 The startup status 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 or equal one) (A minimum of at 
                 vector is cleared 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 least two static slots is required for 
                 (vCCMS, vSMMS, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 a static or mixed configuration in 
                 vOpViaColdstart, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 FlexRay mode; only one static slot 
                 vColdstartAborted and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 is configured in dynamic mode.) 
                 vColdstartNoise) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Error flags vMRCS and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 vCCLR are cleared 
               
               
                 G3 
                   
                 CC_byteflightListen 
                   
                 soft reset released 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (in the respective control register) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 byteflight mode configured 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 slave role configured 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (pMaster not set) 
               
               
                 G4 
                   
                 CC_SendSymbol 
                   
                 soft reset released 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (in the respective control register) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 byteflight mode configured 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 master role configured 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (pMaster set) 
               
               
                 G5 
                   
                   
                   
                 describe further on 
               
               
                 G6 
                   
                   
                   
                 describe further on 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Transitions W 1  and W 5  are described in Table 13 and transition A 1  is described in Table 14. 
     Cluster Wakeup 
     This section describes the wake-up path preceding the communication startup. 
     Any node entering startup that has coldstart capability shall first execute the wakeup procedure. Otherwise it cannot be ensured, that the cluster is awake (or at least that the wakeup has been triggered) before the node begins the startup procedure. 
     The Host completely controls the wake-up procedure. The communication controller provides the Host the ability to transmit a special wake-up pattern (see above) on each of its available channels. It ensures that ongoing communication on this channel is not disturbed. The communication controller cannot guarantee that all Nodes connected to this channel wake up due to the transmission of the wakeup pattern (For example, the transmission unit of the bus driver might be defective.), since these nodes cannot give feedback until the startup phase. The Host has to be aware of possible failures of the wakeup and act accordingly. 
     The wakeup procedure enables single-channel devices in a two-channel system to trigger the wakeup, by only transmitting the wakeup pattern on the single channel to which they are connected. Another node then assumes the responsibility for waking the other channel. Any node that has coldstart capability must wake both channels before entering startup. Any node without coldstart capability connected to two channels must wake both channels, if it wants to wake up the cluster. 
     The wakeup procedure tolerates any number of nodes simultaneously trying to wake up a single channel and resolves this situation such that only one node transmits the pattern. Additionally the wakeup pattern is collision resilient, so even in the presence of one faulty node also transmitting a wakeup pattern, the wakeup can be assured. 
     Waking One Channel 
     The wakeup of the FlexRay system has to be initialized by a Host. The Host of a Node may command its communication controller to send a Tx-wakeup pattern on channel vWakeupChannel, while the communication controller itself is in the CC_SoftReset state. The communication controller then enters its wakeup mode and tries to transmit a Tx-wakeup pattern on the configured channel. Finally, it signals back the status of the wakeup attempt to the Host (refer to the wakeup status vector further on in the text). 
     The wakeup mode of the communication controller involves three states:
     CC_SoftReset   CC_WakeupListen   CC_WakeupSend
 
Wakeup State Diagram
   

     The structure of the Communication Controller Wakeup State Machine is shown in  FIG. 57 . 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 13 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Wakeup State Transitions and Corresponding Conditions for Execution. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Transition 
                   
                   
               
               
                 State 
                 Direction 
                   
                 Action taken on 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Transition 
                 from 
                 to 
                 Condition for Transition 
                 Transition 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 W1 
                 CC_WakeupListen 
                 CC_SoftReset 
                   
                 Reception of a frame header without 
                 Set the flag 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 coding violation 
                 corresponding to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (S_SuccessfullHeaderReception) on any 
                 the exit condition 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 of the configured channels. 
                 (refer to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OR 
                 Reception of a valid Rx-wakeup symbol 
                 wakeup status 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 on channel vWakeupChannel 
                 vector described 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (S_CheckRxWakeupSymbol occurred). 
                 further on). 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OR ( 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                     vWakeupCount == 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                     gWakeupMax. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 AND At least one channels is in idle 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                     state. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 AND( 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                       Listen-timeout vdWakeup 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                       expired (vdWakeup == 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                       gdWakeup). 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                     OR Listen-timeout with noise 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                       vdWakeupNoise expired 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                       (vdWakeupNoise == 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                       gWakeupNoise * 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                       gdWakeup). 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   ) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   ) 
               
               
                 W2 
                   
                 CC_WakeupSend 
                   
                 W1 not fulfilled. 
                 Increase 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 vWakeupCount &lt; gWakeupMax. 
                 vWakeupCount by 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 At least one channels is in idle state. 
                 one. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND( 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   Listen-timeout vdWakeup expired 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   (vdWakeup == gdWakeup). 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 OR Listen-timeout with noise 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   vdWakeupNoise expired 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   (vdWakeupNoise == 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   gWakeupNoise * gdWakeup). 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   ) 
               
               
                 W3 
                 CC_WakeupListen 
                 CC_WakeupListen 
                   
                 Reception of channel activity on either 
                 vdWakeup is reset 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 channel. 
                 to zero. 
               
               
                 W4 
                   
                 CC_WakeupListen 
                   
                 Reception of a valid CAS symbol on 
                 vdWakeupListen is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 either channel (S_CASReception 
                 reset to zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 occurred) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 W5 
                 CC_WakeupSend 
                 CC_SoftReset 
                 Transmission of Tx-wakeup pattern completed. 
                 vWakeupComplete 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 is set in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 startup status 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 vector 
               
               
                 W6 
                   
                 CC_WakeupListen 
                 Continuous ‘active low’ of more than 
                 vdWakeup and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 gdWakeupMaxCollision detected during an idle 
                 vdWakeupListen 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 phase of the Tx-wakeup pattern 
                 are reset to zero. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (S_CheckWakeupCollision occurred). 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The CC_SoftReset state is part of the overall protocol state diagram. Only in the CC_SoftReset state can the Host configure the communication controller and initialize wakeup on channel vWakeupChannel (G 1 ). After the wakeup, the communication controller returns into the CC_SoftReset state and signals to the Host the result of the wakeup attempt:
     Abort because the communication controller has received a frame header without coding violation, which is signaled by setting the vWakeupFrameHeaderReceived flag (W 1 ).   Abort because the communication controller has received a valid Rx-wakeup symbol on channel vWakeupChannel, which is signaled by setting the vWakeupSymbolReceived flag (W 1 ).   Abort due to too many wakeup attempts, which is signaled by setting the vWakeupFailed flag (W 1 ).   The complete transmission of the Tx-wakeup pattern, which is signaled by setting the vWakeupComplete flag (W 5 ).   

     The parameter gWakeupMax defines the maximum number of wakeup attempts allowed. The parameter vWakeupChannel defines the channel that the communication controller shall wake. 
     CC_WakeupListen State 
     The purpose of this state is to ensure that the transmission of the Tx-wakeup pattern does not disturb existing communication on channel vWakeupChannel. 
     The counter vWakeupCount is set to zero upon transition G 1  from the CC_SoftReset to the CC_WakeupListen state. 
     Two timers are defined:
     vdWakeup   vdWakeupNoise   

     Both timers are set to zero upon entering the CC_WakeupListen state. 
     The vdWakeup timer expires upon reaching gdCycle+gdMaxDrift (one cycle length plus a safety margin). The vdWakeupNoise timer expires upon reaching the amount of time, during which the cluster is able to keep the clock synchronization within the maximum specified tolerance band. 
     The vdWakeup timer is reset, whenever activity is received on either channel. 
     The vdWakeupNoise timer is reset, whenever a valid CAS symbol is received on any channel (S_CASReception occurred). A CAS symbol is—depending on the bitrate—rather short, so noise could be misinterpreted as a CAS symbol. To prevent an abort of the wakeup procedure due to noise, only the counter is reset when a CAS symbol is received. Only the frame following the CAS symbol will trigger the abort. Furthermore, it could be difficult to distinguish a CAS symbol from the first portion of a Tx-wakeup pattern. 
     If the communication controller receives a frame header without coding violation on any channel (indicated by S_SuccessfulHeaderReception), it reenters the CC_SoftReset state and sets the vWakeupFrameHeaderReceived flag (W 1 ). A communication controller must not transmit a Tx-wakeup pattern when ongoing communication is detected. The reception of a frame header without a coding violation is sufficiently robust for the detection of ongoing communication. 
     If the communication controller receives a valid Rx-wakeup symbol on channel vWakeupChannel, it reenters the CC_SoftReset state and sets the vWakeupSymbolReceived flag (W 1 ). (The detection shall be more relaxed than the rigid definition of the Rx-wakeup symbol to take topology effects, collisions and different clock speeds into account.) An Rx-wakeup symbol on the other channel (if available) is ignored. 
     If either of the timers expires and (vWakeupCount&lt;gWakeupMax) and at least one channel is in idle state, the communication controller enters the CC_WakeupSend state (W 2 ). All meaningful communication during startup is transmitted on both channels at the same time. By requiring one channel to be idle, it is ensured that no such transmission is interrupted by the transmission of the CAS symbol (within the uncertainty of the transmission delay). It cannot be required that both channels were idle, since one channel could be defective and noisy thereby preventing any wakeup and startup attempt. 
     If either of the timers expires and (vWakeupCount==gWakeupMax) and at least one channel is in idle state, the communication controller reenters CC_SoftReset and sets vWakeupFailed in the wakeup status vector (W 1 ). The wakeup is only aborted after reaching the maximal number of tries when a timer expires. This gives the communication controller time to listen to the network for ongoing communication or wakeup patterns after it stepped back from the CC_WakeupSend state. 
     CC_WakeupSend State 
     In this state, the communication controller transmits the Tx-wakeup pattern on the configured channel and checks for collisions. 
     Upon entering the CC_WakeupSend state, vWakeupCount is increased by one. 
     The Tx-wakeup pattern as described above is sent on the channel vWakeupChannel. 
     During the idle phases of the Tx-wakeup pattern, the communication controller listens for activity on the bus. If the communication controller receives more than gdWakeupMaxCollision of continuous ‘active low’ during an idle phase (This check is described in detail above and the occurrence of this event is signaled by S_CheckWakeupCollision.), it immediately steps back into the CC_WakeupListen state (W 6 ). Without this listening and aborting, not all collisions would lead to recognizable wakeup symbols (remember that the Tx-wakeup pattern itself is only resilient against collisions of up to two such patterns). The smaller pdWakeupMaxCollision is, the better the collision detection gets, but the EMC robustness degrades. A lower bound on the value might be the equivalent to 400 ns for a 10 Mbit/s system. 
     After a complete, non-aborted transmission of the Tx-wakeup pattern, the communication controller reenters the CC_SoftReset state and sets the vWakeupComplete flag in the wakeup status vector (W 5 ). 
     Wakeup Application Notes 
     Since the Host is closely involved in the wakeup of the FlexRay cluster, in this section the required Host behavior is described. The Host has to coordinate the bus guardian and the communication controller wakeup modes. It has to coordinate the wakeup of a two channels and to decide whether, or not, to wake a specific channel. 
     Bus Guardian 
     In systems that have a bus guardian installed, the Host has to command the appropriate bus guardian to enter its wakeup mode before it commands the communication controller to perform a wakeup. After the communication controller returns to the CC_SoftReset state, the bus guardian must be commanded to leave its wakeup mode. 
     Nodes with Coldstart Capability 
     Each node that is configured to perform a coldstart must perform a wakeup as described above before continuing with startup. For two-channel clusters it is generally advisable to use the procedure described below. 
     For FlexRay clusters in TT-D mode this includes all sync nodes that are not configured in a listen only mode. For FlexRay clusters in TT-M mode this includes the Master Node. 
     Actions of the Host to Initialize the Wakeup 
     A Host that wants to perform a wakeup of the cluster has first to check its bus driver(s) to see if they have received Rx-wakeup patterns. If the bus driver of a channel did not receive an Rx-wakeup pattern, the Host must try to wake this channel. 
     Each communication controller that is configured with coldstart capability relies upon its Host to have awakened the cluster prior to letting it enter the startup phase. Only the Host can ensure that the wakeup phase is completed before any startup attempt is performed. 
     The Host must not wake channels whose bus drivers have received an Rx-wakeup symbol unless startup is not possible without an additional wakeup of those channels. This is done to speed up the wakeup process and to limit the amount of traffic on the channels; thereby, the number of collisions during this phase is reduced. 
     The Host has to command the bus guardian (if available) of the channel vWakeupChannel to enter its wakeup mode. Then the Host uses the procedure described above to initialize a wakeup of channel vWakeupChannel. The communication controller may return several different status conditions that are described in the following section. Before evaluating these conditions, the Host must command the bus guardian of channel vWakeupChannel to leave its wakeup mode. If the Host does not cause the BG to leave its wakeup mode (BG_WakeUp), the BG leaves it after a fixed, non-configurable amount of time and enters the BG_FailSilent mode. 
     Reactions of the Host to the Status Flags Signaled by the Communication Controller 
     This section defines the various status conditions that the communication controller can return to the Host as outcomes of its wakeup attempt and the recommended reactions of the Host. These conditions are generally mutually exclusive, but in two-channel systems an Rx-wakeup symbol could be received on channel vWakeupChannel while a valid frame header is received on the opposite channel at the same time. The wakeup still fulfills its function when the exit conditions are given a precedence and are thereby made mutually exclusive (highest to lowest priority): Transmission complete, a frame header without coding violation has been received, an Rx-wakeup symbol has been received, the allowed number of wakeups has been exceeded. 
     A Frame Header without Coding Violation Has Been Received 
     When a frame header without coding violation is received by the communication controller on either available channel during CC_WakeupListen, the communication controller aborts the wakeup, even if channel vWakeupChannel is still silent. 
     The Host must not configure the communication controller to perform additional wakeup attempts, since this may disturb ongoing communication. Instead, it shall configure the communication controller to enter the start-up to integrate into the already running cluster. 
     An Rx-Wakeup Symbol Has Been Received 
     The communication controller has received an Rx-wakeup symbol on channel vWakeupChannel during its CC_WakeupListen state. This means, that another Node is already waking this channel. To prevent collisions of Tx-wakeup patterns on channel vWakeupChannel, the communication controller aborts the wakeup. 
     If another channel is available that is not already awake, the Host shall configure the communication controller to wake this channel. Otherwise, it shall configure the communication controller to enter startup. 
     The Transmission Has Been Completed 
     The communication controller has transmitted the complete Tx-wakeup pattern on channel vWakeupChannel. 
     If another channel is available that is not already awake, the Host shall configure the communication controller to wake this channel. Otherwise, it shall configure the communication controller to enter startup. 
     The Allowed Number of Wakeup Attempts Has Been Exceeded 
     The communication controller was not able to transmit a complete Tx-wakeup pattern because each of its gWakeupMax attempts to transmit it resulted in at least gdWakeupMaxCollision occurrences of continuous ‘active low’ during an idle phase of the pattern. Two possible reasons for this are heavy EMC disturbances on the bus or a babbling node. One cause, not responsible for this abort, is the collision with another Tx-wakeup pattern. Such a collision can be recognized after reentering the CC_WakeupListen state and would be signaled by setting the flag vWakeupSymbolReceived. 
     Since no complete Tx-wakeup pattern has been transmitted, it cannot be assumed that all nodes have received an Rx-wakeup symbol. The Host may use the retransmission procedure described below. 
     Waking Two Channels 
     This section describes how the Host can wake both channels of a two-channel system. 
     It is forbidden for a communication controller to send a Tx-wakeup pattern on both channels at the same time. (This rule was established to ensure that an erroneous communication controller couldn&#39;t disturb ongoing communication by transmitting wakeup patterns on both channels at the same time.) So, if it is necessary to wake both channels, the host must wake them one at a time. The Host can use the procedure for sending a Tx-wakeup pattern on one channel (see above) twice—once for the first channel and after that for the second channel. 
     For an example of this procedure, see below. 
     Retransmission of Wakeup Symbols 
     Some events may prevent a cluster wakeup by a Tx-wakeup pattern without the transmitting communication controller being able to immediately detect it (E.g. an erroneous star that needs significantly more time to start up and to be able to forward messages.). After a defined amount of time, the Host can detect such an error when the cluster does not start up after wakeup as expected, or the Host&#39;s own communication controller&#39;s attempt to start up the cluster fails. 
     The Host may then perform a retransmission of the Tx-wakeup pattern. It has to command the bus guardian (if available) of the chosen channel into its wakeup mode. The communication controller has to be brought into the CC_SoftReset state; then the procedure described above can be used to transmit a Tx-wakeup pattern on channel vWakeupChannel. Afterwards, the bus guardian must be commanded to leave its wakeup mode. 
     Note that this may disturb ongoing communication of other nodes if the node performing the wakeup procedure experiences an incoming link failure. 
     Transition to Startup 
     It may be several hundred milliseconds (depending on the hardware used) before all nodes and stars are completely awakened and configured. To perform a startup in the FlexRay time-triggered distributed protocol mode, at least two sync-Nodes are needed. A node is called a sync node if the host has set pSyncNode in the host interface. For a non-sync node, pSyncNode is set to false. The configuration parameter can only be set or cleared in the CC_SoftReset state. The transmission of more than one sync frame by a node within one cycle has to be prevented by the communication controller. For this protocol mode, sync-Nodes shall generally not enter the CC_StartupListen state immediately after performing the wakeup unless the vColdStartInhibit flag is set. A communication controller without the vColdStartInhibit flag set will try to start up the cluster, but may fail, since no other communication controller may be ready to join the communication before the coldstart initiator aborts the startup attempt because it has reached the maximum number of cold start attempts allowed. (This scenario will still result in a successful start-up, as long as some of the other sync nodes are configured to initialize the start-up. The node that has woken the network and failed to start-up will still join the communication started by another node.) The Host must clear this flag after sufficient time has passed to allow the other nodes in the cluster to awaken. 
     Transmission of Wakeup Symbols During Normal Operation 
     During normal operation, the Host can set the payload of frames that it transmits to a pattern that mimics two consecutive Tx-wakeup symbols (This applies only for NRZ coding defined above). Note that since the wakeup symbol has a fixed length, the number of bits necessary to construct a payload that is equivalent to two such wakeup symbols depends on the bit rate of the system. It may not be feasible to construct such a payload for every combination of allowed bit rate and static slot length (especially short ones). However, in this case it may still be possible to construct a dynamic frame with this payload if the dynamic segment is sufficiently long to allow it. Depending on the system configuration, it may even be possible to use two consecutive static frames. 
     EXAMPLES 
     This section describes in more detail the Host-communication controller interaction for the wakeup in two typical situations. Firstly, it is described, how one Host wakes both channels of a two-channel system. Secondly, it is described, how one node connected to only one channel of a two-channel system wakes this channel and how a sync node (connected to both channels) wakes the other channel. 
     Since also the transition between wakeup and startup is described, the examples may be more readily understood with a prior understanding of FlexRay startup, which is described in subsequent sections. 
     Two Channel Wakeup by One Node 
       FIG. 58  shows a Simple Wakeup. Larger (ms range) amount of times are represented by dotted lines. 
     This section describes a FlexRay system with two channels configured and operating in time-triggered distributed protocol mode. It is described how one sync-node first wakes the cluster and then performs the startup. 
     Node  1  is awake. It has decided to wake up the cluster. Node  2  and Node  3  are in a power-saving sleep mode. 
     The Host of Node  1  (Host  1 ) checks for wakeup activity by checking if one of its bus drivers has received an Rx-wakeup symbol. Since neither of them has, Host  1  must wake both channels. 
     Host  1  commands BG  1 B (the bus guardian of Node  1  and channel B) to enter its wakeup mode. 
     Host  1  commands CC  1  (the communication controller of Node  1 ) to wake up channel B by setting vWakeupChannel to channel B and setting/clearing the needed bits in the CC-Host interface (for a more detailed description, see further on in the description). 
     CC  1  enters the CC_WakeupListen state. It does not receive any activity on either channel. So the timer vdWakeup expires. The CC  1  enters the CC_WakeupSend state. 
     During the CC_WakeupSend state, the Tx-wakeup pattern is transmitted on channel B. During the idle phases of the Tx-wakeup pattern, CC  1  detects no activity on channel B. After complete transmission, the CC  1  sets vWakeupComplete and reenters CC_SoftReset. 
     Host  1  commands BG  1 B to leave its wakeup mode. 
     The wakeup pattern has triggered the wakeup receiver of the bus driver of Node  2  (which is connected only to channel B). Node  2  initializes. 
     Host  1  has meanwhile ead the wakeup status vector of CC  1  and continues waking the other channel. 
     Host  1  commands BG  1 A to enter its wakeup mode. 
     Host  1  sets vWakeupChannel to channel A and commands CC  1  to execute the wakeup mode. 
     CC  1  again enters the CC_WakeupListen state. It does not receive any activity on either channel. So the timer vdWakeup expires. The CC  1  enters the CC_WakeupSend state. During the CC_WakeupSend state, the Tx-wakeup pattern is transmitted on channel A. During the idle phases of the Tx-wakeup pattern, CC  1  detects no activity on channel A. After the complete transmission, the CC  1  sets vWakeupComplete and reenters CC_SoftReset. 
     Host A commands BG  1 A to leave its wakeup mode. 
     The wakeup pattern has triggered the wakeup receiver of the bus driver of Node  3  (which is connected only to channel A). Node  3  initializes. 
     Host A reads out the wakeup status vector of CC  1  and decides to continue with the startup, since both channels have been awakened. It sets the vColdStartInhibit flag and commands CC  1  to enter the CC_StartupListen state. 
     After some time, Node  2  and Node  3  are completely configured. Neither are sync nodes and each is only connected to one of two channels. Additionally, their bus drivers signal that they have received Rx-wakeup patterns, so their Hosts must not perform a wakeup of their own. Instead, both Hosts command their communication controllers to begin Startup. Both CC  2  and CC  3  remain in the CC_StartupListen state. 
     Finally Node  1  decides that enough time has passed to allow the other Nodes in the cluster to wake up and configure themselves. It clears the vColdStartInhibit flag of its communication controller and allows it thereby to enter the CC_ColdStartICW state. 
     See below for details on the startup procedure. 
     Wakeup Forwarding by One Node 
       FIG. 59  shows a Simple Wakeup with Forwarding. Larger (ms range) amount of times are represented by dotted lines. 
     This section describes a FlexRay system with two channels configured and operating in time-triggered distributed protocol mode. It is described, how first a non-sync node connected to only one channel wakes its channel, and how then a sync node forwards the Tx-wakeup pattern to the opposite channel and initiates the communication. 
     Node  1  is awake. It has decided to wake up the cluster. Node  2  and Node  3  are in a power-saving sleep mode. 
     The Host of Node  1  (Host  1 ) checks for wakeup activity by checking if its bus driver has received an Rx-wakeup symbol. Since it has not, Host  1  decides to wake its channel. Since this node is not a sync node, the Host does not have to wake its channel before entering the startup. In this example, the application demands it anyway. 
     Host  1  commands BG  1 B (the bus guardian of Node  1  and channel B) to enter its wakeup mode. 
     Host  1  commands CC  1  (the communication controller of Node  1 ) to wake up channel B by setting vWakeupChannel to channel B and setting/clearing the needed bits in the CC-Host interface (for a more detailed description, see the following description). 
     CC  1  enters the CC_WakeupListen state. It does not receive any activity on its channel. So the timer vdWakeup expires. The CC  1  enters the CC_WakeupSend state. 
     During the CC_WakeupSend state, the Tx-wakeup pattern is transmitted on channel B. 
     During the idle phases of the Tx-wakeup pattern, CC  1  detects no activity on channel B. After complete transmission, the CC  1  signals this by setting the vWakeupComplete flag and reenters the CC_SoftReset state. 
     Host  1  commands BG  1 B to leave its wakeup mode. 
     The wakeup pattern has triggered the wakeup receiver of the bus driver of Node  2  (which is connected to both channels). Node  2  initializes. 
     Host  1  reads the wakeup status vector of CC  1 . It notices that CC  1  completed the transmission and commands CC  1  to enter the CC_StartupListen state. Node  1  is not a sync Node and has now to wait for some other Node to initialize startup. 
     Meanwhile, Node  2  has awakened. Node  2  is a sync Node and is allowed to perform a coldstart, so it must perform a wakeup before entering startup. 
     Host  2  checks for wakeup activity by evaluating if one of its bus drivers has received an Rx-wakeup symbol. It notes that the bus driver of channel B has received an Rx-wakeup symbol and so only has to wake channel A. 
     Host  2  commands BG  2 A to enter its wakeup mode. 
     Host  2  sets vWakeupChannel to channel A and commands CC  2  to execute the wakeup process. 
     CC  2  enters the CC_WakeupListen state. It does not receive any activity on either channel. So the timer vdWakeup expires. The CC  2  enters the CC_WakeupSend state. 
     During the CC_WakeupSend state, the Tx-wakeup pattern is transmitted on channel A. 
     During the idle phases of the Tx-wakeup pattern, CC  2  detects no activity on channel A. After the complete transmission, the CC  2  signals this by setting the vWakeupComplete flag and reenters the CC_SoftReset state. 
     Host  2  commands BG  2 A to leave its wakeup mode. 
     The wakeup pattern has triggered the wakeup receiver of the bus driver of Node  3  (which is connected only to channel A). Node  3  initializes. 
     Host  2  reads out the wakeup status vector of CC  2  and decides to continue with the startup. Since some other Node had already awakened channel B, Host  2  assumes that other Nodes are already awake and initialized. It clears the vColdStartInhibit flag and commands CC  2  to enter the CC_StartupListen state. 
     See below for detailed information on the startup procedure. 
     Communication Startup and Reintegration 
     Corresponding to the supported protocol modes, three different mechanisms for communication startup are specified. Clusters operating in the time-triggered distributed (TT-D) mode follow a fault-tolerant, distributed startup strategy; for the time-triggered master-controlled (TT-M) mode this is reduced to a master controlled system behavior (refer to transitions indicated by prefix ‘S’; see  FIG. 62 ). A cluster configured in byteflight (BF) mode or event-triggered (ET) mode performs an event driven, master controlled startup (state transitions with prefix ‘B’ (byteflight; see  FIG. 63 ) and ‘E’ (event driven; see the following description), respectively). The protocol operations related to synchronization of the running communication schedule, integration of further nodes to a running cluster, media access rules, and error handling are different for the configuration alternatives. Therefore, configuration-specific state diagrams are given in the following sections for each of these configurations, including state descriptions and state transitions. 
     The cluster wake-up must precede the communication startup in order to ensure that all mechanisms defined for the startup work properly. After initial wake-up the whole network behaves like a broadcast medium. 
     Startup—Time-Triggered Protocol Mode (TT-D and TT-M) 
     In general, a node may enter communication (i.e., the CC_NormalOperation state) via the coldstart path (CC_ColdStartICW and CC_ColdStartVCW state sequence) initiating the schedule synchronization, or via the integration path (CC_InitSync and CC_IntegrationVCW state sequence) integrating into an existing communication schedule. Only sync nodes are allowed to enter via the coldstart path, and they have to check in advance whether there is already channel activity, or not (see below). 
     In order to establish a global media access schedule, the initial synchronization of the periodic TDMA schedule must be coordinated among all connected communication nodes. Since any sync node is permitted to initiate schedule synchronization, simultaneously started and conflicting attempts by different sync nodes must be resolved. Each node initially transmits a Collision Avoidance Symbol (CAS, see above) specifically for this purpose, before initiating the periodic schedule. This symbol represents a kind of arbiter, which is used to resolve initial collisions of nodes simultaneously attempting to set up the communication schedule. 
     Both non-sync nodes and sync nodes start passive integration via the integration path as soon as they receive sync frames from which to derive the TDMA schedule information. During integration the node has to adapt its own clock to the global clock (rate and offset) and has to make its cycle time consistent with the global schedule observable at the network. Afterwards, these settings are checked for consistency with all available network nodes. Only if these checks are passed, can the node leave the integration phase and actively participate in communication. 
     Several modes are supported that restrict the node&#39;s ability to communicate or to initiate startup actively (see below). These modes are configurable by the host and are explained within in their respective sections. 
     Startup Timeouts 
     A sync node shall maintain two different timers supporting two timeout values, vdStartup and vdStartupNoise. The expiration of either of these timers causes the node to leave the initial sensing phase (CC_StartupListen state) with the intention of starting up communication. Even though the following description is based on the assumption that these timers increment their values (starting with a reset value of zero), it is allowable for the implementation to choose another realization (e.g. counter decrement). 
     The node local listen-timeout vdStartup shall have the same length (gdStartup) for each node in the system that is configured to send an initial CAS during startup (sync node). The upper bound gdStartup limits the listen time used by a node to determine if there is already communication between other nodes or at least one sync node actively requesting the integration of others. 
     Due to the initial clock drift between the set of nodes that are already actively communicating (transmitting sync frames), and the node that is attempting to integrate, the listen-timeout must consider the maximum accumulated drift over the length of one cycle. Therefore the time-out interval gdStartup shall be constrained by the following inequality (gdStartup is derived internally from the configuration parameters gdCycle and gdMaxDrift. In addition, the upper boundary for the listen timeout, vdStartupNoise, is a multiple of gdStartup and is configurable using the parameter gStartupNoise.):
 
gdStartup≧gdCycle+gdMaxDrift
 
     The maximum allowable drift between any two clocks in the network is an important system parameter and is known at design time. This ‘worst case’ period has to be covered by configuring gdMaxDrift (unit: macroticks) accordingly. 
     While counting is based on macrotick granularity, the reset of the timer vdStartup shall be performed asynchronously to the macrotick clock. The timer vdStartup shall be reset (vdStartup=0) upon entering the CC_StartupListen state. 
     Further reset conditions for the timer vdStartup are defined as follows (see also  FIG. 60 ):
         1. If communication channel activity (Any signal edge detectable at the receiver (i.e., a signal edge, which has passed the glitch filter) is referred to as “channel activity” (channel state machine has entered the active state).) is detected on one of the configured pChannels channels while the node is in the CC_StartupListen state, the listen-timeout vdStartup shall be reset.   2. As long as the channel status of one of the configured pChannels channels is active the timer is continuously reset. The timer shall resume counting once the channel idle state is reached for all pChannels channels and the node is still in the CC_StartupListen state.       

     Once the listen-timeout vdStartup expires (vdStartup=gdStartup), neither an overflow nor a cyclic restart of the timer shall be performed. The status has to be kept for further processing by the startup state machine (see Table 14). 
     At the same time the listen-timeout vdStartup is started for the first time (transition from CC_SoftReset to the CC_StartupListen state), a second timeout vdStartupNoise shall be started with vdStartupNoise=0. This additional timeout is used to improve reliability of the startup procedure in the presence of noise. 
     While counting is based on macrotick granularity, the reset of the timer vdStartupNoise shall be performed asynchronously to the macrotick clock. The timer vdStartupNoise shall be reset upon entering the CC_StartupListen state. 
     Further reset conditions for the timer vdStartupNoise and its behavior are defined as follows (see also  FIG. 61 ):
         1. The transition from channel idle to channel active shall not influence the timer. The node has to receive a certain pattern (s. below) in order to reset the timer vdStartupNoise.   2. If S_SuccessfulHeaderReception or S_CASReception occur for any channel while the node is in the CC_StartupListen state, the listen-timeout vdStartupNoise shall be reset.       

     Once the listen-timeout vdStartupNoise expires (vdStartupNoise=gStartupNoise*gdStartup), neither an overflow nor a cyclic restart of the timer shall be performed. The status has to be kept for further processing by the startup state machine (see Table 13). 
     Since the timeout vdStartupNoise won&#39;t be reset if channel activity is sensed (see  FIG. 61 ), this timeout defines the fallback solution that guarantees that a node will try to start up the communication cluster even in the presence of noise. On the other hand, by having defined certain reset conditions, the synchronization of the coldstart entry is still guaranteed. The expiration of vdStartupNoise and the resulting entry into the coldstart path is captured in the variable vNoise (vNoise is set to ‘true’). 
     Listen-Only Mode 
     A FlexRay node shall support a listen-only mode. In listen-only mode, the node shall be able to receive all frames after successful integration to the running communication; i.e. the node is fully synchronized and performs the clock synchronization in order to keep this status. In comparison to the normal operation mode (CC_NormalOperation state) the node does not actively participate in communication, i.e. neither symbols nor frames are transmitted. 
     Setting vListenOnly to true while in the CC_SoftReset state configures the listen-only mode. vListenOnly cannot be set to true after leaving the CC_SoftReset state, but can be cleared at any time. 
     This mode supports communication diagnosis (‘monitoring’) as well as dedicated wake-up strategies, which require host interaction (vListenOnly subsequently cleared) in order to actively participate in communication after wake-up. 
     In listen-only mode, sync nodes behave like non-sync nodes during startup. Specifically, this applies to the prerequisites for transitioning from CC IntegrationVCW to CC_PassiveOperation. Passing the validation check requires that at least two different sync nodes are already synchronized and able to communicate. Please refer to the description of the validation check described below. 
     ColdStart-Inhibit Mode 
     A FlexRay node shall support a coldstart inhibit mode. In coldstart inhibit mode the node shall be prevented from initializing the TDMA communication schedule. If the host has set vColdStartInhibit, the node shall not be allowed to initialize the cluster communication after having checked on existing communication, i.e. entering the coldstart path is prohibited. The node shall be allowed to integrate to a running cluster or to acknowledge another node, which initially tries to start the cluster communication. 
     Coldstart inhibit mode vColdStartInhibit can be set in the CC_SoftReset state only. vColdStartInhibit cannot be set after leaving the CC_SoftReset state, but can be cleared at any time. vColdStartInhibit can be mapped to the gColdStartMax configuration parameter, which utilizes the zero value to keep the node from starting the network on its own initiative (refer to the chapter “host interface”). It has to be checked whether the parameter gColdStartMax can be accessed during run time, i.e., after leaving CC_SoftReset state, as this is required for the “coldstart inhibit” function.). 
     Once the node is synchronized, vColdStartInhibit shall not restrict the node&#39;s ability to receive frames or to transmit frames. 
     Startup State Diagram—Time-Triggered Protocol Mode (TT-D and TT-M) 
       FIG. 62  shows a Startup State Diagram—Time-Triggered Protocol Mode (TT-D and TT-M) 
                     TABLE 14                  State Transitions and Corresponding Conditions for Execution                                 Transition               State   Direction       Action taken on                                 Transition   from   to   Condition for Transition   Transition                                             S1   CC_StartupListen   CC_ColdStartICW       node is configured as a sync node   Reset vdInitial                       (pSyncNode == true;   ColdStartPhase to                       gColdStartMax &gt; 0)   zero.                   AND   vColdStartCount &lt; gColdStartMax   Immediately                   AND   vListenOnly is false   transmit CAS                   AND   vColdStartInhibit is false   symbol and start                   AND   not S2   cycle timing. Start                   AND (       transmitting the                          at least one channel is in   sync frame                          channel idle state   according to the slot                       AND at least one of the following   schedule.                          timers expired:   Increment                          listen-timeout vdStartup   vColdStartCount by                          (vdStartup == gdStartup)   one.                          listen-timeout with noise   If vdStartupNoise                          vdStartupNoise expired   has expired, the                           auxiliary variable                     )       vNoise is set       S2   CC_StartupListen   CC_InitSync       Reception (The frame reception   Set vRefSync to                       comprises the detection of channel   fFrameID of                       idle state after the frame) of an   S_ValidEvenStartup                       S_ValidEvenStartupFrame on one of   Frame                       pChannels channels                   AND (                          vRefSync == 0                          (no integration history available)                       OR fFrameID is different from                          vRefSync                       OR TT-M mode enabled                      )       S3       CC_StartupListen       vdCycleWithHistory expired   Reset vRefSync to                       (vdCycleWithHistory == gdStartup)   zero.       S4       CC_StartupListen       reception of a frame header on one   Reset                       of pChannels channels   vdStartupNoise to                       (S_SuccessfulHeaderReception   zero.                       occurred)                   OR   reception of a valid CAS symbol on                       one of pChannels channels                       (S_CASReception occurred)       S5       CC_StartupListen       reception of channel activity on any   Reset vdStartup to                       channel   zero.       S6   CC_ColdStartICW   CC_StartupListen       reception of a valid CAS symbol on   vdStartup and                       one of pChannels channels   vdStartupNoise are                       (S_CASReception occurred)   reset to zero.                   OR   reception of a frame header on one   If vRefSync is not                       of pChannels channels   zero, reset vdCycle-                       (S_SuccessfulHeaderReception   WithHistory to zero.                       occurred)   Set the flag                   OR (       vColdStartAborted                          end of current cycle (derived   or                          from local cycle time)   vCCMS, respectively.                       AND vColdStartCount is equal to   Stop timing and                          gColdStartMax   transmitting the                     )   Note: Due to this definition it is   sync frame.                       possible that a node stops current                       startup process (re-enter                       CC_StartupListen from                       CC_ColdStartICW), even though                       there hasn&#39;t been any possibility for                       other nodes to answer until then.       S7       CC_ColdStartVCW       not S6   Start clock                   AND   end of current cycle   synchronization.                       (derived from local cycle time)   Increment                   AND   vdInitialColdStartPhase expired   vColdStartCount by                       (vdInitialColdStartPhase ==   one.                       gdInitialColdStartPhase)       S8   CC_ColdStartVCW   CC_StartupListen      (       vdStartup and                          end of current cycle   vdStartupNoise are                          (derived from local cycle time)   reset to zero.                       AND vColdStartCount is equal to   If vRefSync is not                          gColdStartMax   zero, reset vdCycle-                       AND not S9   WithHistory to zero.                   ) OR (       If gColdStartMax                          end of current cycle   was reached, the                          (derived from local cycle time)   flag vCCMS is set.                       AND vInvalidSyncCount[ch] ≧   If the majority was                          vValidSyncCount[ch] for any   missed for                          channel ch   validation, the                   ) OR (       vSMMS flag is set.                          end of current cycle   If the rate or offset                          (derived from local cycle time)   correction value                       AND |vOffsetCorrection| &gt;   exceeded its limit,                          pOffsetCorrectionOut   the vCCLR flag is                   ) OR (       set.                          end of current cycle   Stop timing, clock                          (derived from local cycle time)   synchronization and                       AND |vRateCorrection| &gt;   transmitting the                          pRateCorrectionOut   sync frame.                          Note: It is assumed that the                          vOffsetCorrection is set to zero                          for cycles with even cycle                          counter value [(vCycle MOD                          2) = 0] by the clock                     )      synchronization unit       S9       CC_NormalOperation       end of current cycle   Enable the                       (derived from local cycle time)   transmission of data                   AND   (vCycle MOD 2) == 1   frames.                   AND   vInvalidSyncCount[ch] &lt;   The flag                       vValidSyncCount[ch] for all ch   vOpViaColdstart is                   AND   |vOffsetCorrection| ≦   set.                       pOffsetCorrectionOut   If vNoise is set, the                   AND   |vRateCorrection| ≦   flag vColdstartNoise                       pRateCorrectionOut   is set.                   AND (       The flags vMRCS                          TT-M mode enabled   and vCCLR are                       OR vSyncPairs is at least one   cleared.                     )       S10   CC_InitSync   CC_StartupListen       S_ValidOddStartupFrame with   vdStartup and                       fFrameID = vRefSync too late   vdStartupNoise are                   OR   S_ValidOddStartupFrame with   reset to zero.                       fFrameID = vRefSync too early   If vRefSync is not                       Note: During the CC_InitSync state,   zero, reset vdCycle-                       the node tries to catch the   WithHistory to zero.                       corresponding   The flag vMRCS is                       S_ValidStatupFrameOdd, which   set.                       belongs to the initial                       S_ValidEvenStartupFrame. Besides                       the check on the matching frame                       identifier, the derived correction                       value for the rate adoption must not                       exceed certain limits. The parameter                       pRateCorrectionInitOut determines                       these boundaries, and the terms ‘too                       late’ and ‘too early’ relate to this                       definition.       S11       CC_Integration       end of current cycle   Start clock               VCW       (derived from local cycle time)   synchronization.                   AND   (vCycle MOD 2) == 1   The flag vOffsetOut                           is cleared.       S12   CC_Integration   CC_StartupListen     (       vdStartup and           VCW              end of current cycle   vdStartupNoise are                          (derived from local cycle time)   reset to zero.                       AND vInvalidSyncCount[ch] ≧   If vRefSync is not                          vValidSyncCount[ch] for any ch   zero, reset vdCycle-                   ) OR (       WithHistory to zero.                          end of current cycle   If the majority was                          (derived from local cycle time)   missed for                       AND (vCycle MOD 2) == 1   validation, the                       AND vOffsetOut == true   vSMMS flag is set.                          (an offset correction value   If the rate or offset                          greater than   correction value                          pOffsetCorrectionOut has   exceeded its limit,                          already been accepted once)   the vCCLR flag is                       AND |vOffsetCorrection| &gt;   set.                          pOffsetCorrectionOut   If the transition was                   ) OR (       triggered due to the                          end of current cycle   vSyncPairs value,                          (derived from local cycle time)   the flag vMRCS is                       AND (vCycle MOD 2) == 1   set.                       AND |vOffsetCorrection| &gt;   Stop clock                          pOffsetCorrectionInitOut   synchronization.                   ) OR (                          end of current cycle                          (derived from local cycle time)                       AND (vCycle MOD 2) == 1                       AND |vRateCorrection| &gt;                          pRateCorrectionOut                   ) OR (                          end of current cycle (derived                          from local cycle time)                       AND (vCycle MOD 2) == 1                       AND value of vSyncPairs not big                          enough                          (refer to section 0)                     )       S13       CC_Normal       not S12   Enable the               Operation   AND   end of current cycle   transmission of data                       (derived from local cycle time)   frames.                   AND   (vCycle MOD 2) == 1   The flags vMRCS                   AND   vInvalidSyncCount[ch] &lt;   and vCCLR are                       vValidSyncCount[ch] for all relevant   cleared.                       ch (A channel with                       vInvalidSyncCount[ch] ==                       vValidSyncCount[ch] == 0 is                       disregarded for validation analysis)                   AND   vSyncPairs is big enough (refer to                       section 0)                   AND   vListenOnly is false                   AND   |vOffsetCorrection| ≦                       pOffsetCorrectionOut                   AND   |vRateCorrection| ≦                       pRateCorrectionOut       S14   CC_Integration   CC_Passive       not S12   The flags vMRCS           VCW   Operation   AND   end of current cycle   and vCCLR are                       (derived from local cycle time)   cleared.                   AND   (vCycle MOD 2) == 1                   AND   vInvalidSyncCount[ch] &lt;                       vValidSyncCount[ch] for all relevant                       ch                   AND   vSyncPairs is big enough (refer to                       section 0)                   AND   vListenOnly is true                   AND   |vOffsetCorrection| ≦                       pOffsetCorrectionOut                   AND   |vRateCorrection| ≦                       pRateCorrectionOut       S15   CC_Passive   CC_Normal       end of current cycle   Enable the           Operation   Operation       (derived from local cycle time)   transmission of data                   AND   vListenOnly is false   frames.       A1   All   CC_SoftReset       soft reset initiated           States           (in the respective control register)                    
CC_StartupListen State
 
     A FlexRay node shall enter the CC_StartupListen state from the CC_SoftReset state when the communication controller is ready to attempt communication startup or enter a running network. If the communication controller is capable of initiating a startup attempt, the Host shall first ensure that the cluster is awake before letting the communication controller enter the CC_StartupListen state. 
     When entering the CC_StartupListen state from CC_SoftReset or re-entering from any other state of the startup state machine other than the CC_StartupListen state itself, sync nodes shall (re-)start their listen-timeout vdStartup and their listen-timeout with noise vdStartupNoise (see above). 
     The global cluster constant gColdStartMax defines the number of cycles a node shall be permitted to attempt a coldstart, i.e. the number of cycles a node may reside in coldstart path. Once vColdStartCount is equal to gColdStartMax the node shall not enter the coldstart path (This could be achieved by preventing the restart of the listen-timeouts vdStartup and vdStartupNoise.). vColdStartCount is only reset upon entering the CC_StartupListen state from the CC_SoftReset state. 
     Non-sync nodes shall not enter the coldstart path, because these nodes are not allowed to initiate communication on their own. This could be achieved by several means, e.g. for non-sync nodes gColdStartMax is configured to zero, or the listen-timeouts vdStartup and vdStartupNoise are not maintained. 
     Upon the reception of an S_ValidEvenStartupFrame the integration path shall be entered via the CC_InitSync state. Furthermore, vRefSync must be zero (see strategy defined in order to prevent a node from repetitively choosing a faulty node as a reference). fFrameID shall be stored to vRefSync, in order to store the identifier of the reference frame, and thereby a representation of the corresponding sync node for further processing (see below). 
     If at least one of the channels is in channel idle state, at least one of the listen-timeouts vdStartup or vdStartupNoise has expired and the entry condition to the integration path is not fulfilled, the node shall enter the CC_ColdStartICW state. 
     A node that failed to integrate to the reference node that was selected to derive initial rate and offset information, shall not utilize the same node for an integration attempt during the next communication cycle. Therefore, a node shall maintain a history of reference nodes it has attempted to use in order to avoid repetitive selection of the same reference node. It must be ensured that a node in the CC_StartupListen state selects a sync node different from the former reference node if present. 
     If an integration attempt fails with a selected reference node the reference node shall not be permanently excluded from the list of potential reference nodes. Due to a transient disturbance the integration might have failed even though the reference node operated fault-free (A corrupted sync frame might prevent the transition in CC_InitSync state or CC_IntegrationVCW state). Therefore, the following strategy shall be applied after an integration attempt has failed (see below). 
     A node entering CC_StartupListen shall reset and start a timer with the timeout value vdCycleWithHistory, if vRefSync is nonzero. This timer shall encompass the same time period gdStartup as the vdStartup timeout. 
     The timeout vdCycleWithHistory shall not be reset due to channel activity in the CC_StartupListen state 
     Upon the expiration of timeout vdCycleWithHistory, vRefSync shall be cleared. This setting (vRefSync=0) prevents the restart of vdCycleWithHistory The node shall only enter integration path (via the CC_InitSync state), if the fFrameID of a received S_ValidEvenStartupFrame is not equal to the ID stored in vRefSync. Since there is only one sync node available in TT-M mode, it is counterproductive to attempt to sync to a different node. 
     In TT-M mode, a non-sync node shall not perform the above-defined strategy. In TT-M mode, a single sync node, i.e. the master exists. All non-sync nodes and their synchronization are fully dependent on the master node. Therefore, this node is never excluded as a potential reference. When entering the CC_StartupListen state from any other state, vRefSync is cleared (i.e., set to zero). 
     When re-entering the CC_StartupListen state from any state, the rate correction value shall be reinitialized with pMicroOverheadperCycleNom. 
     CC_ColdStartICW (Initial Check Window) State 
     Only sync nodes shall be allowed to enter the coldstart path via the CC_ColdStartICW state. The phase, for which a sync node is in the CC_ColdStartICW state, shall be used for the following purposes: 
     It has to be ensured that a single sync node is going to start the communication cluster. Therefore, other sync nodes have to be prevented from entering the coldstart path. When multiple nodes enter simultaneously the CC_ColdStartICW state, a resolution mechanism ensures that all but one return to CC_StartupListen state. 
     In the CC_ColdStartICW state the coldstart initiating node is expected to have exclusive access to the channels in the fault-free case. Other nodes that are integrating based on the sync frame reception of the coldstart initiator always follow a defined procedure that ensures that for initial cycles in the integration path these nodes stay passive. Consequently, the node initiating the coldstart should not receive any responses while in the CC_ColdStartICW state. Therefore, any frame reception during the CC_ColdStartICW state is due to another node having entered coldstart path at the same time (refer to bullet above) or to an error scenario. 
     In the CC_ColdStartICW state, a sync node shall transmit an initial CAS symbol and shall then transmit its configured sync frame periodically to enable the startup of the entire network. By starting the first communication cycle after CAS transmission, the cycle counter is initialized to zero; thus the first sync frame is transmitted with fCycleCount equal to zero. 
     By transmitting the CAS symbol, other sync nodes are prevented from entering the coldstart path. If more than a single sync node transmits the CAS symbol simultaneously, those nodes all enter the CC_ColdStartICW state simultaneously. However, their cycle timing is inherently synchronized so this scenario is resolvable during the next cycles while in CC_ColdStartICW state. 
     The reception of a valid CAS symbol (S_CASReception occurred) or a frame header (indicated by S_SuccessfulHeaderReception) on any channel shall cause the node to re-enter CC_StartupListen state immediately. 
     In the CC_ColdStartICW state a node shall not transmit normal data frames, which are frames without sync bit set. 
     A node shall remain in the CC_ColdStartICW state for a certain period determined by the initial coldstart phase (gdInitialColdStartPhase). A timer vdInitialColdStartPhase shall be reset and started, when CC_ColdStartICW is entered. This timer shall cover the initial slot used for CAS transmission as well as three complete communication cycles (refer to the definition of gdInitialColdStartPhase in the following part of the description). Thereby, gdInitialColdStartPhase determines the time a node stays in the CC_ColdStartICW state before entering CC_ColdStartVCW. 
     Upon the transition into another state the timer vdInitialColdStartPhase shall be stopped. 
     A node in time-triggered distributed (TT-D) mode with an “incoming link failure” shall stop transmission after a predefined interval of time. Thereby other sync nodes are enabled to take over responsibility of starting the communication for the cluster. 
     For this feature the additional counter vColdStartCount shall be maintained. 
     With the transition into the CC_ColdStartICW state the variable vColdStartCount shall be incremented by one. 
     With each new cycle-start in the CC_ColdStartICW state, vColdStartCount shall be incremented by one. 
     At the end of each cycle, vColdStartCount is compared to the allowed maximum gColdStartMax. If vColdStartCount is equal to gColdStartMax, the node shall re-enter the CC_StartupListen state. In this case, the node that initiates the coldstart has not been able to achieve communication with another node (transition to CC_NormalOperation state) within gColdStartMax cycles. 
     Once this condition had become true, the sync node shall not be able to enter the coldstart path again. Only the host can reset this status (by forcing the transition to the CC_SoftReset state). 
     A node in time-triggered master-controlled (TT-M) mode shall not maintain the vColdStartCount counter. 
     CC_ColdStartVCW (Validation Check Window) State 
     In the CC_ColdStartVCW state, the node shall maintain periodic transmission of its sync frame on cycle basis—but no other frames shall be scheduled for transmission. In addition, the node shall perform a validation check at the end of each cycle in order to assess the network image perceived for the current cycle. Depending on the result of the validation check, the node
     shall remain in the CC_ColdStartVCW state, if no response has been received at all (and vColdStartCount is smaller than gColdStartMax),   shall step back to the CC_StartupListen state, if the response does not fit to the node-local communication schedule,   shall enter normal operation (the CC_NormalOperation state), if the response is in accordance with the node-local communication schedule.   

     This list applies for sync nodes in time-triggered distributed (TT-D) mode. For FlexRay clusters operating in time-triggered master-controlled (TT-M) mode, the coldstart initiator is the only node configured to send sync frames. Therefore, this node shall not wait for any response and shall perform the transition into the CC_NormalOperation state at the end of the cycle. 
     By transmitting the sync frame, the coldstart initiator requests other nodes to join into the given communication schedule. Once these nodes (At a minimum, the joining of one further sync node is required for TT-D protocol mode.) become active, the coldstart initiator shall leave the coldstart path by entering normal operation, i.e. the protocol operation phase (POP). In order to transfer a coldstart initiator in TT-D mode into the CC_NormalOperation state, the response of other active nodes must pass certain validation criteria. The term ‘response’ and the validation check rules are described in detail below. 
     Two different mechanisms shall contribute to the validation check. First, received sync frames must be in accordance to the node-local communication schedule Furthermore, the correction terms of the clock synchronization must not exceed the configured boundaries. 
     To prepare for the validation check, the node shall observe and assess the communication over one cycle. Two event counters per channel (vValidSyncCount[ch] and vInvalidSyncCount[ch]) shall be administrated in order to support decision-making. In accordance with the static segment acceptance criteria (refer to Chapter ‘Frame Processing’ above), a clear distinction between several possible cases can be made for each slot. These slot scenarios shall be judged and counters shall be incremented according to the following rules: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 if (S_ValidStaticFrame with sync bit set is received on channel ch) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vValidSyncCount[ch]++; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 end; 
               
               
                 elseif [(an S_CorrectFrame with sync bit failed the static segment 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 acceptance due to S_PayloadLengthStaticError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_FrameIDError 
               
               
                   
                 or S_CycleCountError on channel ch) and 
               
               
                   
                 (no sync frame with fFrameID has already been taken into 
               
               
                   
                 account for counter increment during current cycle)] 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vInvalidSyncCount[ch]++; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 end; 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The validation check counters shall be initialized for all configured pChannel channels upon each new cycle start as follows:
         vValidSyncCount[ch]=1;   vInvalidSyncCount[ch]=0;       

     The node shall consider itself to operate correctly and shall therefore initialize the counters vValidSyncCount[ch] accordingly (pre-set to one). 
     The validation check shall be passed, if vValidSyncCount[ch] is greater than vInvalidSyncCount[ch] for all configured channels. The transition to CC_NormalOperation shall be only permitted, if the check is passed with vValidSyncCount[ch]&gt;1 on at least one of the pChannel channels. 
     With the transition to CC_ColdStartVCW and with each new cycle start in CC_ColdStartVCW, the variable vColdStartCount shall be incremented by one. At the end of each cycle, vColdStartCount shall be compared to the allowed maximum gColdStartMax. If vColdStartCount is equal to gColdStartMax, the node shall re-enter the CC_StartupListen state. 
     In CC_ColdStartVCW, the node shall execute the global clock synchronization for offset and rate according to the regular rules. CC_ColdStartVCW is the latest point in time the clock synchronization including measurement and correction phase has to be active. The node could perform clock synchronization already in the ColdStartICW state. This might be advantageous for the TT-M protocol mode and the establishment of the two-cycle based rate measurement phase. According to the definition of the regular rate measurement phase, all sync frames shall be registered and pair-wise (sync frames with same frame identifier) evaluated for clock synchronization. The offset measurement phase shall be applied in accordance to the regular scheme, too. This means that for each cycle with an odd cycle counter value the related sync frames shall be used to determine next offset correction term. The sync frames received from nodes that have integrated upon the coldstart attempt are delayed by two times the overall (network) propagation delay. This has to be considered for the setting of the offset correction term boundary (anyway). 
     The node in the CC_ColdStartVCW state requires at least one additional matching pair of sync frames suitable for rate measurement (same frame identifier, consecutive occurrence in ‘even/odd’ cycle order), in order to fulfill one of the necessary prerequisites for entering CC_NormalOperation. Upon reception of two valid, matching frames (S_ValidStaticFrame) in even/odd cycle order, the node in CC_ColdStartVCW shall increment the counter vSyncPairs. As long as the node does not receive a response, it performs the clock correction based on one “pair of matching sync” frames, namely its own transmissions (this is taken into account by using the value 0 as ‘measurement sample’). The introduction of vSyncPairs is done in order to ease the description of several distinctions to be made in the specification. As an auxiliary variable, it is not required that this parameter is used for an implementation of a FlexRay protocol controller. With the beginning of each rate measurement phase in CC_ColdStartVCW state, the counter vSyncPairs shall be reset to zero. 
     In addition to the prerequisite that necessary sets of measurement samples are available (vSyncPairs is greater than zero), the quality of the resulting correction terms for clock synchronization shall be assessed. The node is only permitted to execute transition into the CC_NormalOperation state if the correction terms for both rate and offset are within the configured limits
     |vOffsetCorrection|≦pOffsetCorrectionOut   |vRateCorrection|≦pRateCorrectionOut   

     If one of the correction terms violates the limit settings, the node shall re-enter the CC_StartupListen state. 
     CC_InitSync State 
     A node shall enter CC_InitSync after having received an S_ValidEvenStartupFrame on one of the configured pChannel channels in the CC_StartupListen state. In the CC_InitSync state, the node shall not schedule any transmission. 
     The node variable vRefSync shall contain the frame identifier of the sync frame that has been used to enter the integration path. The sync node corresponding to this reference frame is called the reference node. 
     In the CC_InitSync state an initial rate correction value shall be determined in order to adjust the local macrotick timing to the timing given by the reference node (referred to as “rate adoption”). To accomplish this, the time between the initial occurrence of the reference frame and its next occurrence is measured and the difference from the nominal cycle length shall be applied as the rate correction term. 
     In order to improve robustness of the entire integration process against temporary disturbances, the reception of S_ValidStartupFrame is tracked for each channel separately. That means that if the initial sync frame has been received on channel A and the next sync frame on this channel is missing, the node shall remain in the CC_InitSync state if the rate adoption can still be based on the other channel, i.e. on channel B. This requires the correct reception of a valid pair of S_ValidStartupFrame (starting with S_ValidEvenStartupFrame) on the second channel. In no case a pair of frames shall be constituted out of measurements picked from different channels, i.e. cross-channel measurement is prohibited. 
     The node shall administer means to ensure that a transition back into the CC_StartupListen state is performed, if
     S_ValidOddStartupFrame is received too early on one of the channels ch, for which an S_ValidEvenStartupFrame has already been received   no S_ValidOddStartupFrame is received within a defined period on any of the channels ch for which an S_ValidEvenStartupFrame has already been received   

     In essence, the captured initial rate correction value must not exceed a configured limit, which is given by pRateCorrectionInitOut. 
     Once a valid rate correction term has become available, the node shall run with the corrected rate (direct application of the correction term). 
     Furthermore, S_ValidOddStartupFrame shall be used to determine the nominal schedule position. This operation shall be based on the received identifier fFrameID. The node shall set its local cycle time accordingly, i.e., it shall synchronize the micro- and macrotick counters to the first BSS (falling edge) of the received sync frame. The cycle counter value fCycleCount of the received sync frame shall be extracted and used to initialize the local cycle counter. 
     In this manner, the local schedule is established according to the information derived from the reference node. The node shall follow the local schedule until the end of the current cycle without transmitting actively. 
     Any further reception shall be ignored and neither rate nor offset measurements shall be performed. At the end of the cycle, the node shall transit into CC_IntegrationVCW state. 
     CC_IntegrationVCW State 
     In the CC_IntegrationVCW state, the node shall not schedule any transmission. 
     In CC_IntegrationVCW the node shall confirm the settings copied from the reference node with the overall network communication scheme. For this purpose the node shall perform a cycle-based validation check similar to the check defined for the CC_ColdStartVCW state (see above). Since the node still behaves passively, the initialization of the administered counters differs from that for a node in CC_ColdStartVCW (which transmits a sync frame and thus participates actively in the validation check). 
     The validation check counters shall be initialized for all configured pChannel channels upon each new cycle start as follows:
         vValidSyncCount[ch]=0;   vInvalidSyncCount[ch]=0;       

     Counter increment shall be performed according to the following rules: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 if (S_ValidStaticFrame with sync bit set is received on channel ch) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 vValidSyncCount[ch]++; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 end; 
               
               
                 elseif [(an S_CorrectFrame with sync bit failed the static segment 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                  acceptance due to S_PayloadLengthStaticError, S_FrameIDError 
               
               
                   
                  or S_CycleCountError on channel ch) and 
               
               
                   
                  (no sync frame with fFrameID has already been taken into 
               
               
                   
                  account for counter increment during current cycle)] 
               
               
                   
                 vInvalidSyncCount[ch]++; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 end; 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The validation check shall be considered to be passed if vValidSyncCount[ch] is greater than vInvalidSyncCount[ch] for all channels except those for which vValidSyncCount[ch]==vInvalidSyncCount[ch]==0. If both the vInvalidSyncCount and the vValidSyncCount are equal to zero for all configured channels, the validation check fails. 
     The transition into CC_NormalOperation can only take place if the validation check has been passed, but additionally further conditions must be satisfied (see clock correction term assessment and next paragraphs, respectively). The validation check shall run concurrently with these additional checks until the validation check itself fails or a state transition due to another condition is executed. 
     When the node enters CC_IntegrationVCW, a regular measurement phase for the next rate correction term shall be started. According to the definition of the regular rate measurement phase, all sync frames shall be registered and pair-wise (sync frames with same frame identifier) evaluated for clock synchronization. The offset measurement phase shall be applied in accordance to the regular scheme, too. This means that for each cycle with an odd cycle counter value the related sync frames are used to determine next offset correction term. 
     An integrating sync node requires at least one matching pair of sync frames suitable for rate measurement (same frame identifier, consecutive occurrence in ‘even/odd’ order) in order to fulfill one of the necessary prerequisites to enter CC_NormalOperation state. Using this pair of sync frames, the node can acknowledge an existing node in CC_ColdStartVCW or simply integrate to a synchronized cluster. The number of matching pairs of sync frames shall be accumulated in vSyncPairs. 
     The counter vSyncPairs shall be evaluated at the end of an odd cycle. 
     For sync nodes that do not operate in listen-only mode (vListenOnly is false) vSyncPairs needs to be at least one, otherwise no integration shall be possible. In that case, the node shall re-enter the CC_StartupListen state. This characterizes the scenario, where the original reference node does not maintain proper sync frame transmission for the entire integration phase. 
     This holds also for nodes in TT-M mode, which are going to integrate to the ‘master’-driven schedule. The parameter vSyncPairs needs to be at least one; otherwise no integration shall be possible. In that case, the node shall re-enter the CC_StartupListen state. 
     If a sync node is configured as a listen-only node (vListenOnly is true), it has to fulfill the same condition as non-sync nodes in TT-D protocol mode. These nodes need to receive at least two matching pairs of sync frames suitable for rate measurement (same frame identifier, consecutive occurrence). Only if there is already a communication established comprising at least two sync nodes (nodes in the CC_NormalOperation state) can non-sync nodes (or sync nodes in listen-only mode) join in. For these nodes vSyncPairs needs to be at least two, otherwise no integration shall be possible. The node shall re-enter the CC_StartupListen state, if vSyncPairs is zero. 
     With the beginning of each rate measurement phase in the CC_IntegrationVCW state, the variable vSyncPairs shall be reset to zero. 
     In addition to the prerequisite that necessary sets of measurement samples are available (vSyncPairs is large enough, see above), the quality of the resulting correction terms for clock synchronization must be acceptable. A node shall be allowed to join active communication (transition into the CC_NormalOperation state), only if the correction terms for both rate and offset are within the configured limits
     |vOffsetCorrection|≦pOffsetCorrectionOut   |vRateCorrection|≦pRateCorrectionOut.   

     If one of the correction terms violates the limit settings, the node has to re-enter CC_StartupListen. 
     The only exception to this rule is for the first time an offset correction value is available in the CC_IntegrationVCW state. In this special case the correction value vOffsetCorrection may exceed the configured limit pOffsetCorrectionOut, which is applied during regular clock synchronization. The initial offset correction value shall be compared against the limit pOffsetCorrectionInitOut.
         |vOffsetCorrection|≦pOffsetCorrectionInitOut       

     If this more relaxed requirement can be met, the node shall remain in the CC_IntegrationVCW state, but shall not transit into the CC_NormalOperation state. 
     After the application of the initial offset correction term (and the check against the pOffsetCorrectionInitOut limit) in the CC_IntegrationVCW state, the next offset correction term has to meet the regular pOffsetCorrectionOut limit. That means the described exception is only made once, i.e., when the first offset correction term is available. 
     In order to ensure proper processing, a flag vOffsetOut shall be set to true once the initial offset correction term check has been performed. The introduction of vOffsetOut is done in order to ease the description in the specification. As an auxiliary variable it is not required that this parameter is used for an implementation of a FlexRay protocol controller. This flag shall be always evaluated, if a new offset correction term should be checked against the configured limit settings. The flag vOffsetOut is initialized to false, if CC_IntegrationVCW is entered from the CC_InitSync state. 
     The combination of all these checks ensures that the node only becomes an active transmitter if the local time base (including the cycle counter and the clock synchronization parameters) is consistent with the global time as represented by the majority of active sync nodes in the system. 
     CC_NormalOperation State 
     As soon as the node that transmitted the first CAS symbol (resolving the potential access conflict and entering startup via coldstart path) and one additional node have entered the CC_NormalOperation state, the startup phase is finished for a cluster in TT-D protocol mode. 
     In TT-M protocol mode, the single sync node enters the CC_NormalOperation state without any communication counterpart. This is due to its master role in the time-triggered master-controlled mode. 
     In the CC_NormalOperation state, all configured messages will be scheduled for transmission. This includes all data frames as well as the sync frame. 
     CC_PassiveOperation State 
     In the CC_PassiveOperation state a node shall not transmit any of its configured frames. Nevertheless, the node shall not stop all activities—it shall perform clock synchronization based on the received sync frames, the reception of messages and the full support of the host interface. 
     In addition, the CC_PassiveOperation state is used to support the ‘listen only’ protocol feature, where nodes are fully synchronized and receive all available frames (including receive buffer update), but shall not transmit anything. This mode shall be indicated by vListenOnly, which can be set by the host in the CC_SoftReset state only. As soon as the host clears vListenOnly, the CC_NormalOperation state shall be entered at the beginning of the next cycle. 
     Startup—byteflight Protocol Mode (BF) 
     A correctly configured sync master communication controller (pMaster is true) shall enter the startup sequence via the transition from CC_SoftReset to CC_byteflightMaster. 
     A single node should be configured as the sync master node, which must send a status symbol on all gChannels channels. For the sync master node pChannels must be equal to gChannels. 
     A correctly configured slave node communication controller (pMaster is false) shall enter the startup sequence via the transition from CC_SoftReset to CC_byteflightListen. 
     All slave nodes shall synchronize to the status symbol transmitted by the sync master node. If that node does not start, the system does not start up. 
     Slave nodes start their communication cycle on both channels with the reception of the first valid status symbol on one of the pChannels channels. 
     For a detailed description of the byteflight protocol mode, please refer to M. Peller, J. Berwanger, and R. Greissbach, byteflight Specification, version 0.5, BMW Corporation 1999, available at. 
     Startup State Diagram—byteflight Protocol Mode (BF) 
       FIG. 63  shows a Startup State Diagram of the byteflight Protocol Mode (BF) 
                     TABLE 15                  State Transitions and Corresponding Conditions for Execution                                         Action       State   State Direction       taken on                                 Transition   from   to   Condition for Transition   Transition                                             B1   CC_byteflightListen   CC_byteflightSlave       reception of a valid status symbol at one                           of pChannels channels                   AND   vListenOnly is false       B2       CC_byteflight       reception of a valid status symbol at one                       of pChannels channels               Passive   AND   vListenOnly is true (‘Listen-only’ mode is                       an invalid configuration for the master                       node!)       B3   CC_byteflightSlave   CC_byteflightListen       network idle time reached                       (vMacrotick == gdCycle-gdNIT; based on                       local timers)       B4   CC_SendSymbol   CC_byteflightMaster       transmission of the status symbol                       finished       B5   CC_byteflightMaster   CC_SendSymbol       end of current cycle (derived from local                       cycle time)       B6   CC_byteflightPassive   CC_byteflightListen       network idle time reached                       (vMacrotick == gdCycle-gdNIT; based on                       local timers)       A1   All States   CC_SoftReset       soft reset initiated                       (in the respective control register)                    
CC_SendSymbol State
 
     A single node that has been configured as sync master (pMaster is set) shall send a status symbol. With the end of the transmission the timers (of the receiver unit) shall be started according to the definitions in the byteflight specification (see M. Peller, J. Berwanger, and R. Greissbach, byteflight Specification, version 0.5, BMW Corporation 1999, available at) and the node shall enter the CC_byteflightMaster state. 
     When a node enters the CC_SendSymbol state while a frame reception is ongoing the reception process is stopped. 
     CC_byteflightMaster State 
     A node shall send and receive messages in the CC_byteflightMaster state according to its configuration. Upon entering the CC_byteflightMaster state, i.e. after the transmission of the status symbol, the startup phase is completed. The master node does not need any acknowledgement from other nodes. 
     CC_byteflightListen State 
     All slave nodes (pMaster is false) shall wait in the CC_byteflightListen state for the reception of a valid status symbol. All configured pChannels channels shall be independently monitored. The transition into CC_byteflightSlave and therefore the synchronization of both channels to the master shall be done on reception of the first valid status symbol. After initialization of the wait timers, all configured channels shall operate asynchronously with respect to the required frame mini-slotting on each of the pChannels channels. 
     CC_byteflightSlave State 
     Slave nodes shall synchronize to a valid status symbol and transmit and receive messages in the CC_byteflightSlave state according to their configuration. 
     CC_byteflightPassive State 
     In CC_byteflightPassive a node shall not transmit any of its configured frames. The node shall not stop all activities, but shall continue performing synchronization to status symbols (via the CC_byteflightListen state) and the reception of messages. 
     The CC_byteflightPassive state is used to support the ‘listen only’ protocol feature, where the node shall be fully synchronized and shall receive all available frames (including receive buffer update), but shall not transmit anything. This mode shall be indicated by vListenOnly, which can be set by the host in the CC_SoftReset state only. As soon as the host clears vListenOnly, the CC_byteflightSlave state shall be entered with beginning of the next cycle. 
     Since the communication controller performs the transition to CC_byteflightListen state with every communication cycle, it is still synchronized to the master node. Therefore, the node is allowed to directly re-enter CC_byteflightSlave from CC_byteflightListen (at the beginning of the next cycle), if the host sets vListenOnly to false. 
     Startup—Event-Triggered Protocol Mode (ET) 
     The node&#39;s behavior during startup is described further on in the description. 
     Startup Examples—Time-Triggered Protocol Mode (TT-D) 
     For all startup sequences described in this chapter the assumption is made that the correction terms for clock synchronization exactly match the limit settings of the quality assessment criterion (see above). Therefore, the node is allowed to proceed directly into normal operation (CC_NormalOperation state) after having performed the offset measurement, correction phase, and regular rate measurement phase the first time. 
     Startup without Collisions 
     The scenario illustrated in  FIG. 64  depicts three nodes with two of them configured to initiate the startup actively (sync nodes A and B). Node C is not configured to schedule any sync frames and therefore is not allowed to enter CC_ColdStartICW. The first cycle counter value received by nodes B and C is in the sync frame sent by node A and it is even. 
     Node A enters CC_ColdStartICW and transmits the initial CAS before any other node. Triggered by the related channel activity, node B restarts its listen-timeout vdStartup. On the reception of the CAS symbol, the listen-timeout vdStartupNoise is restarted. With the first sync frame (fFrameId=3) is sent by node A all other nodes enter CC_InitSync. At this point Node A becomes the reference node (vSyncRef=3) and the measurement phase for initial rate correction term is started. The next occurrence of node A&#39;s sync frame stops the rate measurement phase. Nodes B and C directly determine and apply the rate correction term to their local clock rate (i.e. to their local macrotick generation unit). In addition, the actual schedule position is determined based on the reference frame ID, and the micro- and macrotick timers are synchronized using the falling edge of the leading BSS of the received sync frame. 
     Nodes B and C follow the current schedule until cycle end and then transition into the CC_IntegrationVCW state. Still these nodes behave passively, i.e., they do not participate the communication schedule with their own frames. After one complete rate measurement period (2 cycles) and the corresponding offset measurement and correction phase (during the second cycle), the sync node B is allowed to enter normal operation. The validation checks evaluated in the CC_IntegrationVCW state are passed because on the reception of the reference sync frame vValidSyncCount[ch] is incremented, while vInvalidSyncCount[ch] remains unchanged. Consequently, with the start of next cycle, node B enters CC_NormalOperation and starts to transmit messages according to its configuration. On reception of the sync frame pair sent by another node (node B), which is synchronized to its own, the node that initially sent the CAS (node A) then enters CC_NormalOperation at the start of next communication cycle (after a whole rate measurement period has been concluded). In CC_NormalOperation all configured frames are scheduled for transmission. As soon as the node that initially sent the CAS and one other node have entered the CC_NormalOperation state, the startup phase is concluded. 
     Node C enters CC_NormalOperation in the same cycle as node A, as soon as it performs the regular rate measurement phase based on 2 (or more) pairs of corresponding sync frames. 
     Startup with Initial Collision 
       FIG. 65  shows a Startup with a collision on the CAS symbol. The scenario illustrated in  FIG. 65  depicts three nodes with all of them configured to initiate the startup actively (sync nodes). A collision during startup results when two sync nodes leave the CC_SoftReset state at the same, or nearly the same time. In this case, two nodes (nodes A and B) enter CC_ColdStartICW simultaneously and send their initial CAS at the same, or nearly the same time. Both nodes are then prepared to send their first sync frame. The node with the sync frame having the lower identifier sends its frame first (node B; fFrameID=1). On reception of this sync frame, the other node (node A), which currently resides in the CC_ColdStartICW state, returns to CC_StartupListen and awaits the next S_ValidEvenStartupFrame. The figure depicts the case where a node A integrates in the sixth cycle after the cycle in which the collision occurred. 
     Startup with Nodes Failed Due to the Validation Check 
       FIG. 66  shows a Startup with Validation Check in CC_IntegrationVCW Failed. The scenario illustrated in  FIG. 66  depicts nodes B and C starting integration to the reference node (node A). While nodes B and C are in the CC_IntegrationVCW state the reception of the sync frame transmitted by the reference node fails at both nodes. Thus, the validation check at both nodes fails, too. At the end of this cycle both nodes have to re-enter the CC_StartupListen state. Since vRefSync is different from 0 (vRefSync=3), the first sync frame from the former reference node (node A) is ignored. Because no other sync frame occurs during gdCycleWithHistory, vRefSync is cleared at the end of this cycle. With the next occurrence of the sync frame sent by node A (vRefSync is set to 3 again), node B and C start another integration attempt. Via the integration path, both nodes finally synchronize on timing of node A. Meanwhile, Node A remains in the CC_ColdStartVCW state for the entire period because it does not detect a valid response. 
     Requirements for Hardware States 
     Introduction 
     This chapter describes the HW states whose support is required by the CC, BG, electrical and optical BD, and the active star. Additionally, some desirable optional transitions are described. The state names are prefixed with a two/three-letter acronym corresponding to the hardware component to which the state pertains (i.e., CC, BG, BDe or BDo). State transition names contain one of two prefixes as follows:
         State transitions with prefix ‘V’ corresponding to certain voltage levels   State transitions with prefix ‘L’ indicate states transitions corresponding to logical conditions       

     The remainder of this chapter consists of sections corresponding to each of the FlexRay hardware components. Each of these sections consists of two subsections; a descriptive overview of the component&#39;s states followed by a more formal behavioral description in the form of a state diagram accompanied by a table detailing the transitions in the diagram. 
     Voltage Levels 
     In general three different voltage levels and corresponding HW states have to be distinguished:
     PowerOff—The supply voltage is not available or is below a pre-defined level. Consequently, some integrated circuits are not able to keep their pins in a defined state, e.g. tri-state. The semiconductor manufacturer has to guarantee that during power up/power down no disturbances occur or has to specify the affected pins and their behavior.   PowerOn—The supply voltage level is high enough to guarantee a defined state of the pins, where no disturbances occur.   Operating/Normal—The supply voltage level allows full operation (note: Operating/Normal is a substate of PowerOn).
 
HW States of the CC
 
Overview
   

     The following overview describes the CC behavior in various states. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in the table following the subsequent state diagram. 
     Support for monitoring of the voltage levels (brown-out detection) is only required for stand-alone controllers. This allows monitoring to be done by external monitoring hardware. 
     CC_PowerOff State 
     
         
         
           
             The voltage is below a pre-defined threshold for proper operation 
             Halt of all CC internal clocks 
             The CC must not drive any pins
 
CC_PowerOn State
 
           
         
       
    
     The voltage level is above a threshold to guarantee a defined state of the pins 
     CC_HWReset State 
     All controller clocks halt immediately 
     The CC must not drive any pins 
     CC Operating State 
     The CC supports regular communication function 
     CC_Awake State 
     CC_SoftReset State 
     Immediately halt all CC internal clocks except those that are needed for operating the host interface. 
     CC_Normal State 
     Regular communication shall be supported 
     CC_ShutdownComplete State 
     When this state is present communication is inactive 
     CC_Standby State 
     The power consumption of the electrical CC is significantly reduced compared to CC_Normal All CC clocks off except those that are needed for wakeup detection Configuration data will remain unchanged 
     Communication Controller (CC) State Diagram 
       FIG. 67  shows a Communication Controller (CC) state transition diagram. Table 16 is a CC state transition table. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 16 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 CC state transition table. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 State 
                 Transition Direction 
                   
                 Action taken on 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Transition 
                 From State 
                 To State 
                 Conditions for Transition 
                 Transition 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 V1 
                 CC_PowerOff 
                 CC_PowerOn 
                   
                 CC supply voltage 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 rises above CC_U1 
               
               
                 V2 
                 CC_PowerOn 
                 CC_PowerOff 
                   
                 CC supply voltage 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 drops below CC_U2 
               
               
                 L1 
                 CC_HWReset 
                 CC_Operating 
                   
                 CC external reset 
                 After hard reset 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 signal is inactive 
                 (power-up reset or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (AND) 
                 Supply voltage is 
                 via dedicated reset 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 opt. 
                 greater than CC_U3 
                 pin) all initialization 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 for at least CC_t v3   
                 data are cleared 
               
               
                 L2 
                 CC_Operating 
                 CC_HWReset 
                   
                 External reset 
                 Disable ability to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 signal is active 
                 drive pins, all clocks 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (OR) 
                 Supply voltage 
                 halt immediately 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 opt. 
                 drops below CC_U4 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 for at least CC_t v4   
               
               
                 L3 
                 CC_Operation 
                 CC_SoftReset 
                   
                 A CC_Reset is 
                 Immediately halt all 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 requested by the 
                 CC internal clocks 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 host 
                 except those that 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 are needed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 operating the host 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 interface. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 All configuration 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 data shall be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 retained. 
               
               
                 L4 
                   
                 CC_SoftReset 
                   
                 Initialization is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 finished 
               
               
                 L5 
                 CC_SoftReset 
                 CC_Normal 
                   
                 CC_SoftReset is 
                 The interrupt status 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 deactivated by the 
                 shall be cleared 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 host 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (AND) 
                 CC optional soft 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 opt. 
                 checks are passed 
               
               
                 L6 
                 CC_SoftReset 
                 CC_Standby 
                   
                 CC_SoftReset is 
               
               
                 Optional 
                   
                   
                   
                 deactivated 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 Optional soft checks 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 did fail 
               
               
                 L7 
                 CC_Normal 
                 CC_ShutdownComplete 
                   
                 Current 
                 Communication is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 communication 
                 inactive 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 round is finished 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 Host requests a 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 shutdown (e.g. by 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 setting the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Shutdown Request 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 bit) 
               
               
                 L8 
                 CC_Awake 
                 CC_Standby 
                   
                 Host issues a CC 
                 The ongoing frame 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Sleep Command 
                 transmission or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (OR) 
                 Severe failure 
                 reception will be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 opt. 
                 condition being 
                 finished and the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 detected by the 
                 configuration data 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 error management 
                 shall be retained 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 of the CC (failure 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 conditions are 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 specified in Chapter 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 “Error Signaling and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Error Handling”) 
               
               
                 L9 
                 CC_Standby 
                 CC_Awake 
                   
                 Host issues a CC 
                 CC shall signal a 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Wakeup Command 
                 wakeup interrupt to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OR 
                 The CC detects 
                 the host 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 activity on any of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 the RX pins 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The constants CC_U 1 , CC_U 2 , CC_U 3 , CC_U 4 , CC_t v3  and CC_t v4  are product specific and have to be defined in the CC product specification. 
     Note: CC_U 1 &lt;CC_U 3 , CC_U 2 &lt;CC_U 4   
     HW States of the Electrical Bus Driver (BD) 
     Overview 
     The following overview describes the electrical BD behavior in various states. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in the table following the subsequent state diagram. 
     Support for monitoring of the junction temperature is optional. 
     BDe_PowerOff State 
     
         
         
           
             The voltage is below a pre-defined threshold for proper operation 
             The BD must not drive any pins (e.g., no reverse current).
 
BDe_PowerOn State
 
             The voltage level is above a threshold to guarantee a defined state of the pins
 
BDe_Operating State
 
           
         
       
    
     The BD supports regular communication function 
     BDe_Normal State 
     Regular communication shall be supported 
     BDe_Standby State 
     The power consumption of the electrical BD is significantly reduced compared to BDe_Normal 
     The BD is not capable of transmitting regular messages 
     The BD&#39;s wakeup monitoring function is active. 
     BDe_Sleep State 
     The BD does not support regular communication 
     The BD enters low power consumption mode, e.g. all clocks stopped and only low power wakeup receiver active. The power consumption is significantly reduced compared to BDe_Normal 
     The BD&#39;s wakeup monitoring function is active 
     BDe_BusOff State 
     
         
         
           
             The BD&#39;s channel output is in high impedance state, e.g. it doesn&#39;t drive the idle level on the bus (is floating instead)
 
BDe_BusNormal State
 
             The BD outputs regular bus levels for communication
 
BD State Diagram (Electrical BD)
 
           
         
       
    
       FIG. 68  shows a bus driver (BD) state transition diagram for an electrical BD. Table 17 is a BD state transition table for an electrical BD. For the optical bus guardian states refer to  FIG. 69 . 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 17 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 BD state transition table (electrical BD). 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 State 
                 Transition Direction 
                   
                 Action taken on 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Transition 
                 From State 
                 To State 
                 Conditions for Transition 
                 Transition 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 V1 
                 BDe_PowerOff 
                 BDe_PowerOn 
                   
                 BD Supply voltage 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 rises above BDe_U1 
               
               
                 V2 
                 BDe_PowerOn 
                 BDe_PowerOff 
                   
                 BD Supply voltage 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 drops below BDe_U2 
               
               
                 V3 
                 BDe_BusOff 
                 BDe_BusNormal 
                   
                 BD Supply voltage 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 rises above BDe_U5 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 for at least BDe_t v5   
               
               
                 V4 
                 BDe_BusNormal 
                 BDe_BusOff 
                   
                 BD Supply voltage 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 drops below BDe_U6 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 for at least BDe_t v6   
               
               
                 L1 
                 BDe_Normal 
                 BDe_Standby 
                   
                 Host commands 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 change to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 BDe_Standby State 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (e.g. via SPI 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 command) 
               
               
                 L2 
                 BDe_Standby 
                 BDe_Normal 
                   
                 Host commands 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 change to BDe_Normal 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 State (e.g. via SPI 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 command) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OR 
                 BD has detected a 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 valid Wakeup event 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (local or via bus) 
               
               
                 L3 
                 BDe_Operating 
                 BDe_Sleep 
                   
                 Host commands 
                 The transmitter 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 change to BDe_Sleep 
                 will be disabled, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 State (e.g. via SPI 
                 signaling to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 command) 
                 host 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OR 
                 No databus activity 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 detected for more than 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 BDe_t 1   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OR 
                 BD Supply voltage 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 drops below BDe_U4 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 for at least BDe_t V4   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (OR) 
                 BD junction 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 opt. 
                 temperature raises 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 above BDe_K T1  ° C. 
               
               
                 L4 
                 BDe_Sleep 
                 BDe_Operating 
                   
                 BD has detected a 
                 The transmitter 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 valid Wakeup event 
                 will be released, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (local or via bus) 
                 signaling to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 BD Supply voltage is 
                 host 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 above BDe_U3 for at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 least BDe_t V3   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (AND) 
                 BD junction 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 opt. 
                 temperature is below 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 BDe_K T1  ° C. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The constants BDe_U 1 , BDe_U 2 , BDe_U 3 , BDe_U 4 , BDe_U 5 , BDe_U 6 , BDe_t 1 , BDe_t v3 , BDe_t v4 , BDe_t v5 , BDe_t v6  and BDe_K T1  are product specific and have to be defined in the BD product specification. 
     Note: BDe_U 1 &lt;BDe_U 3 , BDe_U 2 &lt;BD 2 _U 4   
     HW States of the Optical BD 
     Overview 
     The following overview describes the optical BD behavior in various states. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in the table following the subsequent state diagram. 
     BDo_PowerOff State 
     The voltage is below a certain threshold for proper operation 
     The CC must not drive any pins 
     BDo_Normal State 
     The BD supports regular communication 
     BDo_Sleep State 
     The BD does not support regular communication 
     The BD is in low power consumption mode, e.g. all clocks stopped and only low power wakeup receiver active 
     The BD&#39;s wakeup monitoring function is active 
     BD State Diagram (Optical BD) 
       FIG. 69  shows a bus driver (BD) transition diagram for an optical BD. Table 18 is a BD state transition diagram for an optical BD. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 18 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 BD State Transition Table (optical BD). 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Action 
               
               
                 State 
                 Transition Direction 
                   
                 taken on 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Transition 
                 From State 
                 To State 
                 Conditions for Transition 
                 Transition 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 V1 
                 BDo_PowerOff 
                 BDo_PowerOn 
                   
                 BD Supply voltage raises 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 above BDo_U1 
               
               
                 V2 
                 BDo_PowerOn 
                 BDo_PowerOff 
                   
                 BD Supply voltage drops 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 below BDo_U2 
               
               
                 L1 
                 BDo_Normal 
                 BDo_Sleep 
                   
                 Host commands change to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 BDo_Sleep State 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OR 
                 No databus activity 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 detected for more than 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 BDo_t 1   
               
               
                 L2 
                 BDo_Sleep 
                 BDo_Normal 
                   
                 Host commands change to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Bdo_Normal State 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OR 
                 BD has detected a valid 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Wakeup event (local or via 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 bus) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The constants BDo_U 1 , BDo_U 2  and BDo_t 1  are product specific and have to be defined in the BD product specification. 
     HW States of the BG 
     Overview 
     The following overview describes the BG behavior in various states. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in the table following the subsequent state diagram. 
     Support for monitoring of the voltage levels (brown-out detection) is only required for stand-alone controllers, whereas the monitoring can also be done by an external monitoring hardware. 
     BG_PowerOff State 
     
         
         
           
             The voltage is below a certain threshold for proper operation 
             Halt of all BG internal clocks 
             The BG must not drive any pins
 
BG_PowerOn State
 
             The voltage level is above a threshold to guarantee a defined state of the pins
 
BG_HWReset State
 
           
         
       
    
     All clocks halt immediately 
     The BG must not drive any pins 
     BG_Operating State 
     The BG supports regular function 
     BG_Awake State 
     BG_SoftReset State 
     Enabling of the BD transmitter for an ongoing frame transmission will be hold, afterwards immediately halt of BG internal clocks except those that are needed for operating the host interface and disabling of the BD. 
     BG_Normal State 
     Regular function is supported 
     BG Standby State 
     The power consumption of the BG is significantly reduced compared to BG_Normal All BG clocks off except those that are needed for operating the host interface Configuration data will be held 
     An explicit shutdown support for the BG is not required. 
     BG State Diagram 
       FIG. 70  shows a Bus Guardian (BG) state transition diagram. Table 19 is a BG state transition table. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 19 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 BG State Transition Table. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 State 
                 Transition Direction 
                   
                 Action taken on 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Transition 
                 From State 
                 To State 
                 Conditions for Transition 
                 Transition 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 V1 
                 BG_PowerOff 
                 BG_PowerOn 
                   
                 BG Supply voltage 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 raises above BG_U1 
               
               
                 V2 
                 BG_PowerOn 
                 BG_PowerOff 
                   
                 BG Supply voltage 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 drops below BG_U2 
               
               
                 L1 
                 BG_HWReset 
                 BG_Operating 
                   
                 CC external reset 
                 After hard reset 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 signal is inactive 
                 (power-up reset or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (AND) 
                 Supply voltage is 
                 via dedicated reset 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 opt. 
                 greater than BG_U3 
                 pin) all initialization 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 for at least BG_t V3   
                 data are cleared 
               
               
                 L2 
                 BG_Operating 
                 BG_HWReset 
                   
                 External reset 
                 disable ability to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 signal is active 
                 drive pins, all clocks 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (OR) 
                 Supply voltage 
                 halt immediately 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 opt. 
                 drops below BG_U4 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 for at least BG_t V4   
               
               
                 L3 
                 BG_Operating 
                 BG_SoftReset 
                   
                 A BG_Reset is 
                 The ongoing 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 requested by the 
                 guarding action will 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 host 
                 be finished and the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 configuration data 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 shall be retained 
               
               
                 L4 
                   
                 BG_SoftReset 
                   
                 Initialization is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 finished 
               
               
                 L5 
                 BG_SoftReset 
                 BG_Normal 
                   
                 BG_Reset is 
                 The interrupt status 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 deactivated by the 
                 shall be cleared 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 host 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (AND) 
                 BG optional soft 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 opt. 
                 checks are passed 
               
               
                 L6 
                 BG_SoftReset 
                 BG_Standby 
                   
                 Soft reset is 
               
               
                 Opt. 
                   
                   
                   
                 deactivated 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 BG optional soft 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 checks did fail 
               
               
                 L7 
                 BG_Awake 
                 BG_Standby 
                   
                 Host issues Sleep 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Command 
               
               
                 L8 
                 BG_Standby 
                 BG_Awake 
                   
                 Host issues Wakeup 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Command 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The constants BG_U 1 , BG_U 2 , BG_U 3 , BG_U 4 , BG_t v3  and BG_t v4  are product specific and have to be defined in the BG product specification. 
     Note: BG_U 1 &lt;BG_U 3 , BG_U 2 &lt;BG_U 4   
     HW States of the Active Star 
     Overview 
     The following overview describes the Active Star behavior in various states. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in the table following the subsequent state diagram. 
     ST_PowerOff State 
     
         
         
           
             The voltage is below a certain threshold for proper operation The active star must not drive any pins
 
ST_PowerOn State
 
ST Normal State
 
           
         
       
    
     The voltage regulator is active 
     ST Sleep State 
     The voltage regulator is off 
     Active Star State Diagram 
       FIG. 71  shows an Active Star state transition diagram. Table 20 is an Active Star state transition table. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 20 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Active Star State Transition Table. 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Action 
               
               
                 State 
                 Transition Direction 
                 Conditions 
                 taken on 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Transition 
                 From State 
                 To State 
                 for Transition 
                 Transition 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 V1 
                 ST_PowerOff 
                 ST_PowerOn 
                 ST Supply 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 voltage raises 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 above ST_U1 
               
               
                 V2 
                 ST_PowerOn 
                 ST_PowerOff 
                 ST Supply 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 voltage drops 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 below ST_U2 
               
               
                 L1 
                 ST_Normal 
                 ST_Sleep 
                 ST did not 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 detect and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 message- 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 like patterns 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 for more 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 than ST_t S1   
               
               
                 L2 
                 ST_Sleep 
                 ST_Normal 
                 ST has 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 detected a 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 valid 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 wake-up 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 symbol/pattern 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The constants ST_U 1 , ST_U 2  and ST_t s1  are product specific and have to be defined in the star product specification. 
     Error Signaling and Error Handling 
     Error Signaling 
     This chapter describes the error signaling mechanisms of FlexRay protocol. These mechanisms are intended to enable the host application or any other higher level software to learn about the presence of unexpected protocol conditions. In some cases, the host may want to take particular action when being notified of certain types of errors. This protocol specification, however, makes no requirement for the host application to react to any of the error conditions described in this chapter. 
     Error signaling refers to the presentation of filtered and/or unfiltered protocol error condition information from the Communication Controller to the host. 
     Frame Reception and Validation 
     Several error signaling mechanisms described in this chapter make use of the status of the reception process of various frames by the frame processing portion of the protocol engine. Refer to the above description for the details of these mechanisms and the signals they provide to the Error Signaling/Error Handling mechanisms. 
     Symbol Reception and Validation 
     Several error signaling mechanisms described in this chapter make rely on the detection of various protocol symbols by the symbol processing portion of the protocol engine. Refer to the above description for the details of these mechanisms and the signals they provide to the Error Signaling/Error Handling mechanisms. 
     Error Signals and Error Counters 
     This section describes the error signals and error counters of the FlexRay Protocol. Error signals are used to indicate a detected fault to the host. Error counters are used to count faults, and information related to the number of faults is passed on to the host. In all cases the error counters are not allowed to be incremented past their maximum value, i.e., the counters shall not “wrap around” back to zero, but rather shall remain at their maximum value. 
     Table 21 and Table 22 list the error signals and error counters of the FlexRay protocol. The following sections provide detailed descriptions of the various signals and counters. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 21 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Error Signals and Error Counters for FlexRay Operating Mode 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                 Abbreviation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Frame and Channel Status/Error Signals 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Channel Status and Error Information 
                 CSEI 
               
               
                   
                 Frame Status and Error Information 
                 FSEI 
               
               
                   
                 General Error Signals 
               
               
                   
                 Coldstart Count Maximum Signal 
                 CCMS 
               
               
                   
                 Missing Rate Correction Signal 
                 MRCS 
               
               
                   
                 Missing Offset Correction Signal 
                 MOCS 
               
               
                   
                 Clock Correction Limit Reached 
                 CCLR 
               
               
                   
                 Reference Frame too Early 
                 RFEE 
               
               
                   
                 Reference Frame Lost 
                 RFLE 
               
               
                   
                 Bus Guardian Schedule Monitor Error 
                 BGME 
               
               
                   
                 Error Counters 
               
               
                   
                 Clock Correction Failed Counter 
                 CCFC 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
                     TABLE 22                  Error Signals for byteflight Operating Mode                             Error Signals   Abbreviation                       SOC too Early   SOCE           SOC Lost   SOCL           Illegal Pulse   ILLPIF                        
Frame Status and Error Information (FSEI)
 
     A FlexRay Communications Controller shall provide a classification of the slot status per channel for each slot that is booked to receive a frame. A slot is booked to receive a frame if a filter (concerning frame ID, cycle counter and channel—see the following description) for this slot is set. 
     Table 23 lists the possible status and error information for a booked slot. The determination of these statuses is based on the presence or absence of certain frame reception status signals as defined in the sections above. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 23 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Error Signals Related to FSEI 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Set 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 condition: Frame processing 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Frame Status and 
                 produces any of the following 
                 Static 
                 Dynamic 
               
               
                 Error Information 
                 signals 
                 Segment 
                 Segment 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Byte Coding 
                 S_HeaderCodingError 
                 Applies 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Error/CRC Error 
                 S_InvalidHeaderCRCError 
               
               
                   
                 S_FrameCodingError 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidFrameCRCError 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidDTSError 
               
               
                   
                 S_ChannelIdleCodingError 
               
               
                 Slot Mismatch 
                 S_FrameIDError 
                 Applies 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Cycle Counter 
                 S_CycleCountError 
                 Applies 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Mismatch 
               
               
                 Length Mismatch 
                 S_InvalidFrameLengthError 
                 Applies 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 S_PayloadLengthStaticError 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidFrameLengthError 
                 — 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Null Frame 
                 S_ValidStaticFrame and the 
                 Applies 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 fNullFrameIndicationBit 
               
               
                   
                 is set in the frame. 
               
               
                 Empty Slot 
                 At the end of a booked 
                 Applies 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 slot no error signal 
               
               
                   
                 (i.e., S_HeaderCodingError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidHeaderCRCError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_FrameCodingError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidFrameCRCError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidDTSError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_ChannelIdleCodingError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_FrameIDError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_CycleCountError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidFrameLengthError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_PayloadLengthStaticError) 
               
               
                   
                 and no valid frame signal 
               
               
                   
                 (i.e., S_CorrectFrame or 
               
               
                   
                 S_ValidStaticFrame) 
               
               
                   
                 was signaled from frame 
               
               
                   
                 processing and frame 
               
               
                   
                 processing is currently in 
               
               
                   
                 the FR_Idle state 
               
               
                 Transmission 
                 S_TransmissionConflictError 
                 Applies 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Conflict 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Transmission Conflict is Only detected if the node tries to send a frame while it receives. The error signal belongs to the slot ID of the sent frame. If a receive buffer is configured to use the “pick first valid” style of channel filtering (see below), the following additional information on the status of the channel that was not selected for payload storage shall be summarized in the FSEI: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 24 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Additional FSEI Error Signals for “Pick First Valid” Channel Filtering 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Frame Status 
                 Set condition: Frame processing 
                   
                   
               
               
                 and Error 
                 produces any of the following 
                 Static 
                 Dynamic 
               
               
                 Information 
                 signals 
                 Segment 
                 Segment 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Receive Error 
                 S_HeaderCodingError 
                 Applies 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 on Second 
                 S_InvalidHeaderCRCError 
               
               
                 Channel 
                 S_FrameCodingError 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidFrameCRCError 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidDTSError 
               
               
                   
                 S_ChannelIdleCodingError 
               
               
                   
                 S_FrameIDError 
               
               
                   
                 S_CycleCountError 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidFrameLengthError 
               
               
                   
                 S_PayloadLengthStaticError 
               
               
                 Empty Slot 
                 At the end of a booked 
                 Applies 
                 — 
               
               
                 on Second 
                 slot no error signal 
               
               
                 Channel 
                 (i.e., S_TSSError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_HeaderCodingError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidHeaderCRCError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_FrameCodingError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidFrameCRCError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidDTSError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_ChannelIdleCodingError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_FrameIDError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_CycleCountError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidFrameLengthError, 
               
               
                   
                 S_PayloadLengthStaticError) 
               
               
                   
                 and no valid frame signal 
               
               
                   
                 (i.e., S_CorrectFrame or 
               
               
                   
                 S_ValidStaticFrame) 
               
               
                   
                 was signaled from frame 
               
               
                   
                 processing and frame 
               
               
                   
                 processing is currently in 
               
               
                   
                 the FR_Idle state 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     S_InvalidDTSError applies only during frame reception in the dynamic segment. Each slot booked to receive a frame has a corresponding FSEI. The FSEI shall be reset to zero when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see the previous chapter). The FSEI&#39;s shall begin to be updated once a CC successfully passed the protocol startup phase (see above). 
     The FSEI is always updated once the receive frame processing is finished (see above). The received data content shall only be provided to the data storage corresponding to the booked slot if none of the above listed error information was set (if channel filter “pick first valid” is configured, at least one channel&#39;s FSEI lists no error information). In all other cases, only the current FSEI shall be provided to the data storage. 
     It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define a subset of the FSEI components [Byte Coding/CRC Error, Slot Mismatch, Cycle Counter Mismatch, Length Mismatch, Null Frame, Empty Slot, Transmission Conflict, Receive Error on Second Channel, Empty Slot on Second Channel] to be the trigger condition for an interrupt to the host. This subset applies to all booked slots. 
     Channel Status and Error Information (CSEI) 
     A FlexRay Communications Controller shall provide an accumulated classification of the slot status of all frames received on a given channel. This implies that a FlexRay CC that supports communication on two channels shall provide two such sets of information. The Channel Status and Error Information (CSEI) summarizes the status of all frames received on the communication channel, including those frames which are not booked and therefore have no corresponding data or status storage in the CHI. Table 25 lists the contents of the CSEI and describes the mapping of the frame and symbol processing status symbols described above. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 25 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Error Signals Related to CSEI 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                 Symbol 
                 Static 
                 Dynamic 
               
               
                 Error 
                 Condition 
                 Window 
                 Segment 
                 Segment 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Byte Coding 
                 S_HeaderCodingError 
                 — 
                 Applies 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Error/CRC Error 
                 S_InvalidHeaderCRCError 
               
               
                   
                 S_FrameCodingError 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidFrameCRCError 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidDTSError 
               
               
                   
                 S_ChannelIdleCodingError 
               
               
                 Slot Mismatch 
                 S_FrameIDError 
                 — 
                 Applies 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Cycle Counter 
                 S_CycleCountError 
                 — 
                 Applies 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Mismatch 
               
               
                 Length Mismatch 
                 S_InvalidFrameLengthError 
                 — 
                 Applies 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 S_PayloadLengthStaticError 
               
               
                   
                 S_InvalidFrameLengthError 
                 — 
                 — 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Unaccepted 
                 Unexpected symbol reception (in 
                 Applies 
                 Applies 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Symbol 
                 symbol window or even outside) 
               
               
                   
                 Together with 
               
               
                   
                 S_TSSError 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     S_InvalidDTSError applies only during frame reception in the dynamic segment. The CSEI is readable by the host via the Controller Host Interface (CHI). All components of the CSEI shall be reset (for example, all components set to zero) when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see above). The components of the CSEI shall begin to be updated once a CC successfully passes the protocol startup phase (see above). 
     The components of the CSEI are updated upon the completion of the frame processing of each communication slot (see Chapter ‘Frame Processing’). The components of the CSEI shall also be updated at the completion of symbol processing (see Chapter ‘Symbol Processing’). 
     If a CSEI component is already set due to an earlier update, the component shall remain set. This allows the CSEI to report the aggregate status of all frames on the communication channel. All components of the CSEI shall be reset by a host read operation. 
     It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define a subset of the CSEI components [Byte Coding Error/CRC Error, Slot Mismatch, Cycle Counter Mismatch, Length Mismatch, Unaccepted Symbol] to be the trigger condition for an interrupt to the host. This subset applies to all channels. 
     Coldstart Count Maximum Signal (CCMS) 
     The Coldstart Count Maximum Signal (CCMS) shall be set to indicate that the CC has reached the maximum number of allowed coldstart retries (see specification of coldstart in Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). The CCMS follows the value of vCCMS. CCMS shall be reset to zero when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’). The CCMS is set to one only during protocol startup phase if vCCMS was set (see Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). Once set to one, the CCMS remains set until the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine next time. 
     Clock Related Error Signals and Counters 
     Startup Majority Missed Signal (SMMS) 
     The Startup Majority Missed Signal (SMMS) shall be set to indicate that the CC has received a set of sync frames during startup that did not result in a majority of the sync frames agreeing with the local view of the system time (see Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). The SMMS follows the value of vSMMS. The SMMS shall be reset to zero when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’). The SMMS is set to one if vSMMS was set in protocol startup phase. 
     Once set to one, the SSMS remains set until the host clears this signal. 
     Missing Rate Correction Signal (MRCS) 
     The Missing Rate Correction Signal (MRCS) indicates the inability to calculate a clock synchronization rate correction value due to the lack of any matching pairs of sync frames in the even and odd communication cycles. The MRCS follows the value of vMRCS. MRCS shall be set if vMRCS was set by the clock synchronization mechanism (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). In the dynamic media access mode the set condition is given if the node has not received an even and an odd reference frame. Since the reference frame provides all timing information in a system operating in the dynamic media access mode, the node providing the reference frame in such a system will never indicate an MRCS error. 
     The signal shall remain set to one until the clock synchronization algorithm is able to compute a valid rate correction term and therefore resets vMRCS. 
     The MRCS shall be set to zero when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’). 
     During protocol startup phase MRCS shall be set to one if the signal vMRCS was set by startup (see Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). For non-sync nodes and for a sync node in listen-only mode this signal indicates that a second pair of matching sync frames is missing. The MRCS remains set to one until the host clears this signal or the protocol startup phase was passed successfully. 
     It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define that MRCS is a trigger of an interrupt to the host. 
     Missing Offset Correction Signal (MOCS) 
     The Missing Offset Correction Signal (MOCS) indicates the inability to calculate an offset correction value due to a lack of sync frames in an odd communication cycle by the clock synchronization mechanism (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). The MOCS follows the value of vMOCS. MOCS shall be set if vMOCS was set by the clock synchronization mechanism (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). In the dynamic media access mode this occurs if the node does not receive a reference frame in an odd cycle. The node providing the reference frame will never indicate an MOCS error. 
     The signal remains set to one until the clock synchronization algorithm can compute a valid offset correction term and therefore resets vMOCS. 
     The MOCS shall be set to zero when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’). 
     During protocol startup phase, the MOCS shall remain at its initial value. No update of this signal is possible until the node successfully exits protocol startup phase. 
     It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define that MOCS is a trigger of an interrupt to the host. 
     Clock Correction Limit Reached (CCLR) 
     The Clock Correction Limit Reached (CCLR) indicates an inability to apply a clock synchronization rate or offset correction because the computed correction has exceeded the limiting values. The CCLR follows the value of vCCLR. The CCLR shall be set to one if the limit checks on the rate and offset correction values indicate either or both of these parameters are in the red region and vCCLR was set (see Section 0). The CCLR signal shall remain set to one until the node is able to compute rate and offset correction terms that are both in the green area and therefore the clock synchronization mechanism resets vCCLR to zero. The CCLR error signal shall also be set to zero when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’). 
     Note that the red/green region determinations are performed after taking into account any external clock corrections provided by the host (see Section ‘External Clock Synchronization (Optional)’). Because of this, the vCCLR is based on the aggregate of the internal and external clock correction terms (if any). As a result, a system that would not normally experience CCLR due to internal clock synchronization (for example, the reference node in a system operating in the dynamic media access node) may still experience such errors as a result of external rate correction. 
     During protocol startup phase, the CCLR will be set to one if the vCCLR is set during protocol startup phase (see Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). CCLR signal remains set to one until the CC can compute valid rate and offset correction values and the protocol startup phase was passed successfully and therefore vCCLR was reset to zero (see Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). CCLR can be reset to zero by the host before the end of protocol startup phase was reached. 
     It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define that CCLR is a trigger of an interrupt to the host. 
     Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC) 
     The Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC, range [0 . . . 15]) allows the host to monitor the duration of the inability of a node to compute clock correction terms after the CC passed protocol startup phase. t shall be incremented by one at the end of any odd communication cycle where either MOCS or MRCS is set. The CCFC shall be reset to zero at the end of an odd communication cycle if neither the MOCS nor the MRCS are active. The CCFC stops incrementing at 15 (i.e., incrementing the counter at its maximum value shall not cause it to “wraparound” back to zero). The CCFC shall be reset to zero when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’). 
     Summary 
     The following tables summarize the conditions and applicability of the various clock-related error signals and counters 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 26 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Clock Synchronization Error Signals and Counters During 
               
               
                 CC_Normal Operation and 
               
               
                 CC_Passive Operation 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                   
                 After an 
               
               
                   
                 Triggered 
                 Every 
                 Even/Odd 
               
               
                 Error 
                 by/Increment 
                 Communication 
                 Communication 
               
               
                 signal/counter 
                 condition 
                 Cycle 
                 Cycle 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Clock Correction 
                 MRCS or/and 
                 — 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Failed Counter 
                 MOCS 
               
               
                 (CCFC) 
               
               
                 Missing Rate 
                 vMRCS set by 
                 — 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Correction Signal 
                 clock 
               
               
                 (MRCS) 
                 synchronization 
               
               
                 Missing Offset 
                 vMOCS set by 
                 — 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Correction Signal 
                 clock 
               
               
                 (MOCS) 
                 synchronization 
               
               
                 Clock Correction 
                 vCCLR set by 
                 — 
                 Applies 
               
               
                 Limit Reached 
                 clock 
               
               
                 (CCLR) 
                 synchronization 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
                     TABLE 27                  Clock Synchronization Error Signals and Counters       During Protocol startup phase                                         After an           Triggered   Every   Even/Odd       Error   by/Increment   Communication   Communication       signal/counter   condition   Cycle   Cycle               Clock Correction   not updated   —   —       Failed Counter   during protocol       (CCFC)   startup phase       Missing Rate   vMRCS set by   —   Applies       Correction Signal   startup       (MRCS)       Missing Offset   not updated   —   —       Correction Signal   during protocol       (MOCS)   startup phase       Clock Correction   vCCLR set by   Applies   Applies       Limit Reached   startup       (CCLR)       Startup Majority   vSMMS set by   —   Applies       Missed Signal   startup       (SMMS)                    
Bus Guardian Schedule Monitor Error (BGME)
 
     The Bus Guardian Schedule Monitor Error (BGME) is used to signal that the CC has detected that the static segment transmission pattern enforced by the bus guardian does not match the static segment transmission pattern configured into the communication controller. The BGME follows the value of the vBgsmError parameter defined in the description of the BG Schedule Monitoring (see Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’). 
     The BGME shall be set to zero when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’). The BGME shall be set to one whenever vBgsmError=TRUE (see specification in Chapter ‘Bus Guardian Interface’). (For the behavior during protocol startup phase, please refer to Chapter ‘Bus Guardian Interface’ as well). 
     BGME shall be set to zero as soon as the host acknowledges the BG schedule mismatch by an active acknowledgement via the signal vBgsmErrorAck (see Chapter ‘Bus Guardian Interface’). 
     Certain systems do not make use of the BG Schedule monitoring service. There is no requirement for the CC to provide a mechanism to allow this service to be disabled—non-applicable results must be ignored by the host. 
     It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define that BGME is a trigger of an interrupt to the host. 
                     TABLE 28                  Error Signals Related to BG Schedule Monitoring                             Error       Static   Dynamic       signal/counter   Triggered by   Segment   Segment               Bus Guardian Schedule   VBgsmError = TRUE   Applies   Applies       Monitor Error (BGME)                    
Error Signals Related to SOC/ILLPIF (byteflight Mode)
 
     The following error signals may be used to allow the host to monitor the status of the periodic SOC symbol and to detect the occurrence of illegal pulses instead of SOC symbols for systems operating in the byteflight media access mode. 
     In byteflight mode the byteflight master CC controls the communication schedule by its SOC symbol and therefore the following error signals are not applicable to a node operating as the byteflight master. 
     SOC Early 
     This error signal shall be set if the end of a correct SOC (symbol passed the check set ‘ValidSOC’) occurs before gdCycleMin. This error signal is reset by a host read operation. 
     SOC Lost 
     This error signal shall be set if the end of a valid SOC does not occur before gdCycleMax (no symbol passed the check set “ValidSOC” before gdCycleMax). This error signal is reset by a host read operation. 
     Illegal Pulse Error (ILLPIF) 
     This error signal shall be set if either of the following conditions are met gdCycleMin has not expired since the last valid SOC symbol (symbol passed check set “ValidSOC”) and a sequence of logic “0” with a duration of between 21*gdBit and 29* gdBit or a duration of more than 31*gdBit has been received, OR gdCycleMin has expired since the last correct (valid) SOC symbol (symbol passed check set “ValidSOC”) and some bus activity was recognized other than a valid SOC symbol. 
     This error signal is reset by a host read operation. 
                     TABLE 29                  Error Signals related to SOC/ILLPIF in byteflight mode                                         Byteflight   Static   Dynamic       Error signal   Triggered by   mode   Segment   Segment               SOC Early   ValidSOC before   Applies   —   —           gdCycleMin       SOC Lost   GdCycleMax without   Applies   —   —           ValidSOC       ILLPIF   Illegal Pulse before   Applies   —   —           gdCycleMin       ILLPIF   Illegal Pulse instead   Applies   —   —           ValidSOC                    
Error Handling
 
     Error handling denotes the behavior of the lower protocol layers when irregular protocol conditions have been detected. Depending on the nature and duration of the error condition, the protocol controller enters certain states to deal with such conditions. In some cases, higher layer program command activity is required for the protocol controller to resume normal operation. 
     The error handling concept described in this document is intended to ensure communication between non-affected nodes can be maintained in the presence of a lower layer protocol error in a single node. It is also intended to maintain communication when a host behaves in a non-optimal way in the absence of an error in the local lower layer protocol. 
     Protocol Error States 
     The error handling mechanisms described here are aimed maintaining communication as long as possible even in the presence of errors. 
     The error handling is based on three error states with an associated fault hypothesis and an associated strategy for the next steps (behavior) of the CC (see Table 30). These error states correspond to a traffic light model [green, yellow, red]. 
                     TABLE 30                  Protocol Error States [Green, Yellow, Red]                     State   Activity               Green   CC: full operation.           CHI: error signals might be set indicating a detected fault (Errors           have been detected, but they are still consistent with the           fault hypothesis implicit in the green state.).           Frame processing: Normal operation.           BG: remains synchronized with the CC.           Fault Hypothesis: CC external faults, such as electromagnetic           interference, are assumed to be much more probable than           CC internal faults. The BG is assumed to be functional and           would prevent schedule violation of its CC.           Strategy: The strategy is to stay fully synchronized and support           the cluster wide clock synchronization. No immediate effect           on protocol operation by a detected error assumed. The host           is just informed of any error condition(s) by error signaling.       Yellow   CC: reduced operation —no frame transmission and no active           contribution to the cluster wide clock synchronization.           CHI: error signal(s) set indicating a detected fault.           Frame processing: The CC stops transmitting frames, but           received frames are still processed. Clock synchronization           mechanisms are continued based on received frames.           BG: Remains synchronized as the CC continues to provide           the ARM, MT, and BGT signals.           Fault Hypothesis: An external or internal (CC-related) fault           is assumed to be present. The fault causing the error was           non-fatal - only partial defects in registers, memory or           CC logic is assumed.           The clock synchronization of the CC may not be working           correctly. As a consequence, it is possible that both the           CC and its BG could follow an incorrect macrotick over           several cycles and therefore the BG no longer prevents           schedule violations of its CC.           Strategy: The CC shall process incoming frames but shall           stop sending frames. Once the CC reaches clock agreement           with other CCs it may resume normal operation without           host intervention.       Red   CC: Operation halted —no receive frame processing           and clock synchronization processing shall take place.           All signals to the bus driver and bus guardian are set to           their defined states.           CHI: error signaling for detected error(s). Access to the           CHI shall be possible for the host.           Frame processing: All signals to the bus driver and the           bus guardian shall be frozen at their last states.           BG: BG will enter FailSilent state due to lack of transitions           of the ARM, MT, or BGT signals.           Fault Hypothesis1: An internal (CC related) fault has           happened, e.g. internal parameter check(s) failed.           Fault Hypothesis2: The CC was not able to self-rescue based           on the yellow fault hypothesis and a fatal fault shall           to be assumed.           Strategy: CC shall disable any transmissions. A reset from the           host is required to resume operation.                    
Overview of Transitions in the FlexRay Error State Machine
 
     The following sections and tables summarize the required relations between the error signals, the values of the error counters and the transitions within the protocol error states [green, yellow, red]. The states reflect the FlexRay error handling based on the three-state fault hypothesis of the protocol. Section ‘Error Handling for TT-D and TT-M Protocol Modes’ covers the transitions during protocol operation for the Time-Triggered Distributed Protocol Mode and Time-Triggered Master-Controlled Protocol Mode, and section ‘Error Handling for Protocol Operation in byteflight Protocol Mode’ covers the transitions during protocol operation in the byteflight Protocol Mode. 
     Error Handling for TT-D and TT-M Protocol Modes 
     This section describes the central error handling mechanism for FlexRay nodes operating in the static, mixed, and dynamic media access modes. The protocol error state is set to green when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’), independent of the configured FlexRay mode (static, dynamic, or mixed). 
     If the CCFC value is less than gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive (range [1 . . . 7]) then the error state shall be in green state, unless some other error causes a yellow or red state. 
     If the CCFC becomes equal to gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive the fault hypothesis of yellow state shall be assumed (unless some other condition would cause the error state to be red). The clock correction might not work correctly and therefore the CC shall not send any frames. It is possible that also the BG is not synchronized to the cluster&#39;s schedule. As long as CCFC does not reach gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal (range [≧gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive . . . 15]) the CC remains in the yellow error state. If CCFC becomes reset again (see section 0), the green state shall become active, unless some other error causes a yellow or red state. The CC was able to resynchronize and is fully operational. 
     If the CCFC becomes equal to gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal the fault hypothesis of the red state shall be assumed. The CC was not able to resynchronize to the cluster. The CC shall only be reset by its host. The parameter gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal is considered to be a user-defined threshold that is used to control the change of fault hypothesis and sets the threshold of when to change from yellow state into red state. If the node is configured with gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive=gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal then the node shall enter the red state as soon as the CCFC equals their common value. This configuration may be desirable for certain types of systems. 
     If the CCLR is set (see section 0) the CC shall immediately enter the red protocol error state. The CC shall remain in the red state until the host resets the CC. 
     During protocol startup phase the CCLR shall not influence the error handling mechanism. 
     The transitions described above are used in all FlexRay media access modes. The dynamic mode has some special situations, however. In the dynamic mode only one static slot with the purpose of sending the reference frame is defined and therefore the system operates in a master/slave configuration. All CCs acting as slaves in the cluster have to accept the reference frame and its content as the sole data source for their clock synchronization algorithms. This results in a clock synchronization algorithm that is based upon the receipt of just one sync frame (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). The mechanism itself, including rate and offset correction calculation, can deal with this (i.e., the single sync node case is just a special case of the general clock synchronization algorithm). Therefore nodes operating in the dynamic media access mode shall use the same clock synchronization error handling mechanisms as would be used in the other media access modes. An MRCS on such a system means that the even and/or odd reference frame was missing and no rate correction value could be calculated. An MOCS means that no odd reference frame was received and no offset correction term could be calculated. The CCFC shall be incremented according its specification in section ‘Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC)’, and therefore the error state machine shall follow the behavior defined above. Special attention shall be given to the configuration of the values for gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive and gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal. As defined, a slave will stop sending any data frame as soon as it enters the yellow state. 
     The same is true for the limit checks at the slaves. If the reference frame deviates too much from the slave&#39;s local view of the global time and invalid correction activity (in rate and/or offset) becomes necessary, the CCLR signal shall be set and the protocol error state machine shall move into the red state. 
     As the master CC controls the timing of the complete cluster by its reference frame no error handling activity concerning CCFC shall influence the master CC during normal operation (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). The error handling of the master node shall only be influenced by the CCLR signal if external clock synchronization is applied. The external rate and/or offset correction values might result in a limit violation of the rate and offset correction values (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 31 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Error Management State Machines Transitions for Time-Triggered 
               
               
                 Distributed Protocol Mode and Time-Triggered 
               
               
                 Master-Controlled Protocol Mode 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 State 
                 Transition Direction 
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Transition 
                 From State 
                 To State 
                 Conditions for Transition 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 F1 
                 CC_SoftReset 
                 Green 
                   
                 Soft reset released (L5 or L6 of Chapter 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ‘Requirements for Hardware States’) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 F2 
                 Green 
                 Yellow 
                  ( 
                 CC in “Protocol Operation Phase” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                    AND 
                 End of odd Cycle (after clock correction 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 calculation) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                    AND 
                 CCFC = 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                    AND 
                 CCFC &lt; 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                    AND 
                 CCLR is not set 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                  ) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 F3 
                   
                 Red 
                   
                 CC in “CC in “Protocol Operation Phase” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                  AND 
                 End of odd Cycle (after clock correction 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 calculation) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND ( 
                 CCLR set 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                    OR 
                 CCFC = 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   ) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 F4 
                 Yellow 
                 Red 
                   
                 CC in “Protocol Operation Phase” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                  AND 
                 End of odd Cycle (after clock correction 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 calculation) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND ( 
                 CCLR set 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                    OR 
                 CCFC = 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   ) 
                 gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal 
               
               
                 F5 
                   
                 Green 
                  ( 
                 CC in “Protocol Operation Phase 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                    AND 
                 End of odd Cycle (after clock correction 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 calculation) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                    AND 
                 CCFC has been set to zero 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                    AND 
                 CCLR is not set 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 ) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
       FIG. 72  shows an error management state transition diagram for the time-triggered distributed protocol mode and for the time-triggered master-controlled protocol mode. 
     Error Handling for Protocol Operation in byteflight Protocol Mode 
     This section describes the central error handling mechanism for byteflight mode. 
     Each time the host gives the “clear command” while the CC is in configuration state the protocol error state is set to green. By the definition of in the byteflight specification (see M. Peller, J. Berwanger, and R. Greissbach, byteflight Specification, version 0.5, BMW Corporation 1999, available at http://www.byteflight.com), the reception of an SOC is always the trigger to start a new communication cycle and the CC starts operation (protocol startup phase is finished). 
     If a communication cycle is still ongoing and an SOC is received (SOC before gdCycleMin), a new communication cycle has to be started (the master sent the SOC and therefore has to be accepted by all nodes). The CC remains in the green state. 
     If a communication cycle is already finished and the next SOC is missing (gdCycleMax has passed), the CC does not start a new communication cycle until the SOC is detected. Within that time, the CC remains passive (yellow state). 
     If an ILLPIF is detected instead of an SOC (between gdCycleMin and gdCycleMax) or even during an ongoing communication cycle, the CC enters the yellow state. The detection of an SOC causes the CC to switch into green state anyway. 
     Table 32 summarizes the transitions for byteflight mode. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 32 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Error Management State Machines Transitions for byteflight Protocol Mode 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 State 
                 Transition Direction 
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Transition 
                 From State 
                 To State 
                 Conditions for Transition 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 B1 
                 CC_SoftReset 
                 Green 
                   
                 Soft reset released (L5 or L6 of Chapter ‘Requirements 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 for Hardware States’) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 AND 
                 byteflight mode configured 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (gNumberofStaticSlots equal to zero) 
               
               
                 B2 
                 Green 
                 Green 
                   
                 SOC before gdCycleMin 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 B3 
                   
                 Yellow 
                   
                 GdCycleMax reached without SOC 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   OR 
                 Illegal Pulse before gdCycleMin 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                  OR ( 
                 Illegal Pulse after gdCycleMin 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                      AND 
                 Illegal Pulse before gdCycleMax 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                    ) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 B4 
                 Yellow 
                 Green 
                   
                 SOC received 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
       FIG. 73  shows an error management state transition diagram for the byteflight protocol mode. 
     Protocol Error State Signal 
     The host shall have the possibility to read the current protocol error state (PESS, range [Green, Yellow, Red]) at any time. 
     It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define that a change within PESS is a trigger of an interrupt to the host. 
     Controller Host Interface 
     Introduction 
     Purpose and Scope 
     The purpose of this chapter is to describe the conceptual structure and required functions and properties of the controller host interface that handles the control and data flow between the host processor and FlexRay controller protocol engine. 
     The scope of is chapter reaches from the host processor interface to the protocol engine interface. FlexRay protocol functions are not described. 
     Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations 
     This chapter and the following Chapter contain a number of requirements but also introductions, comments, explanations, etc. All requirements are documented in following format:
         Requirement 1 &lt;Text for Requirement One&gt;       

     Text in a different format does not constitute a requirement and is therefore not subject to conformance testing. 
     CHI elements—are the seven elements of the CHI: Host processor interface, control data handling, status data handling, message data handling, configuration data handling, CHI services, protocol engine interface 
     Configuration data—is used to program a FlexRay communication controller in order to communicate with other FlexRay controllers. Configuration data has a constant impact on the behavior of protocol implementation during NormalOperation unless changed by the host. This characteristic distinguishes the configuration data from the control data that has only temporal impact during NormalOperation. Moreover the host processor is the only source for configuration data. 
     Controller state—is the superset of protocol state and other states of the controller which are not determined by the protocol state machine (e.g. HardReset state, Configuration, Standby, etc.) 
     Interrupt—is an event triggered by a FlexRay controller and propagated to the host processor by a dedicated communication link in order to indicate that a specific condition has become true in the FlexRay controller. Note that in interrupts are generated by the CHI element Host interrupt service but its propagation to the host processor is controlled by the CHI element Status data handling. 
     Message memory—is memory that contains information contained in a received frame or a frame that was or will be transmitted. 
     Message status memory—is memory that contains status information about a received or transmitted frame. 
     Message control field—is a field the host can use to control the use of a message memory. 
     Message data—is a subset of data contained a FlexRay frame. It does not include FrameID nor FrameCRC. It includes the following data: ReservedBits, NMIndicationBit, PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, CycleCount, FData[0 . . . 254]. 
     NormalOperation—is the state where the controller can participate in or initiate the cluster communication by receiving or transmitting frames. This state includes the listen-only mode. 
     Status data—is all kind of data the controller determines without interaction with the host by receiving information from the FlexRay Physical Layer or Bus Guardian or by controller internal mechanisms. 
     Slot-channel tuples—determine the allocation of transmission bandwidth on a specific channel and slot for transmission in the static segment. This is necessary as two controllers may share a single slot—one for each channel. 
     Data blocks—are sets of data bytes which belong together, namely the fNMVector, fData, fFrameID, fHeaderCRC, vStatusVector, vInterruptStatusVector 
     Static frame—is a frame with fFrameID smaller or equal to gNumberOfStaticSlots 
     Dynamic frame—is a frame with fFrameID larger than gNumberOfStaticSlots 
     Application requirements—a set of requirements determined by a concrete application or a group of similar applications 
     CC_Configuration state—a state where the host can configure the FlexRay controller. Neither transmission nor reception is possible during this state. This state is not left unless the host explicitly requests the FlexRay controller to exit it. 
     HardReset state—the state entered automatically by the FlexRay controller after power has been turned on or after activation of a dedicated hard reset trigger. After initialization of registers and memories with default values the FlexRay controller automatically transits to the CC configuration state. 
     Controller state—is the combination of the protocol state with all states of state machines operating in parallel in a controller implementation. 
     Passive state—a state where the FlexRay controller does not transmit any data but keeps receiving data. It also continues to perform the clock synchronization. 
     Freeze state—a state where the FlexRay controller does neither transmit nor receive data, clock synchronization is stopped and all data accessible for host through the CHI remains constant unless a change is performed by host itself. 
     Overview of the CHI 
     Conceptual Architecture 
     The controller host interface (CHI) manages the data and control flow between the host processor and the FlexRay protocol engine. 
     Conceptually the CHI consists of seven CHI constituent components. These are the host processor interface and the protocol engine interface, the four data handling units—status data handling, control data handling, message data handling and configuration data handling—, and the CHI services. Note that the hardware architecture of a controller implementation can be quite different than this conceptual architecture. 
       FIG. 74  illustrates the conceptual architecture of the controller host interface and its seven components. The components are described in Sections ‘Host Processor Interface’ through ‘Protocol Engine Interface’ and in Section ‘CHI Services’. 
     Host Processor Interface 
     The host processor interface provides the host processor with control means and gives it access to data held in the four CHI data handling units. In general, FlexRay does not enforce a particular way of how this interface is realized. It can be realized in different ways, for example, as a parallel processor bus or as serial communication link such as SPI. 
     Configuration Data Handling 
     The configuration data handling unit contains the functions and memory required to handle and store the communication controller related configuration data. The configuration data written by the host processor is used to derive all configuration parameters required by the protocol engine. The protocol engine has to use protocol parameters as provided by this CHI element. The configuration data handling unit may also conduct sanity checks of the configuration data. 
     FlexRay distinguishes between two subsets of configuration data:
     constant configuration data—may only be changed while the FlexRay protocol is in the CC configuration state, it remains constant during NormalOperation. The ability of the host to modify this data is disabled as long as transmission and/or reception on at least one communication channel is enabled.   variable configuration data—must be set by the host in the CC configuration state unless initialized with valid default values by the FlexRay controller. This data can be modified by the host at any time when the hard reset condition is not given e.g. also when NormalOperation is active.   

     Note that configuration data has a constant impact on the behavior of protocol implementation during NormalOperation unless changed by the host. This characteristic distinguishes constant as well as variable configuration data from control data that has only temporal impact during NormalOperation. Moreover, the host processor is the only source for configuration data, but control data may be affected by the protocol engine as well (e.g., interrupt indicators are set by the protocol engine but reset by the host). 
     Control Data Handling 
     This CHI element processes control commands from the host processor. This CHI element also handles control commands for other CHI elements, e.g. for CHI services. 
     Status Data Handling 
     This CHI element collects status data from the protocol engine and CHI services, processes it and provides it to the host processor on request. It handles status data of messages. It propagates interrupt requests triggered by the Host interrupt service to the host processor interface. It contains memory to store status data. 
     Message Data Handling 
     This CHI element transfers message data and provides it to the host processor interface as well as to the protocol engine interface. It contains memory to store message data. 
     Memory associated with one message&#39;s data is called a message buffer. A message buffer that is configured to store data for frames to be transmitted is called a transmit buffer. A message buffer that is configured to store data for received frames is called a receive buffer. 
     Note that this CHI element does not handle status data of messages.
         Requirement 1: The FlexRay controller may not modify a transmit buffer&#39;s content during NormalOperation nor during Configuration State. Note that the protocol engine may append the padding pattern to the payload section of frames to be transmitted which contain more payload data than can be stored in the corresponding transmit buffer. This does not modify the transmit buffer&#39;s content.
 
Protocol Engine Interface
       

     The protocol engine interface provides the protocol engine with a means of control and gives it access to data held in the four CHI data handling units. Moreover it allows the protocol engine to interoperate with the CHI services. This interface is not visible to the host.
         Requirement 2: The protocol engine interface shall provide atomic data read operations, so that once a read operation is initiated the transferred data is guaranteed not to be changed until the read operation has concluded.   Requirement 3: The protocol engine interface shall provide atomic data write operations, so that during a write operation to a memory cell of a CHI element no other CHI element can read an inconsistent value from or write to this memory cell.       

     Note that the previous two requirements are necessary but not sufficient. For further message data handling requirements see below. 
     CHI States 
       FIG. 75  shows various Controller Host Interface (CHI) States. 
     CHI state transition triggers (Transitions W 1  and W 5  are described in Table 13):
     vConfigure in {TRUE, FALSE}   vWakeUp in {TRUE, FALSE}   vNormalOperation in {TRUE, FALSE}   vFreeze in {TRUE, FALSE}   vStandby in {TRUE, FALSE}   

     CHI State Description:
     HardReset state: Reached after the hard reset of the controller was triggered. Initializes controller with a default state.   Configuration state: Puts protocol engine in Configure state. Enables host processor to change configuration data. Sets all CHI state transition triggers to FALSE.   WakeUp state: Sets vWakeup to FALSE. Puts protocol engine in WakeUpListen state. The protocol engine may transit to WakeUpSend state. State transitions to Configure state are described in Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’.   NormalOperation state: Sets vNormalOperation trigger to FALSE. On entry initializes controller internal states according to configuration, then triggers startup in protocol engine. Note that this state contains all protocol states where the protocol engine has an interaction with other FlexRay nodes via the FlexRay bus. Protocol state changes can be requested within this state, e.g. the protocol engine can be requested to transit to Passive state in order to prepare further state transitions (e.g. shutdown, standby, etc.).   Standby state: Sets vStandby trigger to FALSE. Puts controller in a low power mode. The minimal required functionality is that CHI is able to detect when the host sets the vConfigure trigger.   Freeze state: Sets vFreeze trigger to FALSE. Stops any interaction of the protocol engine with other FlexRay nodes. All protocol parameters including the complete protocol state are frozen. This mode allows the host processor to perform diagnosis.
 
CHI Services
   

       FIG. 76  shows various interactions of CHI services with CHI elements. CHI services receive data from the protocol engine about received and transmitted communication elements as well as about the protocol and error status. They may use data stored in the status, control, message or configuration interface. 
     CHI services may affect data stored in the status, control or message interface. They may not affect data stored in the configuration interface. 
     CHI services do not affect the protocol engine&#39;s operation, neither directly nor indirectly through one of status, control or message data handling elements. 
     General Requirements 
     
         
         
           
             Requirement 4: It shall be assured that the concurrent operation of CHI elements cannot cause deadlocks. 
             Requirement 5: In case of concurrent access of different CHI elements to shared CHI elements the host processor interface and the protocol engine interface shall have priority over other CHI elements. 
             Requirement 6: In case of concurrent access of the host processor interface and the protocol engine interface to shared CHI elements the protocol engine interface shall have priority. An exception is Requirement 7 (Rationale: Necessary in order to assure that timeliness of all protocol engine operations.). 
             Requirement 7: In case the host processor requests a protocol state change to FreezeState or to ConfigurationState through RequestStateChange it has priority over the protocol engine interface. 
             Requirement 8: The data bandwidth of communication within the CHI shall be fast enough to support 100% bus utilization on each of its channels during NormalOperation of the protocol engine. Note that this requirement addresses only the internal communication of the CHI, so it is not affected by performance limitations of the implemented host processor interface.
 
Assumptions and Dependencies
 
           
         
       
    
     All assumptions and dependencies are documented where they apply. There are no additional general assumptions or dependencies. 
     Host Processor Interface 
     The following set of requirements must be met by every instantiation of the host processor interface.
         Requirement 9: The host processor interface shall provide an atomic data read operation from memory cells such that once a read operation is initiated by the host the transferred data is guaranteed not to be changed until the read operation has concluded.   Requirement 10: The host processor interface shall provide an atomic data write operation such that during a host processor write operation to a memory cell of a CHI element no other CHI element can read an inconsistent value from this memory cell.       

     Note that the previous two requirements are necessary but not always sufficient for consistent data access, e.g. for message buffer access further mechanisms are necessary (see section ‘Message Data Handling Interaction’).
         Requirement 11: The host processor interface shall provide at least one dedicated interrupt signal.   Requirement 12: The host processor interface shall trigger an interrupt request to the host processor via the interrupt signal whenever requested by the status data handling.       

     It is also possible to provide a FlexRay communication controller with multiple host processor interfaces. If a FlexRay controller implementation supports multiple instances of host processor interfaces (e.g. a parallel bus and a serial communication link or different multiple parallel busses) then the following additional two requirements apply:
         Requirement 13: A mechanism shall be provided that allows the selection of exactly one host processor interface instance before the communication between FlexRay controller and host processor begins.       

     Requirement 14: A change of this selection shall become effective only by putting the FlexRay controller in HardReset state. If the selection changes during other states (except PowerOff state or Standby state.) it may not result in a change of the host processor interface. 
     Configuration Data Handling Interaction 
     Relationship Between Configuration Data and Protocol Parameters 
     In a FlexRay controller the configuration data will usually be comprised of a set of registers and memories. However there is not necessarily a one-to-one mapping between this set and the protocol parameters it determines. This is the case because there are protocol parameters, which can be derived from other protocol parameters. Moreover, a FlexRay controller may require parameters in a different representation than specified further on (Example: pSamplePeriod [ns]=gdBit [ns]/pSamplesPerBit)). 
     Configuration Data Handling Requirements 
     Interaction with the configuration data handling must meet the following requirements
         Requirement 15: Configuration data shall not be changed by the FlexRay controller except as result of the activation of hard reset trigger or after power has been applied.       

     It is assumed that the host in any case will have means to determine whether a mechanism such as “HardReset” have modified configuration data. Moreover, no protocol mechanism will ever change any configuration data under any circumstance.
         Requirement 16: After activation of the hard reset or after power on the configuration data shall be initialized by configuration data handling with default configuration values assuring that the FlexRay controller does not transmit data on the FlexRay bus. When the host processor requests a state change to NormalOperation without changing any configuration data no data may be transmitted on the FlexRay bus independent of the resulting protocol state. Rationale: This is a fail silence requirement for the case of a fault causing a hard reset or power up where the host would not write any configuration data.   Requirement 17: Configuration data shall be designed in a way that all protocol parameters are determined unambiguously.   Requirement 18: Configuration data shall be designed in a way that all protocol parameters are determined with at least the resolution given further on. The resolutions and units of all configuration data shall be done in a way that all this resolution is achieved for all valid configurations.   Requirement 19: It shall be assured that the FlexRay controller never transmits more than one sync frame per communication cycle, even when the host has attempted to configure the FlexRay controller to do so. The FlexRay controller shall employ special measures to prevent this from happening.   Requirement 20: At least the following parameters shall be determined by constant configuration data:
           1. All cluster constants (This covers several parameters, e.g. gdStartup, gStartupNoise, etc.)   2. All node constants (This covers several parameters, e.g. pdWakeupPattern, etc.)   3. Timing parameters   4. In case pSyncNode is TRUE the value of pSyncSlot   5. Frame identifiers, transmission channels and cycle counter filters of all static frames that may be transmitted (Note that this deals only with configuration data and determines which slot-channel tuples are allocated for transmission by one FlexRay Controller. It does not imply that message memory is provided in the message data handling element for every slot-channel tuple.)   6. Physical layer (optical or electrical), encoding   
           Requirement 21: The host shall have write access to constant configuration data only when the protocol is in the CC configuration state. When the protocol is in any other state this data shall be write protected against access by the host processor.   Requirement 22: Appropriate mechanisms shall be provided that support changes of variable configuration data during NormalOperation. These mechanisms shall ensure that the subset of configuration data to be changed is not used by the protocol engine during the duration of the change process. Indirectly this requires a locking mechanism for all cases where an atomic change is not possible.   Requirement 23: Variable configuration data shall be clustered in configuration subsets of configuration data belonging together in a way that that an update of one subset cannot cause an inconsistent configuration during or after the update.   Requirement 24: At least the following parameters are determined by variable configuration data
           1. Frame identifiers of messages in the dynamic segment   2. vColdStartInhibit   
           Requirement 25: The following parameters shall be determined by exactly one of variable configuration data or constant configuration data.
           1. (currently no parameter identified for this category)   
           Requirement 26: The host shall have read access to all configuration data in all controller states except PowerDown state and HardReset state.
 
Control Data Handling Interaction
 
Control of Protocol Parameters
   Requirement 27: Means shall be provided to determine and change the following protocol parameters during NormalOperation state:
           1. vOffsetCorrectionExtern, vRateCorrectionExtern   2. vBgsmErrorAck (Can be discarded if locked parameter is used for BgsmError)   3. vColdStartInhibit
 
Control Commands for the Host Processor
   
           Requirement 28: At least the following control commands shall be provided to the host processor: (TBD wording)
           1. ChangeControllerState (handles superset of changes to protocol engine interface—maybe better ChangeControllerState to cover non-protocol state changes as well)   2. EnableInterrupt (&lt;interrupt_type&gt;)   3. DisableInterrupt (&lt;interrupt_type&gt;)   4. EnableCHIService (&lt;CHI_service&gt;, &lt;CHI_service_feature&gt;)   5. DisableCHIService (&lt;CHI_service&gt;, &lt;CHI_service_feature&gt;)   
               

     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 33 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 ChangeControllerState 
               
               
                 ChangeControllerState ( &lt;requested_controller_state&gt; ) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Purpose 
                 Control command for the host processor to reqeusts a change of the 
               
               
                   
                 controller state 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Arguments 
                 requested controller state 
                 [HardReset state, CC Configuration state, 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;requested_controller_state&gt; 
                 NormalOperation state, Freeze state, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 WakeUp state, Standby state] 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Return values 
                 None 
               
               
                 Operation 
                 Depending on the requested controller state a request is generated to the 
               
               
                   
                 protocol engine through the ChangeProtocolState interface. The CHI 
               
               
                   
                 waits for the protocol engine to perform the requested state transition. 
               
               
                   
                 Subsequently the appropriate CHI state trigger is set to TRUE. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 34 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Impact of Controller State Change on Protocol Engine and CHI (The 
               
               
                 maximum latency is before entering the state assuming that the requested 
               
               
                 transition is legal; the maximum latency in the controller state 
               
               
                 NormalOperation depends on the performance of controller implementation; 
               
               
                 this assumes that controller internal states must be initialized depending on 
               
               
                 configuration.) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Requested 
                 Argument for 
                   
                 Maximum 
               
               
                 controller state 
                 ChangeProtocolState 
                 CHI state trigger 
                 latency 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Freeze 
                 Freeze 
                 Sets vFreeze to TRUE 
                 100 ns 
               
               
                 Configuration 
                 Configuration 
                 Sets vConfiguration to 
                 100 ns 
               
               
                   
                   
                 TRUE 
               
               
                 Standby 
                 Freeze 
                 Sets vStandby to TRUE 
                 100 ns 
               
               
                 NormalOperation 
                 NormalOperation 
                 Sets vNormalOperation to 
                 150 us 
               
               
                   
                   
                 TRUE 
               
               
                 Wakeup 
                 WakeUpListen 
                 Sets vWakeup to TRUE 
                 100 ns 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Note that Table 34 is not subject to conformance testing. Specific FlexRay controller implementations may have deviating maximum latency values. However, these values must be determined, documented and constant. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 35 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 EnableInterrupt / DisableInterrupt (Further interrupt types may be 
               
               
                 supported but are not required) 
               
               
                 EnableInterrupt ( &lt;interrupt_type&gt; ) / 
               
               
                 DisableInterrupt ( &lt;interrupt_type&gt; ) 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Purpose 
                 Enable/disable specific interrupts 
               
               
                   
                 Arguments 
                 interrupt type to enable/disable&lt;interrupt_type&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                 &lt;interrupt_type&gt; 
                 [RXInterrupt, TXInterrupt, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 ErrorSignalingInterrupt] 
               
               
                   
                 Return values 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
                     TABLE 36               EnableCHIService / DisableCHIService       EnableCHIService ( &lt;CHI_service&gt;, &lt;CHI_service_feature&gt; )       DisableCHIService ( &lt;CHI_service&gt;, &lt;CHI_service_feature&gt; )                                        Purpose   Enable/disable optional CHI services and CHI           service features       Arguments   interrupt service; if &lt;CHI_service_feature&gt; equals           “ALL” enable/disable complete service with all features                             &lt;CHI_service&gt;   [message_filtering,               message_FIFO, net-               work_management, timer,               error_signaling,               symbol_handling, host_inter-               rupt, optical_diagnosis]                         CHI service feature to enable/disable; if the CHI service           does not have features or all features should be enabled/           disabled use “ALL”                             &lt;CHI_service_feature&gt;   [ALL, frame_ID_filtering,               channel_filtering, cycle_coun-               ter_filtering, message_ID_fil-               tering, receive_FIFO, NM_vec-               tor_extraction, NM_func-               tion_filtering, media_ac-               cess_test_symbol_handling,               status_symbol_handling,               timer_interrupt, error_signal-               ing_interrupt, NM_func-               tion_interrupt]       Return   None       values                    
Status Data Handling Interaction
 
     Status data is derived from controller internal state variables which serve as their source. There are two types of status data:
         1. Free status indicators that can change their value whenever their source values change. Unless differently stated all indicators below are free status indicators.   2. Locked status indicators that change their value if a specific condition of the source value is fulfilled for a short time (typically in the range of one to several controller clock cycles) and keep this value even if the condition is no more fulfilled.       

     Some status indicators may be combined in a super state which may not be accessible by one atomic host operation. Likewise for status indicators which are too large to be accessed by an atomic read operation. Dedicated status consistency mechanisms may be required to assure that they can be read consistently by the host processor with a non-atomic sequence of read operations. 
     Requirement 29: Free status indicators shall be read-only for the host processor. Attempts by the host processor to overwrite free status indicators may not affect them. 
     Requirement 30: Locked status indicators shall be set if a specific internal state is reached, they shall not be set upon request of the host processor. 
     Requirement 31: Locked status indicators shall be reset only upon request of the host processor, they shall not be reset upon change of the adjacent internal state. 
     Requirement 32: All status indicators shall be reset upon exit from the CC configuration state. 
     Requirement 33: The current controller state shall be provided on read request of the host. 
     Requirement 34: The current error status vector shall be provided on read request of the host. 
     Requirement 35: A mechanism shall be provided that enables the host to read the protocol state consistently. 
     Requirement 36: A mechanism shall be provided that enables the host to read the error status vector consistently. 
     Requirement 37: If a host interrupt is generated by the host interrupt service, and if this interrupt is enabled, it shall be indicated to the host processor interface. 
     Requirement 38: Interrupts that are disabled shall not be propagated to the host processor interface. 
     Requirement 39: The status data handling shall provide a mechanism for the host processor to selectively enable and disable each interrupt. 
     Requirement 40: A dedicated status indicator shall be provided for each receive buffer to indicate when a receive buffer is updated through the PutFrame interface. 
     Requirement 41: The following protocol variables shall be provided (sets of status data belonging together are combined in one bullet):
         1. vColdStartCount   2. vValidSyncCount   3. vCycle, vMacrotick, vCurrentSlot, vErrorHandlingLevel   4. results of BG monitor checks   5. results of Media Access Test       

     Requirement 42: The following results of the clock synchronization algorithm which is performed during NIT of cycle n shall be provided throughout cycle n+1 and cycle n+2
         1. vOffsetCorrection, vRateCorrection   2. an indicator for impossible rate or offset correction term calculation   3. number of sync frame pairs used for the last clock correction term calculation       

     Requirement 43: A startup status vector shall be provided containing
         1. An indicator set only when vColdStartMax is equal to gColdStartMax   2. An indicator that plausibility check has failed   3. An indicator that normal state was entered via coldstart path   4. An indicator that coldstart path has been entered due to expiration of pStartupNoise       

     Requirement 44: For each receive buffer a corresponding status vector shall be provided containing at least the following status information
         1. Semantically valid frame received   2. Syntactically correct null frame received   3. Syntactically correct sync frame received   4. Empty slot—idle was detected throughout the slot on the reception channel   5. Cycle counter mismatch detected   6. Length mismatch detected (PayloadLength in static frame does not match gPayloadLengthStatic)       

     Requirement 45: The status vector for a receive buffer shall be updated whenever this buffer is selected by the message selection process. (Note that this does not imply that the receive buffer&#39;s data is updated as well.) 
     Requirement 46: A locked indicator shall be set on detection of a wakeup pattern, that is, when the flag vWakeupSymbolReceived is set. 
     Requirement 47: A locked indicator shall be set when vWakeupFrameHeaderReceived is set. 
     Requirement 48: A locked indicator shall be set when the flag vWakeupFailed is set. 
     Requirement 49: A locked indicator shall be set when the flag vWakeupComplete is set. 
     Message Data Handling Interaction 
     The host can book a slot-channel tuple for transmission. Note that the booking does not include further conditions like subscription (e.g. cycle counter filtering) even though transmit buffers may support additional conditions to determine which data is transmitted during the booked slot-channel tuples. The booking of a specific slot-channel must be unique in the cluster. The host can also subscribe a slot-channel tuple for reception. Depending on the FlexRay controller implementation the subscription may include further conditions e.g. a matching cycle counter, etc. Identical subscriptions may coexist in the same cluster. 
     Requirement 50: In order for the host to manipulate the content of message buffers at least the following interface functions shall be supported (Further interface functions may be supported to improve efficiency):
         GetMessage   PutMessage       

     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 37 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 GetMessage 
               
               
                 GetMessage ( &lt;message_buffer&gt; ) 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Purpose 
                 Interface function for the host processor to retrieve 
               
               
                   
                 data from a (receive) message buffer. 
               
               
                 Arguments 
                 Select the message buffer 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;message_buffer&gt; 
                 (values depend on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 controller implementation) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Return values 
                 TRUE if the selected message buffer contains valid 
               
               
                   
                 data, FALSE otherwise 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;valid_data&gt; 
                 [TRUE | FALSE] 
               
               
                   
                 Received message data 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;message_data&gt; 
                 (FrameID, ReservedBits, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 SyncBit, NMIndicationBit, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CycleCount, PayloadLength, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HeaderCRC, FData[0..254]) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (Does not contain FrameCRC) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 38 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 PutMessage 
               
               
                 PutMessage ( &lt;message_buffer&gt;, &lt;message_data&gt; ) 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Purpose 
                 Interface function for the host processor to change a 
               
               
                   
                 (transmit) message buffer&#39;s content 
               
               
                 Arguments 
                 selected message buffer 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;message_buffer&gt; 
                 (values depend on controller 
               
               
                   
                   
                 implementation) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 data to be put in the selected message buffer 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;message_data&gt; 
                 (ReservedBits, NMIndicationBit, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 FData[0..254]) (Does not contain 
               
               
                   
                   
                 SyncBit; also FrameID is determined 
               
               
                   
                   
                 by message buffer&#39;s adjacent 
               
               
                   
                   
                 slot-channel tuple) 
               
               
                 Return 
                 None 
               
               
                 values 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Requirement 51: The host shall have read access to all message buffers with valid message data. The Message data may not be valid while the message buffer is accessed by the protocol engine. 
     Requirement 52: An indicator shall be provided for each receive message buffer if it contains data of a semantically valid frame. 
     Requirement 53: After activation of the hard reset or after power on this indicator shall be initialized by message data handling to indicate that the receive message buffer does not contain data of a semantically valid frame. 
     Requirement 54: A mechanism shall be provided that ensures access to consistent message data by the host. This means that while the host is accessing a message buffer&#39;s data that data shall not be changed by other CHI elements. 
     Requirement 55: Transmit buffers shall contain the following data: ReservedBits, NMIndicationBit, FrameID, PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, CycleCount, FData[0 . . . pMaxPayloadLength-1] 
     Requirement 56: In case of a request through the GetFrame interface by the protocol engine cPaddingValue shall be set in FData[pMaxPayloadLength . . . PayloadLength-1] in case pMaxPayloadLength is smaller than PayloadLength and &lt;frame_data_found&gt; is TRUE. The padding feature shall be supported only by controller implementations that have message buffers which cannot store 254 bytes of payload data. It shall be possible to inhibit padding by a dedicated configuration parameter. 
     Requirement 57: A mechanism shall be provided for the host to commit transmit buffers for scheduling for transmission. 
     Requirement 58: The host shall have write access to transmit buffers only when they are not scheduled for transmission. 
     Requirement 59: The host shall not have write access to receive buffers. 
     Requirement 60: Each receive buffer shall provide the following message data: 
     ReservedBits, NMIndicationBit, NullFrameIndicationBit, SyncBit, FrameID, PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, CycleCount, FData[0 . . . pMaxPayloadLength-1], reception channel. (Note: If the reception channel is determined by configuration data the reception channel is not required to be stored in the receive buffer.) 
     Requirement 61: Receive buffers shall be updated by the protocol engine only with data of semantically valid frames. 
     Requirement 62: The message data of valid frames that are stored in a receive buffer shall be accessible through GetMessage in the same sequence as the frames are detected as valid. 
     Requirement 63: For valid static frames received in slot x the earliest possible access to the message data through GetMessage shall be within 1 μs after the end of slot x if they are subscribed. 
     Requirement 64: For valid dynamic frames which end in minislot x the earliest possible access to the message data through GetMessage shall be within 1 μs after the end of minislot x if they are subscribed. 
     Protocol Engine Interface 
     Communication with Protocol Engine 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 39 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Protocol Engine Interface 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Interface 
                   
                   
               
               
                 type 
                 Interface function 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 control 
                 RequestStateChange 
                 Request a protocol state change 
               
               
                 interface 
                   
                 at the protocol engine 
               
               
                 data 
                 PutFrame 
                 Service for the protocol engine to 
               
               
                 interface 
                   
                 process received frames 
               
               
                   
                 GetFrame 
                 Service for the protocol engine 
               
               
                   
                   
                 that provides frame data 
               
               
                   
                   
                 for a specific slot and channel. 
               
               
                   
                 PutProtocolState 
                 Service for the protocol engine 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to process protocol state data 
               
               
                   
                 PutErrorStatusVector 
                 Service for the protocol engine to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 process the error status vector 
               
               
                   
                 GetConfigurationData 
                 Service for the protocol engine 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to read configuration data 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The protocol engine interface is split into a control and a data interface. The control interface is used to request a protocol state change at the protocol engine (see below). The data interface provides services which can be requested by the protocol engine. These services are described further on. 
     RequestStateChange 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 40 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 RequestStateChange 
               
               
                 RequestStateChange ( &lt;requested_protocol_state&gt; ) 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Purpose 
                 Request a protocol state change at the protocol engine 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 Arguments 
                 requested protocol state 
                   
               
               
                   
                 &lt;requested_protocol_state&gt; 
                 [ PowerUp, Configuration, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Wakeup, NormalOperation, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Passive, Freeze] 
               
               
                 Return 
                 None 
               
               
                 values 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Operation: The state change request is propagated to the protocol engine. It is in the responsibility of the protocol engine to react accordingly, e.g. some state change requests have to be followed immediately while others allow to complete an ongoing transmit or receive process. The protocol engine confirms the request by using the PutProtocolState interface to report its transition to the requested state. 
     PutFrame 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 41 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 PutFrame 
               
               
                 PutFrame ( &lt;frame_data&gt;, &lt;RX_channel&gt;, &lt;frame_status&gt; ) 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Purpose 
                 Service for the protocol engine to process received frames 
               
               
                 Arguments 
                 Data content of the received frame 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;frame_data&gt; 
                 ReservedBits, NMIndicationBit, NullFrameIndicationBit, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 SyncBit, FrameID, PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CycleCount, FData[0..254] 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Reception channel 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;RX_channel&gt; 
                 [ A | B ] 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Result of the frame checks performed by the protocol engine - any 
               
               
                   
                 combination of error values is possible 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;frame_status&gt; 
                 [ CorrectFrame | {CRCMismatch, IllegalLength, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CycleCountMismatch, FrameIDMismatch, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 IllegalNMIndicationBit, IllegalSyncBit} ] 
               
               
                 Return values 
                 none 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Operation: The data provided by the protocol engine is forwarded to all CHI services and to message data handling. These CHI elements interact with each other to determine
     if the provided data should be stored in the message data memory—if so determine the storage location   if reception of this very message should be indicated to host processor (e.g. via interrupt)   if pMaxPayloadLength is smaller than PayloadLength discard FData[pMaxPayloadLength . . . PayloadLength-1], however do not change PayloadLength (Consequently a message buffer may contain less FrameData than indicated by PayloadLength.)   if and which status data to be updated   if there is an impact on control data (e.g. reset an indicator set by the host if it has read a specific message)   if in case of an error indication maybe an interrupt should be triggered others depending on further CHI services
 
GetFrame
   

     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 42 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 GetFrame 
               
               
                 GetFrame ( &lt;FrameID&gt;, &lt;TX_channel&gt; ) 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Purpose 
                 Service for the protocol engine that provides frame data for a specific slot and 
               
               
                   
                 channel. 
               
               
                 Arguments 
                 FrameID of the frame to be transmitted; 0 for construction of a special collision 
               
               
                   
                 avoidance frame during startup 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;FrameID&gt; 
                 [0..cMaxFrameID] 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Channel to transmit the frame 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;TX_channel&gt; 
                 [ A | B ] 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Current cycle counter 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;cycle_counter&gt; 
                 [0..63] 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Return values 
                 TRUE if valid frame data was found, FALSE otherwise 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;frame_data_found&gt; 
                 [ TRUE | FALSE ] 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 TRUE if the configuration data contains at least one message configuration 
               
               
                   
                 with a matching &lt;FrameID&gt; for transmission on &lt;TX_channel&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;slot_is_booked&gt; 
                 [ TRUE | FALSE ] 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Frame data to be transmitted 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;frame_data&gt; 
                 (ReservedBits, SyncBit, NMIndicationBit, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, FData[0..254]) (Not all 
               
               
                   
                   
                 data contained in a frame is covered by this data 
               
               
                   
                   
                 set: FrameID, CycleCount and FrameCRC are known 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or generated by the protocol engine.) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Operation: The protocol engine requests frame data through this interface for every slot and channel. 
     If no slot-channel tuple for transmission is contained in the configuration data the value of &lt;slot_is_booked&gt; shall be FALSE and the protocol engine will try to receive a frame. 
     If a slot-channel tuple for transmission is contained in the configuration data, though, &lt;slot_is_booked&gt; shall be TRUE, and a frame or null frame will be transmitted if &lt;frame_data_found&gt; is TRUE respectively FALSE. 
     In case both &lt;slot_is_booked&gt; and &lt;frame_data_found&gt; are TRUE message data handling assures that cPaddingValue is set in FData[pMaxPayloadLength . . . PayloadLength-1] in case pMaxPayloadLength is smaller than PayloadLength. 
     PutProtocolState 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 43 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 PutProtocolState 
               
               
                 PutProtocolState ( &lt;current_protocol_state&gt; ) 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Purpose 
                 Service for the protocol engine to process protocol 
               
               
                   
                 state data 
               
               
                 Arguments 
                 Current protocol state 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;current_protocol_state&gt; 
                 [PowerUp, Configuration, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Wakeup, NormalOperation, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Passive, Freeze ] 
               
               
                 Return values 
                 none 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Operation: This interface is used by the protocol engine whenever the protocol state changes. This information is provided to all CHI services, status data handling, which interact accordingly to
     Determine if a the state change needs to be reflected in status data   Determine if control data needs to be updated (e.g. reset/set specific state change or transmission requests   Check if interrupt requests should be triggered
 
PutErrorStatusVector
   

                     TABLE 44               PutErrorStatusVector       PutErrorStatusVector ( &lt;error_status_vector&gt; )                                        Purpose   Service for the protocol engine to process the error status           vector       Arguments   Current protocol error status vector                             &lt;error_status_vector&gt;   Error status according to               Chapter &lt;Error Signaling and               Error Handling&gt;       Return values   none                    
GetConfigurationData
 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 45 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 GetConfigurationData 
               
               
                 GetConfigurationData ( &lt;requested_protocol_parameter&gt; ) 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Purpose 
                 Service for the protocol engine to read configuration data 
               
               
                 Arguments 
                 identifies which protocol parameter&#39;s value shall be provided 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;requested_protocol_parameter&gt; 
                 [pSyncSlot, ...] (This list is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 implementation specific) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Return values 
                 value of the requested protocol parameter 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;protocol_parameter_value&gt; 
                 number (The format of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 returned value is implementation 
               
               
                   
                   
                 specific) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Operation: Whenever the protocol engine requires a specific protocol parameter it uses this interface to request the value. The configuration data handling element may extract it directly from the configuration data or calculate the value from the configuration data. 
     Status Data Handling Interaction 
     The protocol engine must provide all indicators required for CHI which cannot be generated by one of the CHI elements. 
     Message Data Handling Interaction 
     Requirement 65: A mechanism shall be provided that ensures access to consistent message data by the protocol engine. This means that while the protocol engine is accessing a message buffer&#39;s data it may not be changed by other CHI elements 
     Controller Host Interface Services 
     Overview 
     The controller host interface services (CHI services) provide different services to the host processor. Conceptually the CHI services can be seen as an additional service layer that builds on the protocol services provided by the protocol engine. 
     CHI services of higher complexity like the Message filtering service fall apart in different CHI service features. Specific CHI service features may require other CHI service features as prerequisite. 
     Each CHI service is classified as either required or optional. All services, i.e. those classified as required as well as those classified as optional, however, must adhere to the requirements defined in this chapter. In addition a CHI service may contain a set of different subservices. Each CHI service feature in turn is also classified as either required or optional. A CHI service is required if it provides at least one required CHI service feature. 
     A CHI service may also build on other CHI services. In this case a CHI service is required if it provides a dependency for at least one other CHI service. 
     The CHI services interact with the host processor through the four data handling units. This way the service status is indicated to the host processor and the host processor can control and configure the service. In addition a CHI service can act on message data provided by either the host processor or the protocol engine to the message data handling unit. 
     Currently eight CHI services are defined. Table 46 lists the eight CHI services along with any potential CHI service features and the respective classifications. 
     The protocol engine interface propagates all data provided by the protocol engine via PutFrame, PutProtocolStatus, PutErrorStatusVector to all CHI services. Upon this data the CHI services perform all operations and checks necessary to fulfill their functions. 
                     TABLE 46                  Required and Optional CHI Services and Features                             Service name   Service feature   Classification   Comment               Message filtering   Frame ID filtering   Required           service   Channel filtering   Required           Cycle counter   Required           filtering           Message ID filtering   Optional       Message FIFO   Receive FIFO   Optional       service       Network   NM vector extraction   Optional       management   NM function filtering   Optional   Requires NM vector extraction       service   (Currently not           required nor           described)       Timer service   —   Required   Essential for time triggered                   distributed applications       Error signaling   —   Required       service       Symbol handling   Media access test   Required   Essential to perform the media       service   symbol handling       access test           Status symbol   Optional           handling       Host interrupt   Timer interrupt   Required   Essential for accurate       service           synchronization of time                   triggered applications with the                   global time           Error signaling   Optional           interrupt           NM function interrupt   Optional   Requires network management                   service       Optical diagnosis   —   Optional       service                    
Message Filtering Service
 
     The message filtering service provides a means for retrieving message data from message buffers for transmission, respectively for storing received message data to message buffers, depending on specific filter conditions. In order to provide this service the protocol engine accesses each message buffer via a message filter. Each message filter can assess one or more filter conditions. The message filter checks whether the message data meets the defined filter conditions or not. Message filters may be used with receive buffers as well as with transmit buffers. 
     Currently filtering conditions are defined for the frame ID, the channel ID, the cycle counter and the message ID. 
     The following transmit buffer related requirements must be met independently from the filtering condition: 
     Requirement 66: In the case of a transmit buffer the buffer contents shall only be made available to the protocol engine for transmission if the transmit buffer contains message data that meets all respective filter conditions. 
     Requirement 67: If multiple filters match then a transmit buffer shall be selected in a deterministic way. 
     The following receive buffer related requirements must be met independently from the filtering condition: 
     Requirement 68: In the case of a receive buffer the message data contained in a valid frame shall only be stored in the receive buffer if the message data contained in the frame meets all respective filter conditions. 
     Requirement 69: If multiple filters match then a receive buffer shall be selected in a deterministic way independently of the protocol state and message data. 
     Frame ID Filtering 
     Within Frame ID filtering the filter condition is applied to the frame ID. Frame ID filtering applies to transmit and receive buffers. 
     Requirement 70: For transmit buffers the filter shall consider the respective slot counter for which data is requested by the protocol engine, for receive buffers the filter shall consider the frame ID contained in the valid frame. The slot counter is always associated with a channel ID. A slot is assigned to the node for a specific channel if both the frame ID filter and the channel ID filter match for a buffer. 
     Requirement 71: Each filter shall be configured by means of a frame ID filter value and an optional frame ID filter mask. 
     Requirement 72: Each frame ID filter configuration shall be determined by static configuration data. 
     Requirement 73: The frame ID filter shall match if the considered frame ID is equal to the frame ID filter value. If the filter holds a frame ID filter mask then the frame ID filter mask shall be applied to the considered frame ID prior to the comparison with the frame ID filter value. 
     Channel Filtering 
     Within channel filtering the filter condition is applied to the channel. Channel filtering applies to transmit and receive buffers. 
     Requirement 74: For transmit buffers the filter shall consider the channel for which data is requested by the protocol engine, for receive buffers the filter shall consider the channel on which the valid frame was received. The channel ID is always associated with a slot counter. A slot is assigned to the node for a specific channel if both the frame ID filter and the channel ID filter match for a buffer. 
     Requirement 75: Each filter shall be configurable by means of a channel filter set that equals one of the following sets: {A}, {B}, {A,B}, { }. 
     Requirement 76: Each channel filter configuration shall be determined by static or by variable configuration data. 
     Requirement 77: The channel filter shall match if the considered channel is contained in the channel filter set. 
     Message ID Filtering 
     Within message ID filtering the filter condition is applied to the message ID. Message ID filtering applies only to receive buffers. 
     Requirement 78: The filter shall consider the message ID contained in the valid frame only if the payload length of the frame contains at least one word. If the payload length contains 0 words then the filter shall not match. 
     Requirement 79: Each filter shall be configurable by means of a message ID filter value and a message ID filter mask. 
     Requirement 80: The message ID filter shall match if the result after applying the considered message ID to the message ID filter mask is equal to the message ID filter value. 
     Requirement 81: The message ID filter configuration shall be determined by constant or by variable configuration data. 
     Cycle Counter Filtering 
     Within cycle count filtering the filter condition is applied to the cycle count. Cycle count filtering applies to transmit and receive buffers. 
     Requirement 82: For transmit buffers the filter shall consider the cycle counter for which data is requested by the protocol engine, for receive buffers the filter shall consider the cycle count contained in the valid frame. 
     Requirement 83: Each filter shall be configurable by means of a cycle set. A cycle set C b,c  contains all cycle numbers
 
 C   b,c   ={x|x= ( b+n* 2 c ) modulo (cCycleMax+1);  n  in N 0 ; 0 &lt;=b &lt; 2 c &lt;=cCycleMax+1}
 
with
         b: Base cycle   c: Cycle repetition   b, c in N 0          

     Requirement 84: The cycle counter filter configuration shall be determined by constant or variable configuration data. 
     Requirement 85: A cycle counter filter shall match if the considered cycle count is contained in the cycle set C b,c . 
     Allowable Filtering Combinations 
     Requirement 86: Transmit buffers shall allow either a combination of frame ID filtering and channel ID filtering or a combination of frame ID filtering, channel ID filtering and cycle counter filtering. 
     Requirement 87: Receive buffers shall allow either a combination of frame ID filtering and channel ID filtering, or a combination of frame ID filtering, channel ID filtering and cycle counter filtering, or a combination of message ID filtering and channel ID filtering, or a combination of message ID filtering, channel ID filtering, and cycle counter filtering. Frame ID filtering and Message ID filtering are mutually exclusive for receive buffers, i.e. it is not possible to activate frame ID filtering and message ID filtering at the same time. 
     Requirement 88: If the configuration of a filter is changed during runtime while the protocol is in the NormalOperation state then the filter shall not match until the configuration is completed. 
     Message FIFO Service 
     Description 
     Message FIFO&#39;s are used to store and receive frame contents according to the “first-in first-out” principle. Currently only receive FIFO&#39;s are defined. 
     The receive FIFO stores the content from valid frames received by the protocol engine. The host processor consumes the messages from the FIFO by reading from the FIFO. 
     Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface 
     Receive FIFO: Stores the provided message data upon a PutFrame request if no dedicated message buffer can be found and the frame is accepted by optional filters. 
     Interaction with Configuration Data Handling 
     Message filters may be configured in static or variable configuration data for select specific message for storage in receive FIFOs. These message filters may accept or reject specific frame Ids or message Ids. 
     Interaction with Status Data Handling 
     Requirement 89: A Boolean free indicator shall be provided to determine if there are messages stored in the FIFO. 
     Requirement 90: A Boolean locked indicator shall be provided to determine if the FIFO has lost message data due to overflow. 
     Interaction with Message Data Handling 
     Message FIFOs are used to store/retrieve message data only when no dedicated message buffer is configured for a specific message and the frame is accepted by optional filters. 
     Requirement 91: The sequence of messages from a specific channel stored in a receive FIFO shall be identical to the sequence of these message on the FlexRay bus. 
     Note that if more than one channel is fed into one receive FIFO, then the message sequence in the FIFO will be consistent with the message sequence for each channel individually, however no specific storage sequence is defined between messages of different channels. 
     Network Management Service 
     Description 
     The Network management service provides means for the host to handle the network management vector that can be transmitted in a FlexRay frame. 
     Constraints 
     The network management service is functional only during NormalOperation. 
     Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface 
     This CHI service scans each frame provided by the protocol engine through PutFrame. If NMIndicationBit is set it becomes active. 
     Interaction with Configuration Data Handling 
     Requirement 92: The value of NMIndBit in frames to be transmitted shall be determined by static configuration data. 
     Interaction with Control Data Handling 
     Requirement 93: If a specific controller implementation supports interrupt triggering on specific NM events it shall be possible for the host to disable these interrupts. 
     Interaction with Status Data Handling 
     Requirement 94: A network management (NM) vector vGloNMVec of gNetworkManagementVectorLength bytes length shall be provided during NormalOperation. 
     It is not required that vGloNMVecis valid in operation modes other than the NormalOperation. 
     It is up to the application to use only a subset of the gNetworkManagementVectorLength bytes for NM. In this case it is the responsibility of the application to mask the unused bits. 
     Requirement 95: An updated vGloNMVecshall be provided at the beginning of each communication cycle. 
     Requirement 96: The value of a vGloNMVec provided at the beginning of a communication cycle shall be equal to a logical OR operation of all fLocNMVec contained in correctly received frames with the NM indication bit set during the previous communication cycle. Note that the extraction of fLocNMVec depends on the use of message identifiers. This may be different for different frames. If message ID filtering is disabled in the message buffer to store a received frame the fData[0 . . .  8 ] are used as fLocNMVec. If message ID filtering is enabled fData[2 . . .  10 ] are used as fLocNMVec. Note that the logical OR combination applies also for different fLocNMVec values received on the two channels in the same slot. At the beginning of the first communication cycle in NormalOperation a NM vector initialized to 0 shall be provided. 
     Requirement 97: A mechanism shall be provided that either provides vGloNMVec in a consistent way, or indicates either explicitly or implicitly if an inconsistent vGloNMVec was read by the host. 
     An implicit indication could be the cycle counter value of the communication cycle the NM vector was generated from. The host could read and store this value, read the NM vector and verify if the cycle counter value matches the stored value. If this check fails, the NM vector read is possibly not consistent. If the check succeeds the NM vector is consistent. This is only true if the host takes less than 64 cycles to read the NM vector, because the cycle counter values repeat after 63 cycles. 
     Requirement 98: If NMIndicationBit is set but the PayloadLength of the frame is not large enough to hold the complete NM vector an error shall be indicated and vGloNMVec shall not be changed. 
     Requirement 99: If NMIndicationBit is set and the NullframeIndicationBit is set an error shall be indicated and vGloNMVec shall not be changed 
     Interaction with Message Data Handling 
     Requirement 100: The message interface shall provide means for the host processor to determine the values of the NM vector (fLocNMVec) in frames to be transmitted. 
     For all received frames provided to the host the message interface shall also provide the values of fNMIndBit and fLocNMVec. fNMIndBit and fLocNMVec represent the values for NM indication bit and NM vector contained in the (received) frame. 
     Timer Service 
     Description 
     This service allows the synchronization of the application with the global time in the FlexRay cluster. Timers may be absolute (specific cycle and macrotick) or relative (to the time when they are started), and they may repetitive or single shot timers. 
     Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface 
     Timer events are triggered depending on the latest values of vMacrotick and vCycle. 
     Interaction with Configuration Data Handling 
     Requirement 101: Timer events shall be contained in static or variable configuration data. 
     Requirement 102: A timer event shall be defined unambiguously so that the time (cycle number and macrotick) of activation can be determined. 
     Interaction with Control Data Handling 
     Timers as well as the timer interrupt can be enabled or disabled during NormalOperation. 
     Interaction with Status Data Handling 
     Requirement 103: A dedicated interrupt shall be provided to the host processor that is triggered when a timer has elapsed. 
     Error Signaling Service 
     Interaction with Control Data Handling 
     Requirement 104: Error signaling data shall be reset upon exit of the CC configuration state. 
     Interaction with Status Data Handling 
     Requirement 105: An locked status indicator shall be provided that is set when vOffsetCorrection has reached the red region (vOffsetCorrection&gt;gOftsetCorrectionOut). 
     Requirement 106: A locked status indicator shall be provided that is set if vBgsmError is TRUE. This status indicator shall be reset when vBgsmErrorAck is TRUE. 
     Requirement 107: A locked status indicator shall be provided that is set when a media access test symbol (MTS) was received during the symbol window 
     Symbol Handling Service 
     Description 
     This service allows to control which symbols are transmitted during the symbol window. Moreover it provides information to the host processor about the symbol received during the symbol window. This service has the following features:
         Media access test symbol handling—is a required feature to perform the media access test.   Status symbol handling—is an optional feature to handle status normal symbol and status alarm symbol.
 
Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface
       

     The value of vTXSymbol shall provided on request through the GetConfigurationData interface if the argument is “vTXSymbol”. (TBD—formalize and standardize description) 
     Interaction with Configuration Data Handling 
     The length of the symbol window is a cluster constant and therefore determined by static configuration. 
     Interaction with Control Data Handling 
     Requirement 108: Means shall be provided to control the value of vTXSymbol. 
     Interaction with Status Data Handling 
     Requirement 109: The value of vRXSymbol shall be provided as free indicator to the host processor interface. 
     Host Interrupt Service 
     Description 
     This service checks conditions to generate interrupt requests as well as conditions to reset these requests. 
     Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface 
     Depending on the interrupts a FlexRay controller implementation supports this CHI service may check conditions for interrupt generation or reset upon data provide through PutFrame, upon the protocol state provided through PutProtocolState and on the error status vector provided by PutErrorStatusVector. 
     Interaction with Configuration Data Handling 
     None required. 
     Interaction with Control: Data Handling 
     Requirement 110: Means shall be provided to control data handling to selectively enable and disable every interrupt generated by this service. 
     Interaction with Status Data Handling 
     Requirement 111: This CHI service generates a timer interrupt request upon request of the Timer service. 
     Depending on the additional interrupts a FlexRay controller implementation supports further interrupt requests are generated. 
     Interaction with Message Data Handling 
     Depending on the additional interrupts a FlexRay controller implementation supports upon reception or transmission of specific frames. 
     Optical Diagnosis Service 
     Description 
     This service provides information provided by the optical transceiver indicating if the optical power is below a given threshold. 
     Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface 
     Requirement 112: An interface function PutOpticalDiagnosisFlags shall be provided. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 47 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 PutOpticalDiagnosisFlags 
               
               
                 PutOpticalDiagnosisFlags ( &lt;flag_A&gt;, &lt;flag_B&gt; ) 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Purpose 
                 Indicate that too low of an optical power is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 received by the optical transceivers 
               
               
                   
                 Arguments 
                 values of the optical diagnosis flags; 
               
               
                   
                   
                 TRUE if the optical power is sufficient 
               
               
                   
                   
                 &lt;flag_A&gt;  [TRUE, FALSE] 
               
               
                   
                   
                 &lt;flag_B&gt;  [TRUE, FALSE] 
               
               
                   
                 Return values 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Interaction with Status Data Handling 
     Requirement 113: One optical diagnosis indicator is provided for each channel. 
     Interaction with Message Data Handling 
     Depending on the additional interrupts a FlexRay controller implementation supports upon reception or transmission of specific frames. 
     Bus Driver Interface 
     Introduction 
     This chapter describes the interface to the electrical FlexRay Bus Driver (BDe). This interface comprises three components, the interface to the FlexRay Communication Controller (CC), the interface to the FlexRay Bus Guardian (BG) and the interface to the host. A description of the BDe operation can be found in  FlexRay Electrical Physical Layer Preliminary Functional Specification , v1.0, Philips Corporation, 2002 and in Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’. 
     Bus Driver—Communication Controller Interface 
     Overview 
     The Bus Driver—Communication Controller Interface is shown in  FIG. 77 . The interface between the BDe and the CC comprises three digital electrical signals, two that are inputs to the BDe from the CC (named TxD and TxEN), and one that is an output from the BDe to the CC (named RxD). 
     The following description is valid, when the BDe is in BDe_Normal mode. 
     TxEN is an input to the BDe from the CC. It is used by the CC to enable the BDe to drive the Data — 0 or Data — 1 state onto the channel.
         While the CC maintains a logical HIGH state on TxEN, the BDe signals Idle onto the channel.   While the CC maintains a logical LOW state on TxEN, the BDe drives Data — 0 or Data — 1 onto the channel (depending on TxD input, see below), but only if the BG concurrently permits the BDe to do so (see below). If the BG does not permit this, the BDe continues to signal Idle onto the channel.       

     TxD is an input to the BDe from the CC used by the CC to transfer the actual signal sequence to the BDe for transmission onto the channel. This signal sequence is the signal stream to be transmitted. With a logical LOW state on TxD the BDe drives Data — 0 and with a logical HIGH state on TxD the BDe drives Data — 1 onto the channel, when the BDe has the permission from the BG and is enabled by the CC via TxEN. 
     RxD is an output from the BDe to the CC used by the BDe to transfer the actual received signal sequence to the CC. It is the received data stream. RxD is driven to a logical LOW state when the channel signals Data — 0. When the channel signals Idle or Data — 1, RxD is driven to a logical HIGH state. 
     When the BDe is not in BDe_Normal mode, it signals Idle onto the channel. 
     Bus Driver—Bus Guardian Interface 
     Overview 
     The Bus Driver—Bus Guardian Interface is shown in  FIG. 78 . The interface between the BDe and the BG comprises two digital electrical signals, one input to the BDe (named BGE) and one output from the BDe (named RxEN). 
     BGE is an input to the BDe from the BG. It is used by the BG to permit the BDe to drive the states Data — 0 and Data — 1 onto the channel.
         While the BG maintains a logical LOW state on BGE, the BDe signals Idle onto the channel.   While the BG maintains a logical HIGH state on BGE, the BDe is permitted to drive Data — 0 or Data — 1 onto the channel depending on TxD and TxEN input (see above).       

     The following description is valid, when the BDe is in BDe_Normal mode. 
     RxEN is an output from the BDe to the BG used by the BDe to indicate whether the channel is in the Idle state or not. 
     While the channel is in the Idle state RxEN is driven to a logical HIGH state. 
     While the channel signals Data — 0 or Data — 1 RxEN is driven to a logical LOW state. 
     When the BDe is not in BDe_Normal mode, then RxD and RxEN shall be in a logical HIGH state. 
     Bus Driver—Host Interface 
     The bus driver host interface is a product specific interface. It enables the host to control the operating modes of the BDe and to read error conditions from the BDe. This interface also has to signal the waking source (local wake-up event or remote wake-up via wake-up symbol on the bus). 
     The interface may be realized with a serial communication interface (e.g. “SPI”) or using hard wired signals (e.g. dedicated pins for operating mode control and error signaling). 
     A description of the BDe operating modes is provided in Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’. 
     Interface Signal Timing 
     BDe Output Signals: RxD and RxEN 
     The expected timing of RxD and RxEN is depicted in  FIG. 79  (frame transmitted in the static part of the communication cycle). 
     The Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) that a node receives may be shorter than the TSS that was originally sent. The reason for this is that active stars may truncate a portion of the TSS. RxEN will stay on logical LOW state after the last transmitted bit for the duration of the MedialdleDetectionTime. (See Chapter ‘Coding and Decoding’ for more information about the TSS and the document  FlexRay Electrical Physical Layer Preliminary Functional Specification , v1.0, Philips Corporation, 2002 for the effect of truncation) 
     A node that transmits a frame can read back its own transmission on RxD if loop back is provided by the BDe. In case that the last bit was transmitted as Data — 1 (frames in static and dynamic part, symbols: EIS, SNS, or SAS), only the transmitting node may see a different behavior (depicted in red) of RxD after the end of its own frame or symbol than all other receivers in the network. This happens when common mode chokes are used with a significant stray inductance. 
     Since the symbols WU, CAS, MTS end on Data — 0 the situation is slightly different in these cases. The RxD and RxEN behavior is shown in  FIG. 80 . 
     The Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) that a node receives may be shorter than the TSS that was originally sent (see above). This effect might not be compensated by the effect of enlarging the symbol by the MedialdleDetectionTime. The transmitting node may see, when reading back its own transmission, the behavior that is depicted by the dotted red line, when common mode chokes with a significant stray inductance are used. 
     BDe Input Signals: TxD and TxEN 
     The required timing of TxD and TxEN is depicted in  FIG. 81 . 
     With the start of the first bit to be transmitted the TxEN is switched to logical LOW state and returned to logical HIGH state at the end of the last bit that was to be transmitted. Edges in TxEN are expected to be synchronous with the first and last edge within the TxD signal. 
     Bus Guardian Interface 
     Introduction 
     This chapter covers conformance requirements that apply to the interface between the communication controller (CC) and de-centralized bus guardian (BG) functional blocks. The decentralized bus guardian protects the communication channel(s) from improper transmissions by a faulty or misconfigured communication controller that attempts to transmit outside of its pre-configured schedule. The bus guardian has independent knowledge of the node&#39;s communication schedule and restricts transmission to only those times allowed by the schedule. 
     This chapter specifies the interface between the bus guardian and the communication controller and gives an overview of the bus guardian scheduling scheme. It also establishes the requirements on the BG and CC behavior with respect to the interface signals between the BG and CC. For a detailed functional specification of the bus guardian please refer to  FlexRay Bus Guardian Preliminary Functional Specification , v1.2, Philips Corporation, 2002. 
     The second part of this chapter contains a specification of the BG schedule monitoring service provided by the communication controller. The purpose of this service is to supervise the bus guardian schedule and inform the host when a mismatch is detected between the communication schedule of the BG and CC. 
     BG-CC Interface Signals 
     Table 48 shows a list of bus guardian inputs and outputs at the interface between the bus guardian and the communication controller. The block diagram shown in  FIG. 82  describes how bus guardians are connected to a communication controller in a dual-channel FlexRay node. Note that the signals TxEN and BGE are associated with the particular channel. There must be dedicated TxEN and BGE signals for each channel (Refer to FlexRay Requirements Specification, Req. 219 G: The bus guardian must not disable access to more than one channel, i.e., one bus guardian per channel is required.). In addition to the BG-CC interface signals the block diagram also shows the RxEN signal from the bus driver, which is required for local evaluation of the media access test. 
     BG-CC Interface Signals Overview 
                     TABLE 48                  BG - CC Interface Signals (Data direction       DIR relative to the bus guardian.       ‘I’ represents an input to the BG,       ‘O’ represents an output from the BG.)                             Symbol   DIR   ACTIVE   Description               MT   I   rising edge   Macrotick - clock signal from CC       BGT   I   rising edge   Bus guardian tick - clock signal from CC       ARM   I   falling edge   ARM trigger signal from CC       TxEN   I   LOW   Transmit enable signal from CC                   TxEN = HIGH: transmission inactive                   TxEN = LOW: transmission active       BGE   O   HIGH   Transmission enable signal for Bus Driver                   BGE = HIGH: transmission enabled                   BGE = LOW: transmission disabled                    
BG-CC Interface Signals Description
 
MT
 
     The MT signal, generated by the CC, is used as a clock signal for the BG scheduler. The rising edge of the MT signal must be aligned to the start of the CC&#39;s internal locally corrected macrotick. The CC shall ensure that any internal macrotick corrections are reflected in the MT signal during the same macrotick (i.e., the MT signal is an accurate representation of the CC&#39;s internal locally corrected macrotick clock). 
     BGT 
     The BGT signal, generated by the CC, is used for supervision of the MT period. The BGT period is not affected by clock corrections and depends only on the frequency of the CC&#39;s crystal oscillator and a frequency divider at the CC. 
     ARM 
     The ARM signal is generated by the CC and indicates the start of the communication cycle to the BG. The ARM signal from the CC is generated such that it is synchronous to the MT signal (ARM edges aligned to rising edge of the MT signal). The falling edge of the ARM signal defines the ARM trigger event for BG cycle synchronization. After node startup the BG schedule needs to be synchronized to the CC schedule. This is achieved by means of the first ARM trigger event that is detected by the BG after node startup. Subsequent ARM trigger events are not required for cycle synchronization, but for supervision of the configured cycle length. The BG checks for the regular occurrence of ARM trigger events at the start of each cycle by counting the number of MT periods between ARM trigger events and comparing the result to the expected BG cycle time as calculated below. 
     BGE 
     The BGE signal is generated by the bus guardian and controls transmit access to the communication medium. Any transmit access to the medium shall be disabled as long as the BGE signal is in an inactive condition (BGE=LOW). The BGE signal is also provided to the CC as an input signal that is used for supervision of the BG schedule. Please refer to the BG schedule monitoring service described below. 
     TxEN 
     The TxEN signal is generated by the CC and indicates that the CC is currently attempting to transmit on the particular channel. This signal shall be evaluated by the BG for supervision of the CC schedule. The BG shall detect a schedule mismatch if the TxEN signal is active while the BGE signal is inactive (Refer to the BG Functional Specification for details of the schedule monitoring features provided by the BG.). 
     Bus Guardian Scheduling Scheme 
       FIG. 83  shows an overview of the relation between CC schedule and BG schedule at the communication segment level. For each segment of the CC schedule a corresponding segment of the BG schedule shall be configured. The BG static segment and the BG watchdog disable time are mandatory parts of the BG schedule. The BG static segment must contain at least one static slot. The minimum length of the BG watchdog disable time is 1 MT period. 
     Parts of the BG schedule that may be used for transmission are separated by inter-slot gaps (ISG). This applies to static slots, the BG dynamic segment, and the BG symbol window. The BG shall enable transmission one macrotick prior to the expected beginning of a transmission and disable it one macrotick after the expected end. Note that a minimum ISG length of 2 macroticks is required in order to fulfill this requirement. 
     The ISG contains two optional elements gdBGpreEnablePart and gdBGpostEnablePart. Alignment of the BG schedule to the CC action points is achieved by configuration of gdBGpreEnablePart. while configuration of gdBGpostEnablePart allows to increase the safety margin between transmissions. 
       FIG. 84  illustrates the BG-CC timing during the static segment. Transmit access is enabled gdBGpreEnablePart macroticks after the beginning of a static slot and stays enabled for gdBGStaticSlot+2 macroticks. The static slot is completed by a period of gdBGpostEnablePart macroticks, during which transmission is disabled by the BG. 
     The BG communication cycle start is defined to be at the beginning of static slot  1 . The BG shall assume the ARM trigger events happen at the BG cycle start. 
     At the beginning of the dynamic segment two possible cases must be distinguished (Refer to section ‘Dynamic Segment’).  FIG. 85  shows the BG-CC timing of a configuration with gdActionPointOffset &gt;gdMSActionPointOffset. In this case transmit access is enabled one macrotick prior to the action point at the CC.  FIG. 86  shows the BG-CC timing of a configuration with gdActionPointOffset≦gdMSActionPointOffset. In this case transmit access is enabled gdMSActionPointOffset−gdActionPointOffset+1 macroticks prior to the action point at the CC. 
     In general, transmit access is enabled gdBGpreEnablePart macroticks after the beginning of the dynamic segment, independent from the configuration of gdMSActionPointOffset and stays enabled for gdBGDynSegment+2 macroticks. 
       FIG. 87  shows the BG-CC timing at the end of the dynamic segment as well as during the BG symbol window and the BG watchdog disable time (WDT). During the BG watchdog disable time supervision of the MT period is disabled. This allows clock offset correction to shorten or lengthen macroticks by an amount that would exceed the configured limits of the macrotick supervision. 
     The BG may be configured to enable or disable transmission during the BG dynamic segment and the BG symbol window, respectively. Transmit access is enabled gdBGpreEnablePart macroticks after the beginning of the symbol window and stays enabled for gdBGSymbolWindow+2 macroticks. The BG disables transmission during the BG watchdog disable time gdBGWatchdogDisable. 
     The BG shall support the application of the media access test during the symbol window, i.e. in addition to disabling transmit access a transmit attempt by the CC shall not be detected as schedule violation error. The purpose of the media access test is to check whether the BG successfully disables transmission. The BG supports application of the media access test if transmission during the symbol window is disabled (pBGSymWinEnable=0) and media access test is enabled (pBGMatEnable=1). Table 49 describes the configurable behavior of the BG during the BG symbol window. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 49 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 BG Behavior During the BG Symbol Window 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Media access test 
                 BG behavior during BG symbol window 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 enabled 
                 If TxEN is active during the BG symbol window 
               
               
                 (pBGMatEnable = 1) 
                 the BG does not enter BG_FailSilent mode 
               
               
                   
                 and does not report a schedule violation error to 
               
               
                   
                 the host controller. 
               
               
                   
                 Local evaluation of the media access test is 
               
               
                   
                 performed. The BG reports a local media 
               
               
                   
                 access test error to the host controller if 
               
               
                   
                 TXEN and RXEN signals are simultaneously 
               
               
                   
                 active during the BG watchdog disable time. 
               
               
                 disabled 
                 If TxEN is active during the BG symbol 
               
               
                 (pBGMatEnable = 0) 
                 window the BG enters BG_FailSilent mode 
               
               
                   
                 and reports a schedule violation error to the host 
               
               
                   
                 controller. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The relation between BG configuration parameters and global protocol parameters is defined by:
         gdBGStaticSlot+ISG=gdStaticSlot   gdBGDynSegment+ISG=gNumberOfMinislots*gdMinislot +(gdActionPointOffset−gdMSActionPointOffset)       

     The above equation only holds when gNumberOfMinislots !=0; The term (gdActionPointOffset−gdMSActionPointOffset) only applies if gdActionPointOffset&gt;gdMSActionPointOffset.
         gdBGSymbolWindow+ISG=gdSymbolWindow       

     The above equation only holds when gdSymbolWindow !=0.
         gdBGWatchdogDisable=gdNIT   gdBGpreEnablePart+1=gdActionPointOffset       

     The inter-slot gap (ISG) is defined by: 
     ISG=gdBGpreEnablePart+gdBGpostEnablePart+2 
     Using BG configuration parameters the cycle time is calculated by:
 
BG cycle time (MT)=gNumberOfStaticSlots*(gdBGStaticSlot+ISG) +gdBGDynSegment+ISG +gdBGSymbolWindow+ISG +gdBGWatchdogDisable
 
gdBGDynSegment is an optional dynamic segment. (The BG dynamic segment and the corresponding ISG are not part of the BG schedule if gdBGDynSegment=0 is configured.) gdBGSymbolWindow is an optional symbol window. (The BG symbol window and the corresponding ISG are not part of the BG schedule if gdSymbolWindow=0 is configured.)
 
     A summary of configuration parameters related to the bus guardian schedule is shown in Table 50. 
                     TABLE 50                  Bus Guardian Schedule Configuration Parameters                             Name   Range   Unit   Remarks               gdBGStaticSlot   0 to 4095   MT   Static slot length (This does                   not include the                   inter-slot gap.)       gdBGDynSegment   0 to 65534   MT   BG dynamic segment                   length (The BG supports                   static mode operation if                   gdBGDynSegment = 0 is                   configured.)       gdBGSymbolWindow   0 to 255   MT   BG symbol window length                   (Configurations without                   symbol window are                   supported if                   gdBGSymbolWindow = 0                   is configured.)       gdBGpreEnablePart   0 to TBD   MT   ISG part that precedes                   a guarded schedule element       gdBGpostEnablePart   0 to TBD   MT   ISG part that follows                   a guarded schedule element       gdBGWatchdogDisable   1 to 255   MT   BG watchdog disable                   time (Part of the BG                   schedule reserved for the                   application of clock                   offset correction.)       gdBGArmActive   1   MT   Duration of the ARM                   signal low condition                    
BG-CC Synchronization
 
     The FlexRay bus guardian approach maintains synchronization of the local BG schedule to the global time by basing all BG scheduling operations on a corrected macrotick signal (MT) being provided by the CC. This allows the BG to perform its media access protection function (i.e. restricting transmit access to the configured schedule) while being continuously synchronized to the global clock using the clock synchronization algorithm of the CC. 
     A second clock signal, bus guardian tick (BGT), used for supervising the period of the MT signal, is provided by the CC. The communication controller shall generate the BGT signal such that its period is independent from the clock correction performed by the CC (For example, the BGT signal could be derived from the application of a programmable prescaler to the oscillator input of the Communication Controller.). The bus guardian shall use the BGT signal to perform a supervision of the duration of the corrected macrotick by checking if the MT/BGT ratio deviates from the nominal ratio by more than a pre-defined configurable limit. Acceptable deviations from the nominal limit may be caused by the clock rate correction algorithm as it increases or decreases the length of certain macroticks to maintain the overall clock rate. 
     BG-CC Interface Requirements 
     Table 51 shows the BG-CC interface timing requirements. Note the specified restrictions have been introduced as a result of certain semiconductor technology limitations. 
                     TABLE 51                  BG-CC Interface Timing Requirements (These timing       requirements are implementation-specific.)                             Name   Description   Range/Value   Units               gdBGMinMTNom   Minimum nominal   1.0   μs           MT period       gdBGMinMTCorr   Minimum corrected   0.5   μs           MT period       pdBGMTPeriod   Configured nominal   TBD   μs           MT period       gdBGMinPwMT   Minimum MT pulse   0.4 *   —           width (low or high)   pdMTPeriod       gdBGMinBGTPeriod   Minimum BGT period   0.25   μs       pdBGTPeriod   Configured BGT period   TBD   μs       gdMinPwBGT   Minimum BGT pulse   0.4 *   —           width (low or high)   pdBGTPeriod                    
BG Schedule Monitoring Service
 
Background
 
     The BG schedule monitoring (BGSM) service is a service that is provided by the FlexRay communication controller. The purpose of this service is to assess that the execution of the bus guardian schedule matches the execution of the respective schedule of the CC. 
     Proposed Functional Specification 
     Structure 
     The bus guardian schedule monitor uses the following input signals to perform its function (see  FIG. 88 ): The BGE signal, the rule to be monitored iBgsmRule and the acknowledgement signal vBgsmErrorAck as inputs. The BGSM function produces the output signal vBgsmError. The CC protocol state machine reads the parameters pdBgeStaticDuration, pdBgeDynamicDuration, pdBgeSymbolDuration, pBgsmDynSegDisabled, and pBgsmSymWinDisabled The following constraints apply to these parameters:
     BGEε{0, 1},   iBgsmRuleε{BGE_X, BGE_ENABLED, BGE_DISABLED},   vBgsmErrorAckε{FALSE, TRUE},   vBgsmErrorε{FALSE, TRUE},   pdBgeStaticDuration[MT]ε{1 . . . TBD},   pdBgeDynamicDuration[MT]ε{1 . . . TBD},   pdBgeSymbolDuration[MT]ε{1 . . . TBD},   pBgsmDynSegDisabledε{FALSE, TRUE},   pBgsmSymWinDisabledε{FALSE, TRUE}.   

       FIG. 89  depicts a state machine that describes the operation of the BGSM service. 
     Interaction of the BG Schedule Monitor with the Protocol Operation 
     Background 
     Protocol operation can be separated in two distinct phases: the initial unsynchronized startup phase and the subsequent synchronized operation phase. The two phases differ as follows:
         during the initial unsynchronized startup phase the communication controller has no knowledge of the system wide synchronized time, i.e. the slot counter and the cycle counter are not synchronized.   during the synchronized operation phase the communication controller has knowledge of the system wide synchronized time, i.e. the slot counter and the cycle counter are synchronized.
 
Unsynchronized Startup Phase
       

     Within the unsynchronized startup phase the BGSM shall execute the accept all rule, i.e. iBgsmRule is set to BGE_X. 
     Synchronized Operation Phase 
     Within the synchronized operation phase the communication schedule is used to access the communication media. A communication schedule consists of the following constituents: the static segment, the dynamic segment, the symbol window and the network idle time (NIT). 
     Static Segment 
     The configuration parameter pdBgeStaticDuration defines the duration of the BGE active phase during transmission slots in the static segment. The relationship between pdBgeStaticDuration and other configuration parameters related to the static segment is given by:
 
pdBgeStaticDuration=gdBGStaticSlot+2=gdStaticSlot−gdBGpreEnablePart−gdBGpostEnablePart
 
with:
 
gdBGpreEnablePart=gdActionPointOffset−1
 
gdBGpostEnablePart=gdStaticSlot−pdBgeStaticDuration−gdActionPointoffset+1
 
Transmission Slot
 
     Starting with the first macrotick of the transmission slot the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpreEnablePart == 0) OR 
               
               
                   
                 (gdBGpostEnablePart == 0 AND 
               
               
                   
                 previous static slot == enabled) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with the second macrotick of the transmission slot the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpreEnablePart &gt; 1) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with macrotick gdActionPointOffset of the transmission slot the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpreEnablePart &gt; 0) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with macrotick gdActionPointOffset+1 of the transmission slot iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_ENABLED. 
     Starting with macrotick pdBgeStaticDuration+gdActionPointOffset the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpostEnablePart &gt; 0) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with macrotick pdBgeStaticDuration+gdActionPointOffset+1 the following rule shall be applied: 
                                            if (gdBGpostEnablePart &gt; 1)                         iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED;                         end;                        
Reception slot
 
     Starting with the first macrotick of the reception slot the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (previous static slot == enabled) AND 
                   
               
               
                   
                 (gdBGpostEnablePart == 0) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with the second macrotick of the reception slot iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED. 
       FIG. 90  shows the interaction in the static segment.  FIG. 91  shows the interaction in the static segment for a minimum ISG length. 
     Dynamic Segment 
     The configuration parameter pdBgeDynamicDuration defines the duration of the BGE active phase during the dynamic segment. The relationship between pdBgeDynamicDuration and other configuration parameters related to the dynamic segment is given by:
 
pdBgeDynamicDuration=gdBGDynSegment+2=gNumberOfMinislots*gdMinislot−gdBGpreEnablePatt−gdBGpostEnablePart
 
(Note: The equation gNumberOfMinislots only holds when gNumberOfMinislots !=0.)
 
with:
 
gdBGpreEnablePart=gdActionPointOffset−1
 
gdBGpostEnablePart=gdStaticSlot−pdBgeStaticDuration−gdActionPointoffset+1
 
     The following rules apply only to configurations, that contain a dynamic segment (gdNumberOfMinislots !=0). The configuration parameter pBgsmDynSegDisabled indicates if transmission during the dynamic segment shall be enabled or disabled by the BG and controls which set of rules has to be applied. 
     pBgsmDynSegDisabled=TRUE 
     Starting with the first macrotick of the dynamic segment the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (last static slot == enabled) AND 
               
               
                   
                 (gdBGpostEnablePart == 0) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with the second macrotick of the dynamic segment iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED. 
     pBgsmDynSegDisabled=FALSE 
     Starting with the first macrotick of the dynamic segment the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpreEnablePart == 0) OR 
               
               
                   
                 (last static slot == enabled) AND 
               
               
                   
                 (gdBGpostEnablePart == 0) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with the second macrotick of the dynamic segment the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpreEnablePart &gt; 1) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting macrotick gdActionPointOffset of the dynamic segment iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X. 
     Starting with macrotick gdActionPointOffset+1iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_ENABLED. 
     Starting with macrotick pdBgeDynamicDuration+gdActionPointOffset the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpostEnablePart &gt; 0) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with macrotick pdBgeDynamicDuration+gdActionPointOffset+1 the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpostEnablePart &gt; 1) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
       FIG. 92  shows the interaction in the dynamic segment with the symbol window disabled. 
     Symbol Window 
     The configuration parameter pdBgeSymbolDuration defines the duration of the BGE active phase during the symbol window. The relationship between pdBgeSymbolDuration and other configuration parameters related to the symbol window is given by:
 
pdBgeSymbolDuration=gdBGSymbolWindow+2=gdSymbolWindow−gdBGpreEnablePart−gdBGpostEnablePart
 
     The following rules apply only to configurations, that contain a symbol window (gdSymbolWindow !=0). The configuration parameter pBgsmSymWinDisabled indicates if transmission during the symbol window shall be enabled or disabled by the BG and controls which set of rules has to be applied. 
     pBgsmSymWinDisabled=TRUE 
     Starting with the first macrotick of the symbol window the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpostEnablePart == 0) AND 
               
               
                   
                 (pBgsmDynSegDisabled == FALSE) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with the second macrotick of the symbol window iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED. 
     pBgsmSymWinDisabled=FALSE 
     Starting with the first macrotick of the symbol window the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpreEnablePart == 0) OR 
               
               
                   
                 (gdBGpostEnablePart == 0 AND 
               
               
                   
                 pBgsmDynSegDisabled == FALSE) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with the second macrotick of the symbol window the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpreEnablePart &gt; 1) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with macrotick gdActionPointOffset of the symbol window the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpreEnablePart &gt; 0) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with macrotick gdActionPointOffset+1 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_ENABLED. 
     Starting with macrotick pdBgeSymbolDuration+gdActionPointOffset the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpostEnablePart &gt; 0) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with macrotick pdBgeSymbolDuration+gdActionPointOffset+1 the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpostEnablePart &gt; 1) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
       FIG. 93  shows the interaction in the symbol window and the network idle time. 
     Network Idle Time 
     Starting with the first macrotick of the network idle time the following rule shall be applied: 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 if (gdBGpostEnablePart == 0) AND 
               
               
                   
                 (pBgsmSymWinDisabled == FALSE) 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 else 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 end; 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Starting with the second macrotick of the network idle time iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED. 
     Host Interaction 
     Upon detection of a rule violation the communication controller shall signal this violation to the host computer by means of the flag vBgsmError in the host interface. 
     The flag shall remain set until it is cleared by the host controller. 
     Comments 
     Currently it is not foreseen to have the option to deactivate the schedule monitor. Note with systems operating without a BG this implies the vBgsmError will indicate a permanent BG error as soon as the (expected) first mismatch between the configured rule and the BGE signal occurs. 
     Event Triggered Mode 
     Introduction 
     This chapter describes the event triggered communication mode of the FlexRay communication protocol. In contrast to the time triggered communication mode, the repetition interval of the communication cycle may vary in the event triggered communication mode. 
     Operating Modes 
     FlexRay supports two operating modes for communication cycle execution (see  FIG. 94 , in which the FlexRay communication operation modes are shown):
     A time triggered communication mode, where the timebase is generated either by a distributed clock algorithm or under control of a communication master   An event triggered communication mode   

     The different operating modes are described below. 
     Time Triggered Communication Cycles 
     This mode is described in detail in the media access chapter (see Chapter ‘Media Access Scheme’). 
     Event Triggered Communication Cycles 
     In the event triggered communication mode the communication cycle is always initiated by a master node. The master node may initiate the communication cycle based on the input of a number of sources. The management of these sources is under host control via the CHI. The following functionality is the minimum required (see  FIG. 95 , in which the event triggered communication handling in the host, the CHI and the CC is shown). 
     A mechanism that allows the host to initiate a communication cycle via the CHI. There are many means by which this could be accomplished. An example is a CHI element that, when written by the host, would cause the initiation of a communication cycle. If the host initiates a new trigger during a communication cycle, a new communication cycle shall be triggered immediately after the end of the current communication cycle. 
     A configurable timer to initiate periodic communication cycles. The CHI provides a function to start/stop the timer. If the timer is enabled a communication cycle is started when the timer expires. 
     A direct hardware input to the Communication Controller to trigger the communication cycle by an external hardware pin. The CHI gives the host the opportunity to configure the direct hardware input (enable/disable, edge sensitivity, etc.). 
     All CHI sources can raise the CC Trigger signal (OR function). The protocol engine interface that is required is the CC Trigger Input. 
     If the CC trigger signal at a dedicated master occurs the communication cycle is initiated by sending an event indication symbol (EIS) within the trigger window. The new cycle is then started after the NIT with frame ID  1  is sent by the master. 
     8. In the event triggered communication mode bus guardian protection is not required. 
     The clocks on the master and slave nodes are synchronized by sending and receiving the EIS symbol. The FlexRay protocol does not specifically handle a fault that prevents the communication master from sending the EIS or frame ID  1 . There are possible recovery strategies (reconfiguration of the system to use a new master, for example), but these must be implemented at the application level and are not part of the protocol. 
     The event triggered mode supports two channels. The master controls both channels in a two-channel system. The master sends the EIS and frame ID  1  at the same time on all configured channels. The slave nodes need not be connected to both channels. If a slave is connected to both channels, the channel with a correct EIS symbol in combination with the frame ID  1  wins the arbitration and determines the cycle start on the slave. 
     The use of an EIS symbol in combination with the frame with ID  1  provides the following advantages: 
     Slave nodes can react on a trigger event on the master node with minimal time delay on the assumption of the FlexRay media access scheme. Therefore the re-use of the FlexRay media access scheme is possible. 
     Cycle counter will be incremented in the master and the slave at the (cycle start). Therefore nearly the same frame acceptance method can be applied 
     Re-ordering of the messages in the dynamic part can be done within the NIT 
     Media Access—Event Triggered Mode 
     The communication cycle is the fundamental element of the media access scheme within FlexRay. It is defined by means of a timing hierarchy. 
     Timing Hierarchy 
     The timing hierarchy consists of four timing hierarchy levels as shown in  FIG. 96 . 
     The highest level, the communication cycle level, defines the communication cycle. It contains the static segment, the dynamic segment, the symbol window and the network idle time (NIT). Within the static segment a static time division multiple access scheme is used to arbitrate transmissions as specified in Section ‘Static Segment’. Within the dynamic segment a dynamic mini-slotting based scheme is used to arbitrate transmissions as specified in Section ‘Dynamic Segment’. The symbol window is a communication period in which one symbol out of a defined set of symbols can be transmitted on the network as specified in Section ‘Symbol Window’. The static segment, the dynamic segment and the symbol window form the network communication time (NCT), a period during which network wide communication takes place. The network idle time defines a communication-free period that concludes each communication cycle. 
     The next lower level, the arbitration grid level, contains the arbitration grid that forms the backbone of FlexRay media arbitration. In the static segment the arbitration grid consists of consecutive time intervals, called static slots, in the dynamic segment the arbitration grid consists of consecutive time intervals, called minislots. 
     The arbitration grid level builds on the macrotick level that is defined by the macrotick. Specific macrotick boundaries are called action points. These are dedicated instants at which transmissions shall start (in the static segment, dynamic segment and symbol window) and shall end (only in the dynamic segment). 
     The lowest level in the hierarchy is defined by the microtick that is covered in Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’. 
     Communication Cycle Execution 
     In the event triggered mode the communication cycle is executed under the control of a single master. Each node enters a phase called the cycle gap immediately after the end of the dynamic segment. If there is no dynamic segment the cycle gap begins at the end of the static segment. In the cycle gap the execution of the communication cycle is suspended until an event indication symbol (EIS) is received. The master issues the EIS symbol. Upon reception of the EIS symbol all nodes resume execution of the communication cycle. 
       FIG. 97  illustrates the execution of the event triggered communication cycle. 
     Event Indication Symbol (EIS) 
     The Event Indication Symbol (EIS) is defined in Chapter ‘Coding and Decoding’. The second falling edge is used as the synchronization event (SyncEvent) on master and slave nodes. 
     The EIS symbol is not required to be collision resilient. The trigger condition in the EIS is illustrated in  FIG. 98 . 
     Clock Synchronization in Event Triggered Mode 
     Principle 
     Communication cycle timing in the event triggered mode is based on the EIS symbol. Since the start of a communication cycle is not predictable (and therefore the duration of a communication cycle is variable) there is no notion of time that can be used by the slave nodes to perform a clock rate correction, the EIS is simply used as a synchronizing event by the slave nodes and all subsequent timing is based on nominal (uncorrected) macroticks based on a timing grid that is set up by the arrival time of the EIS. The following paragraphs define the details of the clock synchronization for master and slave nodes. 
     Clock Synchronization of the Master Node 
     After the arrival of the CC trigger event on the master node, the symbol window starts and the master sends the EIS symbol within the symbol window at the beginning of the next microtick. While sending the EIS symbol, the timer vEDMTimer is initialized at the SyncEvent point with the configuration value pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT (The parameter pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT is expressed in microticks to minimize timing jitter.), which describes the duration between the SyncEvent point of the EIS and the end of the NIT. 
     When the timer vEDMTimer expires at the end of phase b (see  FIG. 97 ) the new communication cycle is started, the master initializes the macrotick and microtick counters with 0, and the cycle counter is incremented. 
     Beginning with the new cycle the master transmits a frame with ID  1 . The cycle counter field of this frame is set to the master&#39;s local cycle counter. 
     Clock Synchronization of the Slave Node 
     If a slave is connected to two channels, the first valid reception of a EIS symbol on one of the two channels will be taken. 
     When a slave recognizes the reception of a valid EIS symbol, the timer vEDMTimer is provisionally initialized at the SyncEvent point with the configuration value pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT, which quantifies the duration between the SyncEvent point of the received EIS symbol and the end of the NIT (The parameter pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT is expressed in terms of the SyncEvent of the received EIS, and therefore should include the effects of any fixed network propagation delay. The parameter is expressed in microticks to minimize timing jitter.). The timer vEDMTimer will be committed when the EIS symbol was correctly received. The parameter pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT is configured during soft reset. When the timer vEDMTimer expires at the end of phase c the new communication cycle is started, the slave initializes the macrotick and microtick counters with 0, and the local cycle counter is incremented. Afterwards the slave waits to receive the frame with ID  1 . 
     Using this procedure all slave nodes that receive the EIS and the master node switch consistently to the next communication cycle. During the startup phase the process is done in a different way (see below). 
     If the slave does not recognize the reception of a valid EIS symbol no action is performed. The local time proceeds until the reception of a new EIS symbol and the timing monitoring (see below) will signal an error. 
     Frame Processing in Event Triggered Mode 
     Frame Processing of the Master Node 
     The master node shall process frames using the procedure defined in Chapter ‘Frame Processing’ at the beginning of this document. 
     Frame Processing of the Slave Node 
     If no valid frame with frame ID  1  on at least one channel is correctly received in slot  1  after an EIS symbol on a slave node, then no communication will be performed by that slave node during the communication cycle (In this case, “no communication” means that no transmission of frames is possible. Receiving frames can be performed.). This will be indicated by setting S_Trig_Symb_Failure. 
     If at least one valid frame with ID  1  is received in slot  1  on a slave node, then the slave applies the frame checks described above with the exception that the cycle counter checks of slot  1  are handled as described below (In the descriptions below, it is assumed that a frame is only considered valid if all acceptance criteria other than cycle counter matching are met.): 
     Single Channel Connected Slaves 
     
         
         
           
             If the cycle counter of the received frame with Id=1 is not equal to the local cycle counter then the local cycle counter shall be changed to the cycle counter received in frame with ID=1. This will be indicated by an S_CycleCountError. The frame with ID=1 is accepted normally, and the remainder of the communication cycle is executed normally. 
             In all other cases the local cycle counter shall remain unchanged, the frame shall continue through the acceptance process, and the communication cycle shall be executed normally
 
Dual Channel Connected Slave
 
             If the cycle counts of all received frames with Id=1 are identical but not equal to the local cycle counter then the local cycle counter shall be changed to the cycle counter received in the frames with ID=1 (If only one frame is received then it is identical by default.). This will be indicated by an S_CycleCountError. The frame(s) with ID=1 are accepted normally, and the remainder of the communication cycle is executed normally. 
             In all other cases the local cycle counter shall remain unchanged, the frame(s) shall continue through the acceptance process, and the communication cycle shall be executed normally 
           
         
       
    
     After the first slot, all frames for the remainder of the communication cycle shall be processed using the procedure described in Chapter “Frame Processing” of this document. 
     Monitoring of Cycle Timing 
     The FlexRay event triggered mode has two different methods of monitoring the timing of the communication system, depending on whether a node is serving as the master or a slave: 
     The timing of the CC trigger is monitored by the master. 
     The cycle-to-cycle timing of the EIS symbol, sent by the master, is monitored by the slaves. 
     Monitoring of the CC Trigger by the Master 
     The timing of the CC trigger is monitored by the master using a CC trigger window defined by two configuration parameters, pdExTrigCycleMin and pdExTrigCycleMax. The timing monitoring refers only to the external trigger source—the trigger sources ‘host trigger bit’ and ‘cycle timer’ do not affect the monitoring. There are three different cases with respect to the arrival of the CC trigger: 
     In normal operation the CC trigger appears later than pdExTrigCycleMin and earlier than pdExTrigCycleMax. No error is signaled and the start of a new communication cycle is initiated by the CC trigger. The start of a new CC trigger window is computed when the CC trigger arrives. 
     If the CC trigger does not appear before pdExTrigCycleMax, an EXT_TRIG_LIF (CC Trigger Lost Interrupt Flag) error is signaled after pdExTrigCycleMax. The start of a new trigger window will be determined only after the actual arrival of a new CC trigger. As long as no new CC trigger arrives, no new communication cycle is initiated. It is up to the host to initiate the communication cycle if needed. 
     If the CC trigger appears earlier than pdExTrigCycleMin, the EXT TRIG_EIF (CC Trigger Early Interrupt Flag) error is signaled immediately. No communication cycle is initiated, and no new trigger window is determined in this case. 
     These conditions are depicted in  FIG. 99 . 
     Monitoring of EIS Timing by the Slaves 
     The timing of the reception of Event Indication Symbols is monitored by the slaves through the use on an EIS window defined by two configuration parameters, pdEISSymbCycleMin and pdEISSymbCycleMax. T here are three different cases with respect to the arrival of the EIS: 
     In normal operation the end of the EIS appears later than pdEISSymbCycleMin but earlier than pdEISSymbCycleMax. No error is signaled. The start of a new EIS window is computed when the end of the EIS arrives. 
     If no valid EIS is received such that the end of the EIS appears before pdEISSymbCycleMax, an EIS_SYMB_LIF (EIS symbol Lost Interrupt Flag) error is signaled after pdEISSymbCycleMax. When an EIS symbol arrives, the slaves continue with a new communication cycle. 
     If the end of the EIS symbol appears earlier than pdEISSymbCycleMin the early EIS symbol is ignored, and an EIS_SYMB_EIF (EIS Symbol Early Interrupt Flag) error is signaled immediately. The node switches into a passive mode, stopping all frame transmission and reception. No new EIS window is computed, and no new communication cycle is initiated. The slave node waits for another EIS symbol after pdEISSymbCycleMin. 
     These conditions are depicted in  FIG. 100 . 
     Startup and Reintegration—Event Triggered Mode 
     The following overview describes the CC behavior in the event triggered communication mode. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in Table 52. 
     State transitions with a prefix of ‘G’ are global transitions for the FlexRay protocol. State transitions with a prefix of ‘L’ indicate states transitions corresponding to logical conditions 
     State transitions with a prefix of ‘E’ are transitions specific to the event triggered communication mode. 
     If a node integrates into a running system or at startup, the cycle counter from the master is accepted without raising an error indication. The error indication is suppressed until integration is successfully completed. 
                     TABLE 52                  State Transitions - Event Triggered Mode                                 State   Transition Direction       Conditions for   Action taken on                                 Transition   From State   To State   Transition   Transition                                             L3   CC_Normal   CC_SoftReset       A CC_Reset is   The ongoing frame                       requested by the   transmission or                       host   reception is allowed to                           proceed to completion                           and the configuration                           data shall be retained       L4       CC_SoftReset       Initialization is                       finished       G5   CC_SoftReset   CC_WaitEIS       soft reset released   Reset timer for EIS                       (in the respective   symbol monitoring                       control register)                   AND   Event Triggered                       slave mode is                       configured       G6       CC_WaitEvent       soft reset released   Reset timer for event                       (in the respective   trigger monitoring                       control register)                   AND   Event Triggered                       master mode is                       configured       E1   CC_WaitEIS   CC_WaitSlaveNIT       Reception of a valid   set vEDMTimer to                       EIS with the end   pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT,                       later than   set EIS_REC_INT                       pdEISSymbCycleMin   interrupt                           Reset timer for EIS                           symbol monitoring       E2       CC_WaitEIS       Reception of a valid   Signal EIS_SYMB_EIF                       EIS with the end   (EIS symbol Early                       earlier than   Interrupt Flag) Error                       pdEISSymbCycleMin   (Note—The EIS timer                           is not reset by this                           transition)       E3       CC_WaitEIS       EIS Timer reaches   Signal EIS_SYMB_LIF                       pdEISSymbCycleMax   (EIS symbol Lost                       without detecting   Interrupt Flag) Error                       a valid EIS   (Note—The EIS timer                           is not reset by this                           transition)       E4   CC_WaitSlaveNIT   CC_WaitID1       vEDMTimer expires   Reset vMacrotick,                       (i.e.,   microtick counter,                       pdSlaveEIStoEndOf   increment cycle                       NIT has elapsed)   counter       E5   CC_WaitID1   CC_NormalSlave       Reception of a valid                       frame with ID 1                       (This implies that                       the cycle counter                       match check has                       also passed (i.e.,                       the local cycle                       counter matches                       the received cycle                       counter).)       E6       CC_NormalSlave       Reception of a   Signal                       frame with ID 1   S_CycleCountError                       which passes all   Error                       frame checks other   The received cycle                       than cycle counter   count is applied for the                       checks   local cycle count value       E7       CC_WaitEIS       The end of slot 1   Signal                       was reached   S_Trig_Symb_Failure                       without having   Error                       received an                       acceptable frame ID                       1 message                       (Acceptable means                       all frame checks                       (with the possible                       exception of cycle                       counter match) are                       passed.)       E8   CC_NormalSlave   CC_WaitEIS       End of dynamic   Reset timer for EIS                       segment reached   symbol monitoring                       (vMacrotick == gdCycle −                       gdNetworkIdle Time −                       gdSymbolWindow;                       based on local                       timers)       E9   CC_WaitEvent   CC_WaitMasterNIT       CC trigger appears   send EIS symbol                       later than   set EXT_SOR_INT                       pdExTrigCycleMin   interrupt                           set vEDMTimer to                           pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT       E10       CC_WaitMasterNIT       Trigger bit is set by   send EIS symbol                       host   set vEDMTimer to                           pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT       E11       CC_WaitEvent       CC trigger appears   Signal EXT_TRIG_EIF                       earlier than   (CC trigger Early                       pdExTrigCycleMin   Interrupt Flag) Error                   AND   Trigger source is   (Note—The CC trigger                       external event   timer is not affected by                           this transition)       E12       CC_WaitEvent       CC trigger timer   signal EXT_TRIG_LIF                       reaches   (CC trigger Lost                       pdExTrigCycleMax   Interrupt Flag) Error                       before a CC trigger   (Note—The CC trigger                       appears   timer is not affected by                           this transition)       E13   CC_WaitMasterNIT   CC_NormalMaster       vEDMTimer expires   Reset vMacrotick, and                       (i.e.,   vMicrotick counters,                       pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT   increment cycle                       has elapsed)   counter, reinitialize                           error signaling                           counters, send frame                           ID 1 in slot 1       E14       CC_WaitMasterNIT       CC trigger appears   Signal EXT_TRIG_EIF                   AND   Trigger source is   (CC trigger Early                       external event   Interrupt Flag) Error       E15   CC_NormalMaster   CC_WaitEvent       End of dynamic   Reset timer for event                       segment reached   trigger monitoring                       (vMacrotick == gdCycle −                       gdNetworkIdleTime −                       gdSymbolWindow;                       based on local                       timers)       E16       CC_NormalMaster       CC trigger appears   Signal EXT_TRIG_EIF                   AND   Trigger source is   (CC trigger Early                       external event   Interrupt Flag) Error                    
State Diagram
 
       FIG. 101  shows a protocol state diagram for the event triggered mode. 
     Host Interface Requirements—Event Triggered Mode 
     Event triggered mode specific requirements: 
     A configuration parameter (e.g. pMasterSelect or consider reusing pSyncMaster) defines whether the node acts as a master or as a slave. 
     For the master node three event sources for starting the next cycle exist: external event, host access, CC internal timer (normal cycle length). The host decides during runtime which event source(s) are used. 
     The trigger/event sources external event and CC internal timer can be enabled/disabled independently. If more than one source is enabled, the first event arms the CC to send the EIS symbol. At least one of the triggers sources has to be enabled. 
     Product specific: The behavior of the input signal for the external source should be configurable with respect to the trigger type (falling or rising edge) and the assignment to a trigger pin. 
     Product specific: Upon detection of the trigger event, the master CC shall capture the macrotick-counter and present this value to the host. 
     Product specific: Upon reception of the trigger event, the master CC shall indicate this immediately to the host (Event Trigger). 
     Product specific: Upon reception of the event indication symbol, the slaves shall capture their macrotick-counters. 
     Upon reception of the event indication symbol, the slave shall indicate this immediately to the host (Event Indication Symbol (EIS) Detected). 
     It is required for the host to be able to change the transmit buffers during the dynamic segment in the following way:
         The data of a buffer may be changed.   The data and the ID of a buffer may be changed as long as its order in the list of dynamic IDs is not changed       Range of pdExTrigCycleMin: 100 μs . . . 64 ms   Range of pdExTrigCycleMax: 100 μs . . . 64 ms   Range of pdEISSymbCycleMin: 100 μs . . . 64 ms   Range of pdEISSymbCycleMax: 100 μs . . . 64 ms
 
General Interrupt Register
   

     For the event triggered communication mode the interrupt flags described above are available. Table 53 lists additional interrupt flags that are specific to the event triggered communications mode. 
     Every interrupt source described in Table 53 shall have an individual enable/disable mechanism. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 53 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Interrupt Registers - Event Triggered Mode 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 General Interrupt 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Flag 
                 Bits 
                 Description 
                 Channel 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 EXT_SOR_INT 
                 1 
                 External source interrupt 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (master only) 
               
               
                 EXT_TRIG_EIF 
                 1 
                 External Trigger Early Interrupt Flag, 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                   
                 external trigger received before 
               
               
                   
                   
                 pdExTrigCycleMin (master only) 
               
               
                 EXT_TRIG_LIF 
                 1 
                 External Trigger Late Interrupt Flag, 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                   
                 external trigger not received before 
               
               
                   
                   
                 pdExTrigCycleMax (master only) 
               
               
                 EIS_REC_INT 
                 1 
                 EIS symbol detected 
                 A 
               
               
                 EXT_TRIG_EIF 
                 1 
                 EIS symbol Early Interrupt Flag, EIS 
                 A 
               
               
                   
                   
                 received before pdEISSymbCycleMin 
               
               
                 EXT_TRIG_LIF 
                 1 
                 EIS symbol Lost Interrupt Flag, 
                 A 
               
               
                   
                   
                 EIS not received before 
               
               
                   
                   
                 pdEISSymbCycleMax 
               
               
                 EIS_REC_INT 
                 1 
                 EIS symbol detected 
                 B 
               
               
                 EXT_TRIG_EIF 
                 1 
                 EIS symbol Early Interrupt Flag, EIS 
                 B 
               
               
                   
                   
                 received before pdEISSymbCycleMin 
               
               
                 EXT_TRIG_LIF 
                 1 
                 EIS symbol Lost Interrupt Flag, 
                 B 
               
               
                   
                   
                 EIS not received before 
               
               
                   
                   
                 pdEISSymbCycleMax 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Note: It is possible to use the external source interrupt (EXT_SOR_INT) even if the external source is not used in order to gather information about the occurrence of external source trigger events. 
     Error Management—Master Triggered Mode 
     For the event triggered communication mode the error management described in Chapter “Error Signaling and Error Handling” applies in general. Only the treatment of frame with ID=1 is different. If a frame does not receive frame ID  1  after a correct EIS symbol, the slave node switches in Error (passive) and stops frame transmission until a next pair of valid EIS+frame Id  1  is received. 
     The error signaling counters are reinitialized during the transition at the beginning of the new communication cycle. 
     Controller Host Interface Example 
     Purpose 
     This chapter contains an example of a Controller Host Interface (CHI) that meets the Host Interface requirements defined in Chapter ‘Controller Host Interface’ and Chapter ‘Controller Host Interface Services’. 
     Some of these requirements are applicable to all FlexRay implementations and others are applicable only when specific optional protocol mechanisms are implemented. 
     Controller Status Registers 
     This section enumerates the registers that shall be supported by the Communication Controller to provide the host with status information regarding the operation of the controller, and the current value of different CC internal variables. The current controller status shall be provided on read request of the host. The status registers holding internal variables shall be cleared at the state transitions L 1  , L 5  and L 6  of the HW state machine (see Section ‘CC State Diagram’) and shall be updated by the CC. The host shall have read-only access to the status information. The host is generally not able to modify the contents of these registers, with the exception of some error flags, that may be cleared by the host. 
     Product Version Register 
     The CHI shall provide a 16-bit read-only register to hold the FlexRay Product Version Number. This number identifies the manufacturer, the product and the implemented protocol version in order to allow the user to distinguish between different products. Starting with the MSB, the register shall be used as follows:
         5 bits to identify the silicon manufacturer   4 bits for manufacturer defined silicon versions   7 bits to identify the implemented protocol version.       

     The semiconductor manufacturer shall agree this version number with the FlexRay Consortium. 
     Current Cycle Counter Value 
     The CHI shall provide a 6-bit register to hold the current cycle counter value (vCycle). The content shall be incremented by CC at start of cycle. 
     Current Macrotick Value 
     The CHI shall provide a 16-bit register to hold the current macrotick value (vMacrotick). The content shall be incremented by CC and reset at start of cycle. 
     Rate Correction Value 
     The CHI shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the rate correction value (vRateCorrection) applied by the clock sync in the current cycle. (See Section ‘Calculation of the Rate Correction Value’) 
     Offset Correction Value 
     The CHI shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the offset correction value (vOffsetCorrection) applied by clock sync in the current cycle. (See Section ‘Calculation of the Offset Correction Value’) 
     Valid Sync Frames Channel A (VSFC_A) 
     The CHI shall provide a 5-bit register indicating the number of valid Sync Frames received in the previous cycle. The variable shall only be updated at the end of the static segment with the counter value VSFC_A. 
     Valid Sync Frames Channel B (VSFC_B) 
     The CHI shall provide a 5-bit register indicating the number of valid Sync Frames received in the previous cycle. The variable shall only be updated at the end of the static segment with the counter value VSFC_B. 
     Sync Frames Used for Clock Sync 
     The CHI shall provide a 5-bit register indicating the number of valid Sync Frame pairs used for the calculation of the rate correction terms in the previous cycle. The register shall only be updated at the end of the NIT of the odd cycle with the counter value vValidSyncFrameCount. (See Section ‘Clock Synchronization—General Concepts’) 
     Missing Rate Correction Signal (MRCS) 
     The CC shall provide a flag to signal to the host, that no rate correction can be performed because no pairs of (even/odd) Sync Frames were received. The flag shall be reset by the CC after successful rate correction. (See Section ‘Missing Rate Correction Signal (MRCS)’) 
     Missing Offset Correction Signal (MOCS) 
     The CC shall provide a flag to signal to the host, that no offset correction can be performed because no Sync Frames were received in an odd cycle. The flag shall be reset by the CC after successful offset correction. (see Section ‘Missing Offset Correction Signal (MOCS)’) 
     Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC) 
     The CC shall provide a 4-bit counter that is incremented by one at the end of any odd communication cycle where either the Missing Offset Correction error or Missing Rate Correction error are active. The CCFC shall be reset to zero at the end of an odd communication cycle if neither the Offset Correction Failed nor the Rate Correction Failed errors are active. The CCFC stops at 15. (see Section ‘Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC)’) 
     Startup Majority Missed Signal (SMMS) 
     The CC shall provide a flag to signal to the host that the CC has received a set of sync frames during startup that did not result in a majority of the sync frames agreeing with the local view of the system time (see Section ‘Startup Majority Missed Signal (SMMS)’). The SMMS shall be reset by host interaction or when the CC performs the state transition L 5  or L 6  of the HW state machine (see Section ‘CC State Diagram’). 
     Protocol Error State 
     The CC shall provide 2 bits indicating the current protocol error state. (See Section ‘Protocol Error State Signal’) 
     Startup Status Vector 
     The CC shall provide a Startup Status Vector with following status flags:
     vCCMS; Coldstart max reached (vColdStartCount=gColdStartMax)   vSMMS, Plausibility check failed   vOpViaColdstart; Normal state entered via coldstart path   vColdStartAborted; Coldstart aborted because of CAS or Sync Frame received   vColdstartNoise; Coldstart path has been entered due to the expiration of pColdstartNoise   

     A logical ‘1’ indicates the truth condition for each status flag. 
     For details see Section ‘Communication Startup and Reintegration’. 
     Bus Guardian Schedule Monitoring Error (BGME) 
     The CC shall provide a flag to signal a bus guardian schedule monitoring violation (vBgsmError) to the host. The flag shall be set by the schedule monitoring mechanism and shall be cleared only by the host. (see Section ‘Bus Guardian Schedule Monitoring Error (BGME)’) 
     Clock Correction Limit Reached (CCLR) 
     The CC shall provide a flag to signal to the host, that the Offset Correction Value (vOffsetCorrection) has reached the red region (vOffsetCorrection&gt;gOffsetCorrectionOut). The CC shall only have the capability to set this flag. The flag shall remain set until it is cleared by the host. (See Section ‘Value Limitations’ and Section ‘Clock Correction Limit Reached (CCLR)’). 
     Media Access Test Warning 
     The CC shall provide a flag (pMATestWarning) to signal to the host, that the CC has received a Media Access Test Symbol (MTS) during the symbol window. The CC shall only have the capability to set this flag. The flag shall remain set until it is cleared by the host. 
     Wakeup Status Vector 
     The CC shall provide a Wakeup Status Vector with following status flags:
     Frame Header Received during Wakeup flag (vWakeupFrameHeaderReceived). This flag shall be set if due to the reception of a frame header without coding violation the CC stops the wakeup.   Wakeup Symbol Received flag (vWakeupSymbolReceived). This flag shall be set if due to the reception of a valid Rx-wakeup symbol the CC stops the wakeup.   Wakeup Failed flag (vWakeupFailed). This flag shall be set if due to too many wakeup tries the CC stops the wakeup.   Wakeup Complete flag (vWakeupComplete). This flag shall be set if the CC has completed the transmission of the Tx-wakeup.   (see Section ‘Cluster Wakeup’ for details)
 
Communication Controller Status Vector
   

     The CC shall provide a Communication Controller Status Vector with following status flags indicating the actual operation mode of the CC:
     CC_SoftReset State   CC_Normal State   CC_ShutdownRequest State   CC_Shutdown Complete State   CC_Standby State   Listen-Only Mode   WakeUPListen State   StartupListen State   ColdStartICW State   ColdStartVCW State   IntegrationVCW State   PassiveOperation State   Event Triggered Mode   

     The CC shall set the status flag when entering the corresponding state or operation mode and shall clear it after leaving it; independent of the settings in the different configuration registers. For details see below and Sections ‘HW States of the CC’, and ‘Startup State Diagram—Time Triggered Protocol Mode (TT-D and TT-M)’. 
     Configuration and Control Registers 
     This section enumerates the registers supported by the Communication Controller to allow the host to control the operation of the CC. The host shall have write and read access to all configuration data. 
     Configuration data shall not be changed by the CC during normal operation. The CC shall reset the configuration data on its transition L 1  from the CC_HWReset state (see Section ‘HW States of the CC’). 
     Module Configuration Register 
     The Module Configuration Register (MCR) enables the host to configure basic operating modes in the CC. (see Section ‘HW States of the CC’) The MCR shall provide the following control bits: 
     Soft Reset 
     When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall immediately enter the CC_SoftReset State. Any ongoing transmission or reception shall be aborted and synchronization to the ongoing communication shall be stopped. When this bit is cleared by the host, the CC shall enter the Normal State and start the reintegration or startup. If wake-up is configured, the CC shall enter the WakeUPListen State after leaving CC_SoftReset. The CC shall enter the CC_SoftReset State automatically after power on reset. The host shall configure the CC in this state. When the host forces the CC into soft reset, the status and error registers should keep their data unchanged until the soft reset is terminated. (Transition L 5  and L 6  of the HW state machine; see Section ‘CC State Diagram’)) 
     Listen-Only Select 
     When this bit (vListenOnly) is set, the CC shall be able to receive all frames after successful integration to the running communication. In comparison to the normal operation mode the node does not actively participate in communication, i.e. neither symbols nor frames are transmitted. This bit can be set only in CC_SoftReset State to true, but can be cleared any time by the host. (See Section ‘Listen-Only Mode’) 
     Master Select 
     This bit (pSyncMaster) selects the CC as a bus master in the Master Controlled Operating modes. (See Section 0) The CC shall send the Event Indication Symbol and the static sync frame when the bit is set. The CC shall ignore any attempt to change the status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State. 
     Master Alarm 
     If the Master Select and the Master Alarm bits are set, the CC shall send an SAS symbol in the byteflight mode. The bit can be set and reset by the host any time during normal operation. 
     Shutdown Request 
     When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall enter the CC_ShutdownComplete state (see Section ‘CC_ShutDownComplete State’). In this state all internal clocks shall be stopped after finishing the current communication round. The state can be left by the host resetting the bit. 
     Standby Request 
     When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall enter the CC_StandByRequest State. In this state all internal clocks shall be stopped after the CC has completed any ongoing transmission and reception. The CC shall leave this state upon the host resetting the bit or upon wake-up activity being signaled by the physical layer on the Rx input. 
     Send Wakeup 
     When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall enter WakeUPListen State when leaving the CC_SoftReset State and send the Wakeup Pattern. The CC shall ignore any attempt to change the status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State. (See Section ‘Waking One Channel’) 
     Wakeup Channel Select 
     With this bit (vWakeupChannel) the host selects the channel on which the CC shall send the Wakeup Pattern (‘0’=channel A, ‘1’=channel B). The CC shall ignore any attempt to change the status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State. (See Section ‘Waking One Channel’) 
     Event Triggered Mode Select 
     When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall operate in the Event Triggered Mode. This bit shall be reset by default (=Time Driven Mode), and the CC shall ignore any attempt to change the status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State. 
     External Trigger Acceptance 
     When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall accept an external trigger to send the Event Indication Symbol and the static sync frame in the Event Triggered Mode, if the CC is configured as a master (Master Select bit set). The CC shall ignore any attempt to change the status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State. 
     Message/Frame ID Filtering 
     When this bit (gMsgldFilter) is set by the host, the CC shall apply the configured Message ID filtering for all dedicated receive and FIFO receive mailbox buffers as described in Section 0. If this bit is not set (by default) the CC shall apply the Frame ID filtering. The CC shall ignore any attempt to change the status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State. It should be configured identically in all nodes of a cluster. 
     byteflight Compatibility mode 
     This bit selects the byteflight Compatibility mode when set. The CC shall ignore any attempt to change the status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State. 
     FIFO Size 
     The CC shall provide a register to configure the number of FIFO receive buffers as a part of all available message buffers. The CC shall ignore any attempt to change the content of the register when not in CC_SoftReset. (See below). 
     Timing Parameters 
     The CHI shall provide three registers to configure the timing parameters TCR 1 , TCR 2 , TCR 3  required for the byteflight compatibility mode. These parameters are not used in all the other operating modes of the CC. 
     TCR1 
     8 bit; to configure the timing parameter pdWx 0 Rx, a constant component of vdWaitTime in the dynamic section in the case that the most recent bus activity was received by the local node; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. 
     TCR2 
     8 bit; to configure the timing parameter pdWx 0 Tx, a constant component of vdWaitTime in the dynamic section in the case that the most recent bus activity was transmitted by the local node; may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset. 
     TCR3 
     10 bit; to configure the timing parameter gdWxDelta a multiplier part of vdWaitTime. The value chosen must be identical for all nodes in the cluster, and may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. It shall be calculated as follows:
 
gdWxDelta=gdMaxPropagationDelay+gdMaxTolerances
 
Clock Prescaler
 
     The CC shall provide a clock prescaler register consisting of the following three fields:
         Bit Rate Index, 4 bits   Sample Clock Prescaler, 4 bits   Samples per bit, 2 bits (8 or 10 samples; 01 b =8, 10 b =10 samples)       

     (See Section ‘Coding and Decoding—Configuration Parameters’ for details) 
     The CC shall accept modifications of the register only in CC_SoftReset. 
     Maximum Oscillator Drift 
     The CC shall provide a 16-bit register to hold the maximum expected clock deviation of the oscillator during one communication cycle (gdMaxDrift) in microticks, configurable only in CC_SoftReset. 
     Sample Voting Offset 
     The CC shall provide a 4-bit register to configure the offset from the start of the voting window (pVotingOffset) that is used to determine the value of a received bit from the start of the bit cell. This offset defines the first sample of the bit that shall be considered for the voting; configurable only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘Bit Value Voting’) 
     Voting Samples 
     The CC shall provide a 4-bit register to configure the number of samples in the voting window (pVotingSamples) that are used to determine the value of a received bit; configurable only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘Bit Value Voting’) 
     Nominal Macrotick Length 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the nominal (uncorrected) number of microticks per macrotick (pMicroPerMacroNom); may be modified only in CC_SoftReset, 
     Bus Guardian Tick 
     The CC shall provide a 4-bit register to configure the length of the Bus Guardian Tick (BGT) to be provided by the CC to the bus guardian in multiples of the CC_microtick; configurable only in CC_SoftReset. 
     Static Slot Length 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to configure the duration of a static slot (gdSlot) in minislots; may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset. The static slot length must be identical in all nodes of a cluster. 
     Static Frame Data Length 
     The CC shall provide a 7-bit register to configure the (fixed) frame length (gPayloadLengthStatic) for all frames sent in the static part in double bytes; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The static slot length must be identical in all nodes of a cluster. 
     Number of Static Slots 
     The CC shall provide a 12-bit register to configure the number of static slots in a cycle (gNumberOfStaticSlots); may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The static slot length must be identical in all nodes of a cluster.
         Cycle Length       

     The CC shall provide a 16-bit register to configure the duration of one communication cycle (gMinislotPerCycle) in minislots; may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset. The cycle length must be identical in all nodes of a cluster. 
     Network Idle Time 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to configure the duration of the network idle time (gdNetworkIdle) at the end of the communication cycle in minislots; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. 
     Start of Latest Transmit 
     The CC shall provide a 16-bit register to configure the maximum minislot value (pdLatestTX) allowed before inhibiting new frame transmissions in the dynamic section of the cycle, expressed in terms of minislots from the beginning of the cycle; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. 
     Transmission Start Sequence Duration 
     The CC shall provide a 4-bit register to configure the duration of the Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) (gdTransmissionStartSequence) in terms of bit times (gdBit); may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset, and shall be identical in all nodes of a cluster. 
     Symbol Window Length 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to configure the length of the symbol window in minislots; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. Media Access Test Cycle Counter 
     The CC shall provide a 6-bit register to configure the cycle counter value (pMATestCycle) in which the CC shall send the Media Access Test Symbol (MTS) periodically to perform the Media Access Test. 
     Media Access Test Enable 
     The CC shall provide a configuration flag (pMATestEnable) to enable the CC to periodically perform the Media Access Test if bit set. The flag shall be reset by default and may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset. 
     External Clock Correction Acceptance 
     The CC shall provide a configuration flag to allow external clock correction when set. The flag shall be reset by default after power on reset and may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The CC shall ignore the external clock corrections if this bit is not set. 
     Maximum Offset Correction 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the maximum permitted offset correction value (gOffsetCorrectionOut) to be applied during regular clock synchronization algorithm; may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset. The CC checks the sum of internal and external offset correction against the gOffsetCorrectionOut parameter. (See Section ‘Correction Term Calculation—Value Limitations’) 
     Maximum Initial Offset Correction 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the initial offset correction value (gOffsetCorrectionInitOut) to be applied by the clock synchronization algorithm in the IntegrationVCW state; may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset. (See Section ‘IntegrationVWC State’) 
     Maximum Rate Correction 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the maximum permitted rate correction value (gRateCorrectionOut) to be applied by the internal clock synchronization algorithm; may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset. The CC checks the sum of internal and external rate correction against the gRateCorrectionOut parameter. (See Section ‘Correction Term Calculation—Value Limitations’) 
     Cluster Drift Damping 
     The CC shall provide a 4-bit register to hold the cluster drift damping value (pClusterDriftDamping) used in clock synchronization to minimize accumulation of rounding errors; configurable only in CC 13  SoftReset. (See Section ‘Calculation of the Rate Correction Value’) 
     Bus Guardian Enable Duration for BGSM 
     The CC shall provide a 12-bit register to configure the duration (pBgenStaticDuration) of the bus guardian enable signal for the transmission phase of a static slot in macroticks. This shall be checked by the CC with the BGE signal produced by the bus guardian; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’) 
     Bus Guardian Dynamic Segment Enable Duration for BGSM 
     The CC shall provide a 16-bit register to configure the duration (pBgeDynamicDuration) of the bus guardian enable signal for the transmission phase of the dynamic segment in macroticks. This shall be checked by the CC with the BGE signal produced by the bus guardian; may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset. (See Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’) 
     Bus Guardian Symbol Window Enable Duration for BGSM 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to configure the duration (pBgeSymbolDuration) of the bus guardian enable signal for the transmission phase of the symbol window in macroticks. This shall be checked by the CC with the BGE signal produced by the bus guardian; may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset. (See Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’) 
     BG Schedule Monitoring in Symbol Window 
     The CC shall provide a configuration flag (pBgsmSymWinDisabled) to disable bus guardian schedule monitoring during the symbol window when set; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’) 
     BG Schedule Monitoring in Dynamic Segment 
     The CC shall provide a configuration flag (pBgsmDynSegDisabled) to disable bus guardian schedule monitoring during the dynamic segment when set; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’) 
     Timer Interrupt Configuration Registers 
     The CC shall provide two Timer Interrupt Configuration Registers to enable the host to configure two different timer interrupts. Each register shall contain three fields: Cycle Set—A 9-bit register is used to specify in which set of cycles the interrupt shall occur. It consists of two fields, the Base Cycle [b] and the Cycle Repetition [c]. The set of cycle numbers where the interrupt is to be generated is determined from these two fields using the formula
 
 b+n* 2 ^c  ( n= 0, 1, 2, . . . ):
         Base Cycle [b]—A 6-bit cycle number used to identify the initial value for generating the cycle set   Cycle Repetition [c]—A 3-bit value used to determine a constant repetition factor to be added to the base cycle (c=0 . . . 6).       

     Macrotick Offset—This 16-bit value is the macrotick offset from the beginning of the cycle where the interrupt is to occur. The interrupt occurs at this offset for each cycle in the Interrupt Cycle Set. 
     Transmitter Generated Padding Switch 
     In the CC a configuration switch decides whether the transmitter may add missing data bytes if the configured frame data length exceeds the length of the buffer data field. The configuration switch applies to all transmit buffers of the CC. The flag shall be disabled (logical ‘0’) by default, may be enabled (logical ‘1’) only in CC 13  SoftReset. 
     Cold Start Max 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to configure the maximum number of cycles (gColdStartMax) that a cold starting node is permitted to try to start up the network without receiving any valid response from another node; configurable only in CC 13  SoftReset. If the value is ‘0’ the CC is not allowed to start up the communication. 
     Cold Start Inhibit 
     The CC shall provide a configuration flag (vColdStartInhibit) to disable the cold starting of a node during wake-up when set. (See Section ‘ColdStart-Inhibit Mode’) 
     Max. Without Clock Correction Passive 
     The CC shall provide a 4-bit register configurable with the number of cycles without performing rate correction (gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive) when the CC shall enter the “Yellow” state. The register can be configured only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘Error Handling for TT-D and TT-M Protocol Modes’) 
     Max. Without Clock Correction Fatal 
     The CC shall provide a 4-bit register configurable with the number of cycles without performing rate correction (gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal) when the CC shall enter the “Red” state. The register can be configured only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘Error Handling for TT-D and TT-M Protocol Modes’) 
     Wake-Up Symbol Definition Registers 
     The CHI shall provide following registers to configure the parameters needed by the CC to send and receive the wake-up symbol:
     6 bits; to configure the duration of the active low level (gdWakeupSymbolTxLow) of the wake-up symbol in multiples of bit times (gdBit); may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.   8 bits; to configure the duration of the idle/recessive high level (gdWakeupSymbolTxIdle) of the wake-up symbol in multiples of bit times (gdBit); may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset.   4 bits; to configure the number of repetitions (sequences) (pdWakeupPattern) of the wake-up symbol; may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset.   6 bits; to configure the minimum duration of the active low level (gdWakeupSymbolRxLow) in multiples of bit times (gdBit) for the receiver to recognize the symbol as a wake-up; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.   6 bits; to configure the minimum duration of the idle/recessive high level (gdWakeupSymbolRxIdleMin) in multiples of bit times (gdBit) for the receiver to recognize the symbol as a wake-up; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.   9 bits; to configure the window length within which the symbol has to be received (gdWakeupSymbolRxWindow) in multiples of bit times (gdBit) for the receiver to recognize the symbol as a wake-up; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.   4 bits; to configure the maximum number of times (gWakeupMax) the CC is permitted to autonomously attempt to send a wake-up pattern; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.   6 bits; to configure in multiples of bit times (gdBit) the duration of the active low level on the bus (gdWakeupMaxCollision) that a CC sending a wake-up pattern shall accept during the idle phase of the pattern without reentering the WakeupListen state; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.   

     (See Section ‘Cluster Wakeup’ 0 ) 
     Communication Delay Registers 
     The CC shall provide two 8-bit registers to configure the average delay compensation values for each channel (pDelayCompensationChx) in microticks; configurable only in CC 13  SoftReset. (See Section ‘Time Measurement’) 
     Buffer Control Register 
     The configuration of the message mailbox buffers (as Transmit, Dedicated Receive or FIFO Receive buffer) and host&#39;s access to the mailbox message buffers shall be controlled by the use of a Buffer Control Register. (See below for implementation guidelines) 
     Clock Correction Registers 
     This section enumerates the registers the Communication Controller shall provide to allow external clock correction by the host. The host shall have write and read access to these registers. 
     The CC shall have read-only access during normal operation. The CC shall reset the configuration data during power on reset. 
     External Offset Correction 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the external clock offset correction value (vOffsetCorrectionExtern) in microticks to be applied by the internal clock synchronization algorithm when the External Clock Correction Acceptance bit is set (See above). The register content is supposed to be written by the host before start of the Network Idle Time (NIT) and it shall be consumed when applied by the CC. (See Section ‘External Clock Synchronization (Optional)’) 
     External Rate Correction 
     The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the external clock rate correction value (vRateCorrectionExtern) in microticks to be applied by the internal clock synchronization algorithm when the External Clock Correction Acceptance bit is set (See above). The register content is supposed to be written by the host before start of the Network Idle Time (NIT) and it shall be consumed when applied by the CC. (See Section ‘External Clock Synchronization (Optional)’) 
     Message Buffers 
     The communication controller has to provide an implementation specific number of configurable message buffers for data communication with an implementation specific frame length up to the maximum of 254 data bytes. The message buffers shall be configurable to be used as transmit, dedicated receive or FIFO receive buffers. 
     Each buffer shall include the complete frame header and data field, and shall not include the frame CRC (See Section ‘FlexRay Frame Format’ for details). The CC shall provide suitable mechanisms to grant a secure access to the buffers. Using a suitable mechanism, either the CC or the host shall get access to one particular buffer. A predefined number of buffers shall be configurable during CC_SoftReset only while the others shall be reconfigurable during runtime. 
     Transmit Buffers 
     A portion of message buffers shall be configurable as transmit buffers. 
     There shall be one explicit transmit buffer, which is dedicated to be configured to hold the transmitted Sync frame of a node, if it transmits one, and which can be reconfigured only in CC_SoftReset. This shall ensure that for Sync Frames, the Sync Frame ID, Sync Bit, Payload Length and the corresponding header CRC can be changed only during CC_SoftReset, and that any node transmits at most one Sync frame per communication cycle. The CC shall provide mechanisms that do not allow the transmission of sync frames from other buffers. 
     For transmit frames in the dynamic segment reconfigurable buffers can be used. The frame ID, the header CRC, and the corresponding Payload Length shall be reconfigurable during runtime. 
     The CC shall not have the capability to calculate the transmit header CRC. The host is supposed to provide the frame IDs and header CRC&#39;s for all transmitted frames. 
     The CC shall not permit any write access by the host to the Null Frame Indication Bit. 
     The length field in all messages (static and dynamic) reflects the frame payload data length as defined in the frame format. The CC may use mailbox transmit buffer structures shorter than the actual configured data frame length in the static segment. In this case, the CC shall generate padding bytes—if enabled—to ensure that frames have proper physical length. However, this capability must be enabled via configuration (See above). The padding pattern shall be logical zero. The padding function shall apply only to frames to be transmitted in the static part. In the dynamic part no frame shall be transmitted if the data field in the buffer is shorter than the configured data length. 
     An indicator shall be provided for each transmit message buffer to indicate if the message was transmitted by the CC, respectively updated by the host. The host shall explicitly set this “Commit” flag when the buffer is ready for transmission. In the “Single-shot Mode” the CC shall reset the flag after transmission has been completed and the host may access the buffer for writing next message into the buffer. This hand-shaking flag shall be reset on the CC&#39;s transition from the CC_HWReset state (See Section ‘CC_HWReset State’). 
     The CC shall not transmit frame data from a buffer that the host is updating. The CC shall not transmit the message data out of the buffer before the host has indicated that the update is completed by setting the “Commit” flag. 
     Null Frame Transmission 
     The CHI shall provide for each transmit buffer a flag to allow the host to configure the transmission mode for the buffer. If this bit is set, the transmitter shall operate in the static segment in the so-called “Single-shot Mode”. If this bit is cleared, the transmitter shall operate in the static segment in the so-called “Continuous Mode”. 
     If a buffer is configured in the “Single-shot Mode”, the configured frame will be sent out by the transmitter only once after the host has set the “Commit” flag. As defined above, the CC resets the flag after transmission. If the host does not set the “Commit” flag before transmit time and there is no other transmit buffer with matching frame ID and cycle counter filter, the CC shall transmit a Null Frame with the Null Frame bit (fNullFrameIndicationBit) set and the payload data set to ‘0’. 
     If a buffer is configured in the “Continuous Mode”, the CC shall not reset the “Commit” flag after transmission. If the “Commit” flag is set, the frame shall be sent out any time the frame ID and cycle counter filter match. If the host clears the “Commit” flag and there is no other transmit buffer with matching frame ID and cycle counter filter, the CC shall transmit a Null Frame with the Null Frame bit (fNullFrameIndicationBit) set and the payload data cleared. 
     If a static slot is assigned to the CC, it shall transmit a Null Frame with the Null Frame Indication Bit (fNullFrameIndicationBit) set, and the rest of the frame header and the frame length unchanged (See Section ‘Null Frame Indication Bit’) in any of the following cases: 
     There are matching frame IDs and cycle counters, but none of these transmit buffers has the “Commit” flag set. 
     All transmit buffers configured for the slot have cycle filters that do not match the current cycle (see below). 
     Null Frames shall not be transmitted in the dynamic segment. 
     Receive Buffers 
     A portion of the CC&#39;s message buffers shall be configurable as dedicated receive buffers. 
     The CC shall transfer only valid received messages from the serial receive message buffer to the dedicated receive buffer with the matching filter configuration (See below). 
     A receive message buffer shall contain space for all frame elements as defined in Chapter ‘Frame Formats’, except the frame CRC. 
     The payload length information presented to the host shall reflect the length indicated by the received payload length code, not any other value. 
     If no frame, null frame, or corrupted frame is received in a slot, the buffer contents prior to the reception shall not be deleted or overwritten. The discrepancy to the configured frame should be signaled to the host using a suitable bit in the corresponding buffer status register. 
     An indicator shall be provided for each dedicated receive message buffer to indicate if it contains new data (updated by the CC since last read). The host is responsible for clearing this flag after the read operation. 
     The CC shall not store frame data into a dedicated receive buffer that the host is reading. 
     The host shall not have write access to the dedicated receive buffers during normal operation. The host shall have write access to the dedicated receive buffers only while configuring the buffer in CC_SoftReset with the needed parameters for the dedicated receive process. 
     Null Frame Reception 
     The payload of a received Null Frame shall not be copied into the matching mailbox receive buffer. The reception of the Null Frame shall be signaled to the host by setting an appropriate bit in the receive buffer status register. (See below) 
     FIFO Receive Buffers 
     A portion of the CC&#39;s message buffers can be configured as FIFO receive buffers. 
     The CC shall transfer only valid received messages from the serial receive message buffer to the FIFO receive buffer if there is no matching dedicated receive buffer and the header is not rejected by the FIFO Rejection filter (See below). 
     A FIFO receive message buffer shall contain all frame elements as defined in Chapter “Frame Formats”, except the frame CRC. 
     An indicator shall be provided to indicate that a message was stored in a FIFO receive buffer by the CC. The indicator shall provide the information ‘FIFO not empty’. The CC shall reset the flag after all messages have been accessed by the host. 
     The CC shall not store frame data into a FIFO receive buffer that the host is reading. The data shall be stored into the next free FIFO buffer. 
     Frame Status and Error Information (FSEI) 
     There shall be dedicated frame status and error information associated with each message buffer. The Frame Status and Error Information contains 8 bits which are summarized in the following Table 54: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 54 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Frame Status and Error Vector 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 FIFO 
               
               
                 Status/Error Flag 
                 Bits 
                 Tx Buffer 
                 Rx Buffer 
                 Buffer 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Null Frame (static 
                 1 
                 Null Frame 
                 Null Frame received 
                 Null Frame 
               
               
                 segment only) 
                   
                 transmitted 
                   
                 received 
               
               
                 Empty Slot (static 
                 1 
                 — 
                 No bus traffic detected 
                 — 
               
               
                 segment only) 
               
               
                 Bit Coding/CRC Error 
                 1 
                 — 
                 Error detected (bit coding, header 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 or frame CRC, in static segment 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only) 
               
               
                 Length Mismatch 
                 1 
                 — 
                 Length Mismatch detected (static 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 segment only) 
               
               
                 Slot Mismatch 
                 1 
                 — 
                 Slot Mismatch detected 
                 — 
               
               
                 Cycle Counter 
                 1 
                 — 
                 Cycle Counter Mismatch detected 
                 — 
               
               
                 Mismatch 
                   
                   
                 (static segment) 
               
               
                 Transmission Conflict 
                 1 
                 Start of 
                 Start of Transmission during 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                   
                 transmission 
                 ongoing Reception 
               
               
                   
                   
                 during ongoing 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reception 
               
               
                 Empty Slot on second 
                 1 
                 — 
                 No bus traffic detected on the 
                 — 
               
               
                 channel 
                   
                   
                 other channel (static segment 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only) 
               
               
                 Receive Error on 
                 1 
                 — 
                 Receive Error detected on the 
                 — 
               
               
                 second channel 
                   
                   
                 other channel (static segment 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The vector content shall be updated at the end of the corresponding slot (defined by the configured Frame ID, See Section ‘Frame Status and Error Information (FSEI)’) by the communication controller and can be checked by the host. The flags shall be set if one of the listed errors is detected by the communication controller during the frame acceptance checks. (See Chapter “Frame Processing”) The vector content shall always show the status of the latest slot, which means that errors from previous cycles shall be overwritten. 
     The first seven flags refer specifically to the configured channel, on that the frame shall be received (see below), while the other two refer to the other channel. 
     In searching for Frame ID matches, searching shall commence with the first receive buffer. It shall proceed incrementally through the remaining receive buffers. If more than one receive buffer holds the same Frame ID and cycle counter filter, the error vector shall be updated in the first matching buffer. 
     Filtering and Masking 
     Definitions 
     Frame Filtering 
     Frame filtering shall be done by checking specific fields in a frame against corresponding configuration constants in the buffer, with the stipulation that the received frame shall only be processed further if the required matches occur. Otherwise, it shall be discarded. Frames shall be filtered on the following frame fields:
         Channel Number   Frame Id   Cycle Counter   Message Id
 
Frame Filter Mask
       

     The CC shall provide a mechanism to mask the frame filters. The filtering parameters masked by the host shall be disregarded (set to “don&#39;t care”). 
     Filtering Mechanisms 
     The filtering mechanisms described below shall be applied differently for receive and transmit message buffers 
     Receive buffer: In order to store a message the filters for channel Id, and cycle counter must match. In addition, depending on the configuration bit gMsgIdFilter (see Section 0) either the Frame Id (gMsgldFilter=‘0’) or the Message Id (gMsgIdFilter=‘1’) must match (but not both). 
     Transmit buffer: A frame shall be transmitted in the time slot corresponding to the frame ID on the configured channel(s) if the cycle counter matches the configured cycle filter value. 
     Channel Filtering 
     There shall be a Channel Filtering field (2 bits) associated with each buffer. It serves as a filter for a receive message buffer, and as a control field for a transmit message buffer. 
     Depending on the buffer configuration (see Table 55) 
     Receive buffer: received frames shall be stored if they are received on all the specified in the Channel Filtering Field. Other filtering criteria must also be met. 
     Transmit buffer: the content of the buffer is transmitted only on the channels specified in the Channel Filtering Field when the Cycle Counter Filtering and Frame Id Filtering criteria are also met. 
                     TABLE 55                  Channel Filtering Configuration                                     Tx Buffer   Rx Buffer       Config. bit A   Config. bit B   Transmit frame   Store valid Rx frame               1   1   on both channels   received on channel A or                   B (pick first valid)       1   0   on channel A   received on channel A       0   1   on channel B   received on channel B       0   0   no transmission   ignore frame                    
Frame ID Filtering
 
     Every Transmit and dedicated Receive message buffer shall contain a frame ID. This frame ID shall be used differently for receive and transmit message buffers. 
     Receive message buffers: A received message is stored in the first receive message buffer where the received frame ID matches the receive mailbox frame ID, provided gMsgldFilter=‘0’ and the other receive filtering criteria are also met. If Message Id filtering is being used (gMsgIdFilter=‘1’), this filter is not applied. 
     For Transmit buffers the frame ID in the buffer is used to determine the appropriate slot for the message transmission. The frame shall be transmitted in the time slot corresponding to the frame ID, provided the channel and cycle counter criteria are also met. 
     Cycle Counter Filtering 
     Cycle Counter Filtering is based on the notion of a Cycle Set. For filtering purposes, a match shall be detected if any one of the elements of the set is matched. 
     Cycle Set—A 9 bit register is used to specify which cycle numbers are elements of the set. It consists of two fields, the Base Cycle [b] and the Cycle Repetition [c]. The set of cycle numbers belonging to the set shall be determined from these two fields using the formula
 
 b+n* 2 ^c  ( n= 0, 1, 2, . . . ):
         Base Cycle [b]—A 6 bit cycle number used to identify the initial value for generating the cycle set   Cycle Repetition [c]—A 3 bit value used to determine a constant repetition factor to be added to the base cycle (c=0 . . . 6).       

     The operation of the filtering mechanism depends on the configuration of the buffer: 
     Receive buffer: The received message is stored only if the received cycle counter matches an element of the buffer&#39;s Cycle Set. Channel, Frame Id or Message Id criteria must also be met. 
     Transmit buffer: The content of the buffer is transmitted when an element of the Cycle Set matches the current cycle counter and the frame ID matches the slot counter value. If the cycle counter does not match any cycle counter filter criteria from the configured transmit buffers with matching frame ID, a Null Frame shall be transmitted in the static segment. (See below). 
     Message ID Filtering 
     Message ID filtering applies only for receive message buffers and shall be used by the CC if the message Id filtering is configured (gMsgIdFilter=‘1’) (see above). For message ID filtering the first two data bytes out of the receive buffer shall be used. The received frame shall be stored in the configured receive buffer if the message ID, channel and cycle counter match. The frame ID shall be stored in the buffer, but ignored for filtering. 
     There shall be no message ID filtering used for frame transmission. 
     FIFO Filtering 
     For FIFO filtering there shall be one Rejection Filter and one Rejection Filter Mask available. Each register consists of 39 bits for channel (2 bits), frame ID (12 bits), cycle counter (9 bits), and message ID (16 bits). The two registers shall be reconfigurable only in CC_SoftReset. 
     A received frame shall be stored in the next free FIFO buffer if the channel, frame ID, cycle counter, and message ID are not rejected by the configured reject and mask reject filter and if there is no matching dedicated receive buffer available. 
     General Interrupts 
     Interrupts shall be triggered almost immediately when an error is detected by the controller, a frame is received or transmitted, or a configured timer interrupt is activated. This enables the host to react very quickly on specific error conditions, timers and events. The CC shall support disable/enable controls for each individual interrupt, separately and as a whole. 
     Tracking status and generating interrupts when a status change occurs shall be two independent tasks. Regardless of whether an interrupt is enabled, or not, the corresponding status should be tracked and indicated by the CC. 
     At least one hardware interrupt line shall be available to signal an interrupt to the host. 
     General Interrupt Register 
     The communication controller shall provide a General Interrupt and Error Indication Register. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 56 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 General Interrupt Register 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 General Interrupt 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Flag 
                 Bits  
                 Receiver 
                 Channel 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Bit Coding/CRC Error 
                 1 
                 Error detected (bit coding, 
                 A 
               
               
                   
                   
                 header or frame CRC) 
               
               
                 Slot Mismatch 
                 1 
                 Slot Mismatch detected 
                 A 
               
               
                 Cycle Counter 
                 1 
                 Cycle Counter Mismatch 
                 A 
               
               
                 Mismatch 
                   
                 detected 
               
               
                 Length Mismatch 
                 1 
                 Length Mismatch detected 
                 A 
               
               
                 Unaccepted Symbol 
                 1 
                 Unexpected symbol reception 
                 A 
               
               
                 Symbol Normal 
                 1 
                 Symbol Normal received 
                 A 
               
               
                 Symbol Alarm 
                 1 
                 Symbol Alarm received 
                 A 
               
               
                 Bit Coding/CRC Error 
                 1 
                 Error detected (bit coding, 
                 B 
               
               
                   
                   
                 header or frame CRC) 
               
               
                 Slot Mismatch 
                 1 
                 Slot Mismatch detected 
                 B 
               
               
                 Cycle Counter 
                 1 
                 Cycle Counter Mismatch 
                 B 
               
               
                 Mismatch 
                   
                 detected 
               
               
                 Length Mismatch 
                 1 
                 Length Mismatch detected 
                 B 
               
               
                 Unaccepted Symbol 
                 1 
                 Unexpected symbol reception 
                 B 
               
               
                 Symbol Normal 
                 1 
                 Symbol Normal received 
                 B 
               
               
                 Symbol Alarm 
                 1 
                 Symbol Alarm received 
                 B 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The flags shall be set when the communication controller detects one of the listed errors or events. (See Sections ‘Channel Status and Error Information (CSEI)’ and ‘Frame Reception’) If the host checks the vector, it must reset the values so that the CC can update them. 
     The communication controller shall provide a General Error Interrupt, which shall be triggered when any of the flags is set, provided the corresponding interrupt is enabled. 
     General Interrupt Enable Register 
     The CC shall provide for each general interrupt indication flag a General Interrupt Enable flag. The settings in the General Interrupt Enable Register determine which status changes in the General Interrupt Register shall result in an interrupt. 
     Receive Interrupt Status Register 
     The communication controller shall provide a Receive Interrupt Status Register to indicate the reception of a valid frame (stored in one of the receive buffers), a Collision Avoidance Symbol (CAS), a Wake-up Symbol, a Media Access Test Symbol (MTS), an Event Indication 
     Symbol (EIS), a Status Normal Symbol (SNS), a Status Alarm Symbol (SAS) or an optical diagnosis signal (when using an optical physical layer). The flags shall be set by the CC when a corresponding event occurs. If enabled, an interrupt is pending while one of the bits is set. If the host checks the vector, it must reset the values so that the CC can update them. 
     Following read-only bits shall be readable by host: 
     Receive Interrupt Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when a frame was received and stored in one of the dedicated receive buffers. 
     Receive FIFO Not Empty Interrupt Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when a frame was received and stored in one of the FIFO buffers. 
     Receive FIFO Overrun Interrupt Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when a Receive FIFO Overrun was detected. 
     Collision Avoidance Symbol Interrupt Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when a CAS was received. 
     Wake-Up Symbol Interrupt Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when a Wake-up Symbol was received. 
     Media Access Test Symbol Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when a MTS was received. 
     Event Indication Symbol Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when an EIS was received. 
     Optical Diagnosis Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when an optical diagnosis signal was received. 
     Status Normal Symbol Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when a SNS was received. 
     Status Alarm Symbol Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when a SAS was received. 
     Network Management Vector Change Flag 
     The flag shall be set by the CC when the optional NM services are implemented, and a change in the NM vector occurred. (See below) 
     Receive Interrupt Enable Register 
     The communication controller shall provide a Receive Interrupt Enable Register to enable each of the Receive Interrupt Status Register flags separately. The settings in the Receive Interrupt Enable Register determine which status changes in the Receive Interrupt Status Register shall result in an interrupt. 
     General Error and Status Interrupt Enable Register 
     The CC shall provide an interrupt enable flag to individually enable each of the following status and errors: 
     Clock Correction Failure; This flag enables an interrupt whenever one of the following errors occur:
         Missing Rate Correction Signal (MRCS)   Missing Offset Correction Signal (MOCS)   Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC) stopped at 15   Clock Correction Limit Reached (CCLR)   The interrupt shall be raised at the end of the cycle after the listed errors have been checked.       

     Protocol Error State; This flag enables an interrupt whenever the error state will change from “Green” to “Yellow” or to “Red”. 
     Startup: This flag enables an interrupt whenever one of the following events occur:
         Coldstart max reached   Coldstart path has been entered due to the expiration of pStartupNoise   Normal state entered via coldstart path   Plausibility check failed (during startup)
 
Bus Guardian Schedule Monitoring Error (BGME)
 
Media Access Test Warning
       

     Wakeup; This flag enables an interrupt whenever one of the following events occur:
         Frame Header Received during Wakeup   Wakeup Symbol Received   Wakeup Failed   Wakeup Complete       

     The settings in the General Error and Status Interrupt Enable Register determine which status or error flags changes shall result in an interrupt. (See above) 
     Requirements for Optional Mechanisms 
     Network Management Services 
     If NM services are supported, the CHI shall provide the following:
         four bits to configure the length of the NM vector (gNetworkManagementVectorLength), (0 to 12 bytes); may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The configured length must be identical in all nodes of a cluster.   one bit to configure the starting point of the NM vector in the data field (byte 0 if bit not set, byte 2 if bit set); may be modified only in CC 13  SoftReset. The configured starting point must be identical in all nodes of a cluster.   one register (with in the implementation specified 8 to 12 bytes) to hold the NM vector as a result of a logical OR operation over all received NM vectors in the previous cycle. The CC shall perform the OR operation over all NM vectors out of all received NM frames with the fNMIndicationBit set. (See Section ‘Network Management Indication Bit’) The CC shall update the NM vector at the end of the cycle.   one interrupt flag to signal a change in the NM vector visible to the host.   one interrupt enable bit.
 
Optical Diagnosis Flags
 
If the optical diagnosis service is supported, the CHI shall provide the following:
       

     Two Optical Diagnosis Flags (one for each channel) 
     The flags shall be set by the CC when too low optical power was received by the optical transceiver and signaled to the CC. If the host checks the flags, it must reset them so that the CC can update them. 
     Implementation Example 
     Mailbox Buffer Control Register Fields 
     The CHI shall provide one Buffer Control Register to configure the message mailbox buffers (as Transmit, Dedicated Receive or FIFO Receive buffer) and to control host&#39;s access to the message buffers. 
     This control register shall provide one byte for each mailbox buffer. 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 57 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Mailbox Buffer Control Register Fields 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Control 
                   
                   
                   
                 FIFO 
                   
               
               
                 Flag 
                 Bits 
                 Tx Buffer 
                 Rx Buffer 
                 Buffer 
                 Comment 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 CFG 
                 1 
                 ‘1’ = Transmit Buffer 
                 ‘0’ = Receive Buffer 
                 ‘0’ 
                 Message Buffer 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Configuration Bit 
               
               
                 CFG_SR 
                 1 
                 ‘1’ = Mailbox Buffer 
                 ‘1’ = Buffer and the 
                 — 
                 ‘0’ = Mailbox 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and the associated filter 
                 associated filter can 
                   
                 Buffer and the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 can be configured only 
                 be configured only 
                   
                 associated filter 
               
               
                   
                   
                 during CC_SoftReset. 
                 during CC_SoftReset. 
                   
                 can be configured 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 during normal 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 operation. 
               
               
                 Transmission 
                 1 
                 ‘1’ = Single-shot Mode 
                 — 
                 — 
                 only for static 
               
               
                 Mode 
                   
                 (transmit Null Frame if 
                   
                   
                 slots 
               
               
                   
                   
                 buffer not updated, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Commit flag = ‘0’) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ‘0’ = Continuous Mode 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (See above) 
               
               
                 Commit 
                 1 
                 ‘0’ = buffer not 
                 ‘1’ = buffer updated 
                 — 
                 Commit Flag 
               
               
                 Flag 
                   
                 updated, ‘1’ = buffer 
                 (valid), ‘0’ = not 
               
               
                   
                   
                 committed for 
                 updated; Host shall 
               
               
                   
                   
                 transmission; Host 
                 explicitly clear the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 explicitly sets the 
                 flag after reading the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Commit flag when the 
                 data. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 buffer is ready for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 transmit. The Commit 
               
               
                   
                   
                 flag is reset by the CC 
               
               
                   
                   
                 after transmission has 
               
               
                   
                   
                 been completed in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Single-shot” mode 
               
               
                   
                   
                 only. (See above). 
               
               
                 IENA 
                 1 
                 ‘1’ = Interrupt enabled 
                 ‘1’ = Interrupt 
                 — 
                 Commit Interrupt 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 enabled 
                   
                 Enable 
               
               
                 ABTRQ 
                 1 
                 ‘1’ = Abort request; 
                 — 
                 — 
                 Abort Request 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Message shall be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 aborted at next start of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 cycle if transmission has 
               
               
                   
                   
                 not been started before. 
               
               
                 ABTAK 
                 1 
                 ‘1’ = Message has 
                 — 
                 — 
                 Abort 
               
               
                   
                   
                 been aborted. 
                   
                   
                 Acknowledge 
               
               
                 LOCK 
                 1 
                 ‘1’ = lock, ‘0’ = release 
                 ‘1’ = lock, 
                 — 
                 Message Buffer 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 ‘0’ = release 
                   
                 Lock. A locked 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 buffer is visible to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 the host. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     (Note: The host can modify the control flags CFG and CFG_SR only during CC 13  SoftReset.) 
     Indication of Bus Events 
     The communication controller shall provide additional output signals to indicate the following events: 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                 TABLE 58 
               
             
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Bus Event Indication 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 Event 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Status Normal Symbol 
                 SET_SNSIF 
               
               
                 (SNS)detected on bus 
               
               
                 Status Alarm Symbol (SAS) 
                 SET_SASIF 
               
               
                 detected on bus 
               
               
                 Correct message was received 
                 SET_RCVMSG, even if message is not 
               
               
                 which may be copied into a 
                 copied into any buffer (in case no 
               
               
                 receive buffer 
                 adequate receive buffer is configured) 
               
               
                 One of following errors detected 
                 SET_ERRIF 
               
               
                 during the receive process: 
               
               
                 S_TssViolation, 
               
               
                 S_HeaderCodingError, 
               
               
                 S_InvalidHeaderCRC, 
               
               
                 S_FrameCodingError, 
               
               
                 S_InvalidFrameCRC. (See 
               
               
                 Section ‘Syntactical 
               
               
                 Correctness’) 
               
               
                 Slot mismatch detected 
                 SET_SLMM 
               
               
                 (S_FrameIDError). (See Section 
               
               
                 ‘Frame Acceptance’) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     The exact attribution of events to interrupt vectors or lines shall be described in the documentation of the respective communication controller implementation. 
     In order to enable error monitoring in a star node the communication controller shall provide four output signals with the setting of internal status flags indicated by means of a pulse. 
     The  FIG. 102  shows which internal events should be indicated externally as SLMM, ERR, ROK and SOC signals. 
     If an internal event is indicated, the corresponding signal shall be switched to the active state for a defined time, in order to generate a short logical “1” signal with a duration of at least 50 ns. 
     The SLMM signal confirms the reception of a frame with a correct format and correct CRC, even if the frame identifier deviates from the slot counter value at reception time. 
     The ERR signal indicates an error as described above. 
     The ROK signal indicates that a correct frame or a valid symbol has been received even if the message was not copied into a buffer in the communication controller. 
     The SOC signal confirms that a valid SOC symbol (Normal or Alarm) has been received or sent. It can be used to trigger timers or to start synchronized software tasks with every SOC. 
     Every communication controller should be able to generate at least the signals ERR, ROK and SOC. 
     System Parameters 
     The following parameters are used in the description of the present invention. Any values and ranges of the parameters are given by way of example and imply no restriction what so ever. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Description 
                 Value 
                 Unit 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Protocol Constants 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 cControllerMax 
                 The maximum number of nodes in a cluster 
                  64 
                 — 
               
               
                 cCycleMax 
                 The maximum cycle counter in a cluster 
                  63 
                 — 
               
               
                 cMaxChannels 
                 The maximum number of supported channels 
                   2 
                 — 
               
               
                 cPaddingValue 
                 Value of the data byte used for padding of 
                   0 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 static frames in case pMaxPayloadLength is 
               
               
                   
                 smaller than fPayloadLength 
               
               
                 cPayloadLengthMax 
                 Maximum length of the payload segment of a 
                  127 
                 2-byte 
               
               
                   
                 frame 
                   
                 words 
               
               
                 cSlotIDMax 
                 The highest slot ID number 
                 4095 
                 — 
               
               
                 cStarCouplersMax 
                 The largest allowed number of cascaded star 
                   3 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 couplers between any two nodes in a cluster 
               
               
                 cSyncNodeMax 
                 The maximum possible number of sync nodes 
                 TBD 
                 — 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Global Cluster Constants 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 gChannels 
                 The number of channels supported by the 
                 1-cMaxChannels 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 cluster. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: there is also a node constant 
               
               
                   
                 pChannels, which reflects the connectivity of 
               
               
                   
                 each specific node 
               
               
                 gColdStartMax 
                 The maximum number of times that a node 
                 0-TBD 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 in this cluster is permitted to attempt to start 
               
               
                   
                 the cluster by initiating schedule 
               
               
                   
                 synchronization 
               
               
                 gdActionPointOffset 
                 The offset of the action point 
                 1-TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                 gdBGArmActive 
                 Duration of the Bus Guardian ARM signal low 
                   1 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 condition 
               
               
                 gdBGDynSegment 
                 Bus Guardian dynamic segment length 
                  0-65534 
                 MT 
               
               
                 gdBGpostEnablePart 
                 Bus Guardian ISG part that follows a guarded 
                 0-TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 schedule element 
               
               
                 gdBGpreEnablePart 
                 Bus Guardian ISG part that precedes a 
                 0-TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 guarded schedule element 
               
               
                 gdBGStaticSlot 
                 Bus Guardian Static slot length (Does not 
                 0 to 4095 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 include the inter-slot gap.) 
               
               
                 gdBGSymbolWindow 
                 Bus Guardian symbol window length 
                 0 to 255 
                 MT 
               
               
                 gdBGWatchdogDisable 
                 Bus Guardian watchdog disable time 
                 1 to 255 
                 MT 
               
               
                 gdBit 
                 The configured duration of one bit. The value 
                 TBD 
                 ns 
               
               
                   
                 is derived from gBitRate. 
               
               
                 gdCycle 
                 The duration of one communication cycle in 
                 250-64000 
                 μs 
               
               
                   
                 this cluster 
               
               
                 gdCycleMax 
                 Maximum duration of a byteflight 
                 TBD 
                 ?? 
               
               
                   
                 communication cycle 
               
               
                 gdCycleMIn 
                 Minimum duration of a byteflight 
                 TBD 
                 ?? 
               
               
                   
                 communication cycle 
               
               
                 gdDynamicSlotIdlePhase 
                 The duration of the dynamic slot idle phase 
                 1-TBD 
                 Minislots 
               
               
                 gdInitialColdstartPhase 
                 Period for which a node remain in 
                 3* gdCycle + gdSlot 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 CC_ColdStartICW state, if no incident causes 
               
               
                   
                 the transition into CC_StartupListen 
               
               
                   
                 beforehand; 
               
               
                   
                 this is not a configuration parameter 
               
               
                 gdMaxDrift 
                 Maximum drift offset between two node that 
                 TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 operate with unsynchronized clocks over one 
               
               
                   
                 communication cycle 
               
               
                 gdMedPropagationDelay 
                 The medium expected propagation delay of a 
                 TBD 
                 μT 
               
               
                 (not a global constant) 
                 signal (including transceiver delays, wire 
               
               
                   
                 delays and controller internal delays) in the 
               
               
                   
                 cluster 
               
               
                 gdMinislot 
                 The duration of a minislot 
                 2-TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                 gdMsActionPointOffset 
                 The offset of the action point within the 
                 1-TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 minislot 
               
               
                 gdNIT 
                 The duration of the network idle time 
                 TBD-TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                 gdStartup 
                 Upper limit for the listen-timeout in 
                 gdStartup = gdCycle + gdMaxDrift 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 CC_StartupListen state (before a sync node is 
               
               
                   
                 allowed to become a coldstart node). See 
               
               
                   
                 also vdStartup. 
               
               
                 gdStaticSlot 
                 The duration of a static slot. 
                 2-TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                 gdSymbolWindow 
                 The duration of the symbol window 
                 0-TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                 gSyncNodeMax 
                 The maximum number of sync nodes allowed 
                  0-16 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 for this cluster 
               
               
                 gdWakeup 
                 Upper limit for the listen-timeout in 
                 gdWakeup = gdStartupt = 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 CC_WakeupListen state (before a sync-Node is 
                 gdCycle + gdMaxDrift 
               
               
                   
                 allowed to transmit the Tx-wakeup pattern); (this 
               
               
                   
                 is not a configuration parameter) 
               
               
                 gdWakeupMaxCollision 
                 Duration of ‘active low’ on the bus that a 
                 TBD 
                 gdBit 
               
               
                   
                 communication controller sending a Tx- 
               
               
                   
                 wakeup pattern accepts during the idle phase 
               
               
                   
                 of the pattern without re-entering the 
               
               
                   
                 CC_WakeupListen state. 
               
               
                 gdWakeupPattern 
                 Maximal number of repetitions of the Tx- 
                  15 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 wakeup symbol to be sent during the 
               
               
                   
                 CC_WakeupSend state of any Node in the 
               
               
                   
                 cluster. 
               
               
                 gdWakeupSymbolRxIdleMin 
                 The equivalent of 6 μs minus a safe part. 
                 TBD 
                 gdBit 
               
               
                   
                 (Collisions, clock differences and other effects 
               
               
                   
                 can deform the Tx-wakeup pattern.) To be 
               
               
                   
                 used by the communication controller for the 
               
               
                   
                 ‘idle’ part of the CheckRxWakeupSymbol test 
               
               
                 gdWakeupSymbolRxLow 
                 The equivalent of 6 μs minus a safe part. 
                 TBD 
                 gdBit 
               
               
                   
                 (Active stars, clock differences and other 
               
               
                   
                 effects can deform the Tx-wakeup pattern.) 
               
               
                   
                 To be used by the communication controller 
               
               
                   
                 for the ‘active low’ parts of the 
               
               
                   
                 CheckRxWakeupSymbol test 
               
               
                 gdWakeupSymbolRxWindow 
                 The equivalent of 30 μs plus a safe part. 
                 TBD 
                 gdBit 
               
               
                   
                 (Clock differences and other effects can 
               
               
                   
                 deform the Tx-wakeup pattern.) To be used 
               
               
                   
                 by the communication controller for the 
               
               
                   
                 CheckRxWakeupSymbol test 
               
               
                 gdWakeupSymbolTxIdle 
                 The equivalent of 18 μs (rounded up). To be 
                 TBD 
                 gdBit 
               
               
                   
                 used by the communication controller for the 
               
               
                   
                 transmission of the ‘idle’ part of the Tx-wakeup 
               
               
                   
                 symbol 
               
               
                 gdWakeupSymbolTxLow 
                 The equivalent of 6 μs (rounded up). To be 
                 TBD 
                 gdBit 
               
               
                   
                 used by the communication controller for the 
               
               
                   
                 transmission of the ‘active low’ part of the 
               
               
                   
                 Tx-wakeup symbol 
               
               
                 gMacroPerCycle 
                 The configured duration of the cluster cycle in 
                 TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 macroticks 
               
               
                 gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal 
                 Threshold concerning CCFC. Defines when the 
                 [gMaxWithout 
                 Number 
               
               
                   
                 CC shall change from green or yellow into red 
                 ClockCorrectionPassive-15] 
                 of even/ 
               
               
                   
                 error state 
                   
                 odd cycle 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 pairs 
               
               
                 gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive 
                 Threshold concerning CCFC. Defines when the 
                  1-7 
                 Number 
               
               
                   
                 CC shall change from green into yellow error 
                   
                 of even/ 
               
               
                   
                 state 
                   
                 odd cycle 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 pairs 
               
               
                 gMsgIdFilter 
                 Indicates that Message ID filtering is used 
                 Boolean 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 within the cluster and that the first two bytes 
               
               
                   
                 of the payload segment contain Message ID 
               
               
                   
                 data 
               
               
                 gNetworkManagementVectorLength 
                 Length of the Network Management vector in 
                  0-12 
                 Bytes 
               
               
                   
                 a cluster 
               
               
                 gNumberOfMinislots 
                 The duration of the dynamic segment 
                 0-TBD 
                 Mini slots 
               
               
                 gNumberOfStaticSlots 
                 The number of static slots in the static 
                 1-cSlotIDMax 
                 Slots 
               
               
                   
                 segment. 
               
               
                 gOffsetCorrectionInitOut 
                 The maximum offset value permitted for the 
                 TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 first offset correction in CC_IntegrationVCW 
               
               
                   
                 state. (This constant is the basis for the 
               
               
                   
                 calculation of the controller specific 
               
               
                   
                 parameter (see pOffsetCorrectionInitOut)) 
               
               
                 gOffsetCorrectionOut 
                 The maximum offset correction permitted. 
                 TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 (This constant is the basis for the calculation 
               
               
                   
                 of the controller specific parameter (see 
               
               
                   
                 pOffsetCorrectionOut)) 
               
               
                 gPayloadLengthStatic 
                 Globally configured payload length of a static 
                 0-cPayloadLengthMax 
                 2-byte 
               
               
                   
                 frame 
                   
                 words 
               
               
                 gRateCorrectionOut 
                 The maximum rate correction permitted (This 
                 TBD 
                 MT 
               
               
                   
                 constant is the basis for the calculation of the 
               
               
                   
                 controller specific parameter (see 
               
               
                   
                 pRateCorrectionOut)) 
               
               
                 gStartupNoise 
                 Upper limit for the start up listen timeout in 
                 TBD 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 the presence of noise. Expressed as a 
               
               
                   
                 multiple of the cluster constant gdStartup. 
               
               
                 gSyncNodeMax 
                 The maximum number of sync nodes allowed 
                 1-cSyncNodeMax 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 in the cluster 
               
               
                 gWakeupMax 
                 The maximum number of times that a Node 
                 TBD 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 in this cluster is permitted to attempt to send 
               
               
                   
                 a Tx-wakeup pattern. 
               
               
                 gWakeupNoise 
                 Upper limit for the wakeup listen timeout in the 
                 gWakeupNoise = gStartupNoise 
                 — 
               
               
                   
                 presence of noise. Expressed as a multiple of the 
               
               
                   
                 cluster constant gdWakeup. 
               
               
                   
                 this is not a configuration parameter! 
               
               
                 gWakeupPattern 
                 Number of repetitions of the Wakeup symbol 
                 2-TBD 
                 — 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Cluster-Wide Technology-Dependent Constants (The constants listed here define implementation-specific restrictions. The specified values apply for the FlexRay bus guardian from Philips. Worst-case restrictions apply to the whole cluster if bus guardian devices from different semiconductor vendors are mixed in a cluster.) 
                                            Name   Description   Range   Unit               gdBGMinMTNom   Minimum nominal MT period   1.0   μs       gdBGMInMTCorr   Minimum corrected MT period   0.5   μs       gdBGMinBGTPeriod   Minimum BGT period   0.25   μs       gdBGMinPwMT   Minimum MT pulse width (low or high)   0.4 * pdMTPeriod   —       gdBGMinPwBGT   Minimum BGT pulse width (low or high)   0.4 * pdBGTPeriod   —                 Node constants                             pBGDynSegEnable   Indicates that a bus guardian enables   Boolean   —           transmission during the dynamic segment       pBGMatEnable   Indicates that a bus guardian enables the   Boolean   —           application of the media access test during the           symbol window       pBgsmDynSegDisabled       Boolean   —       pBgsmSymWinDisabled       Boolean   —       pBGSymWinEnable   Indicates that a bus guardian enables   Boolean   —           transmission during the symbol window       pChannels   number of channels supported by the node   1-gChannels   —           (Note: there is also a cluster constant           gChannels)       pClusterDriftDamping   Cluster drift damping value used in clock   TBD   μT           synchronization to minimize accumulation of           rounding errors       pdBgeDynamicDuration   Duration of the BGE active phase during the   0-65534   MT           BG dynamic segment       pdBgeStaticDuration   Duration of the BGE active phase during active   0-4095   MT           static slots       pdBgeSymbolDuration   Duration of the BGE active phase during the   0-255   MT           BG symbol window       pdBGMTPeriod   Configured nominal Bus Guardian MT period   TBD   μs       pdBGTPeriod   Configured Bus Guardian BGT period   TBD   μs       pdCycleWithHistory   Upper limit for timeout that covers a period,   gdStartup   MT           which is large enough that any periodic           transmission that complies to the global           communication schedule is visible for an           unsynchronized node at least once (Note: this           is not a configuration parameter)       pdEISSymbCycleMax   Slave node, maximal appearance interval for   TBD   MT           the CC trigger       pdEISSymbCycleMin   Slave node, minimal appearance interval for   TBD   MT           the CC trigger       pDelayCompensationChA   Value used to compensate for reception delays       μT           on channel A       pDelayCompensationChB   Value used to compensate for reception delays       μT           on channel B       pdExTrigCycleMax   For the master node in an Event Triggered   TBD   MT           Mode system, maximal appearance interval for           the CC trigger       pdExTrigCycleMin   Master node, minimal appearance interval for   TBD   MT           the CC trigger       pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT   Master node, duration between reference point   TBD   μT           in the EIS symbol and begin of next cycle           (which is also the end of NIT)       pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT   Slave node, duration between reference point   TBD   μT           in the EIS symbol and begin of next cycle           (which is also the end of NIT)       pdTSS   Duration of the Transmission Start Sequence   1-15   gdBit       pdWakeupPattern   Number of repetitions of the Tx-wakeup   0-gdWakeupPattern   —           symbol to be sent during the CC_WakeupSend           state.       pEdgeSamples   Width of the edge detection window in the Bit   TBD   —           Clock Alignment procedure       pLatestTx   The number of the last minislot in which   0-TBD   Minislots           transmission can start in the dynamic segment           for the respective node       pMaster   Denotes that the node is configured as the   Boolean   —           sync master in byteflight mode       pMaxPayloadLength   Maximum number of payload data bytes   12-127   2-byte           stored in a message buffer       words       pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom   The node-specific initial value of the node   TBD   μT           variable vRateCorrection       pMicroPerMacroMax   Maximum number of microticks for one   TBD   μT           macrotick       pMicroPerMacroMin   Minimum number of microticks for one   TBD   μT           macrotick       pMicroPerMacroNom   The nominal (uncorrected) number of   TBD   μT           microticks in a macrotick       pOffsetCorrectionInitOut   Parameter determining the upper and lower   TBD   μT           boundaries between the red and green areas           of the clock offset correction term, applied           only the first time an offset correction term is           available in CC_IntegrationVCW state,           expressed in node-local microticks.           pOffsetCorrectionOut = gOffsetCorrectionInitOut *           pMicroPerMacroNom       pOffsetCorrectionOut   Parameter determining the upper and lower   TBD   μT           boundaries between the red and green areas           of the clock offset correction term, expressed           in node-local microticks. pOffsetCorrectionOut =           gOffsetCorrectionOut * pMicroPerMacroNom       pRateCorrectionInitOut   Parameter determining the upper and lower   TBD   μT           boundaries for the initial rate correction           allowed for rate adoption during CC_InitSync           state       pRateCorrectionOut   Parameter determining the upper and lower   TBD   μT           boundaries between the red and green areas           of the clock rate correction term, expressed in           node-local microticks. pRateCorrectionOut =           gRateCorrectionOut * pMicroPerMacroNom       pSamplesPerBit   The number of samples taken in the   TBD   —           determination of a bit value       pSyncNode   Indicates that the node is a sync node (sync   Boolean   —           slot configured; connected to gChannels)       pSyncSlot   The number of the static slot in which a sync   0-cSlotIDMax   Slots           frame shall be sent, if a sync frame shall be           sent.       pVotingOffset   Number of samples skipped prior to the voting   TBD   —           window in bit value voting       pVotingSamples   Numbers of samples used in bit value voting   TBD   —                 Node variables                             IbgsmRule   Local variable for BG schedule monitoring   BGE_X,   —           service   BGE_ENABLED,               BGE_DISABLED       vBgsmError   Variable indicating that the Bus Guardian   Boolean   —           Schedule Monitoring service has detected an           error       vBgsmErrorAck   Variable allowing the host to acknowledge the   Boolean   —           detection of a Bus Guardian Schedule           Monitoring error       vCCLR   The calculated rate correction value or   Boolean   —           calculated offset correction value is beyond the           specified limit       vColdStartCount   Counter for number of cycles/transitions for   0-gColdStartMax   —           which the node has been in the coldstart path       vColdStartInhibit   Denotes that the node is not allowed to enter   Boolean   —           coldstart path       vCurrentSlot   Number of the current slot. Note that this is   1-cMaxStaticSlot   slots           slightly different to fFrameID as it is           independent of frame reception.       vCycle   Cycle counter of the current communication   0-gCycleMax   —           cycle       vdCycleWithHistory   Timeout counter that covers a period, which is   0-pdCycleWithHistory   MT           large enough that any periodic transmission           that complies to the global communication           schedule is visible for an unsynchronized node           at least once       vdInitialColdStartPhase   Timer for the period for which a node remain   0-gdInitialColdStartPhase   MT           in CC_ColdStartICW state, if no incident           causes the transition into CC_StartupListen           beforehand       vdStartup   Listen-timeout (counter) in CC_StartupListen   0-gdStartup   MT           state       vdStartupNoise   Listen-timeout (counter) with noise in   0-pdStartupNoise * gdStartup   MT           CC_StartupListen state       vdWakeup   Listen-timeout (counter) in CC_WakeupListen   0-gdWakeup   MT           state for fast Wakeup.       vdWakeupNoise   Listen-timeout (counter) in CC_WakeupListen   0-gdWakeupNoise * gdWakeup   MT           state.       vErrorHandlingLevel   Current Error Handling Level   [Green, Yellow,   —               Red]       vGloNMVec   The network management vector provided by   Bit vector of 12   —           the CHI service “network management”   bytes       vInvalidSyncCount[ch]   Counters for invalid SYNCFrame startupVCW     0-31   —           decisions; assigned per channel       vListenOnly   Denotes that the node is not allowed to   Boolean   —           transmit       vMacrotick   Macrotick counter, number of the current   TBD   MT           macrotick       vMeasureChx   Measure time; time difference between the   TBD           expected and the observed arrival time of a           frame with respect of run time compensation       vMicroPerMacroCorr   Actual number of microticks during the current   TBD   μT           (corrected) macrotick. The value of           vMicroPerMacroCorr can change from           macrotick to macrotick in a cycle.       vMicrotick   Microtick counter, number of the current   TBD   μT           microtick       vMOCS   The calculation of an offset correction value   TBD   Boolean           was not possible in the clock synchronization           mechanism       vMRCS   The calculation of a rate correction value was   TBD   Boolean           not possible in the clock synchronization           mechanism       vNoise   Denotes that coldstart path has been entered   Boolean   —           due to the expiration of pdStartupNoise       vObservedArrivalTimeChx   Time when a frame arrived   TBD   TBD       vOffsetCorrection   Signed integer indicating the number of   TBD   μT           microticks the node should shift the start of its           communication cycle.       VoffsetCorrectionExternal   External correction term for the offset   TBD   μT           correction       vOffsetOut   Denotes that the application of the extended   Boolean   —           limit setting for the offset correction term           check is prohibited       vRateCorrection   Rate correction value; number of microticks   TBD   μT           which should the added or subtracted from a           communication cycle       vRateCorrectionExternal   External correction term for the rate correction   TBD   μT       vRefSync   The identifier of the sync frame which was   0-4095   —           originally used to enter the integration path       vRxSymbol   Denotes which symbol was received during the   [no_symbol,   —           symbol window   SNS, SAS, MTS]       vSlotCounter[ch]   Slot counter for channel ch   0-cSlotIDMax   Slots       vsMeasureEvenList   List of the time difference values (observed   TBD   μT           time minus expected time) measured for sync           frames received during an even cycle. (Note:           If valid sync frames are received on both           channels the list entry corresponds to the           difference value associated with the earlier           sync frame (after taking delay compensation           into account)       vsMeasureOddList   List of the time difference values (observed   TBD   μT           time minus expected time) measured for sync           frames received during an odd cycle.       vSMMS   Indicates that the CC has received a set of   TBD   Boolean           sync frames during protocol startup phase that           did not result in a majority of the sync frames           agreeing with the local view of the system           time       vSyncPairs   The number of corresponding sync pairs   0-gSyncNodeMax   —           gathered during the rate measurement phase           and available for calculation of the rate           correction term       vTxSymbol   Denotes which symbol is to be transmitted   [no_symbol,   —           during the symbol window   SNS, SAS, MTS]       vValidSyncCount[ch]   Counters for valid SYNCFrame StartupVCW     0-gSyncNodeMax   —           decisions; assigned per channel       vValidSyncFrameCount   Counter for valid SYNCFrame StartupPCW  decisions   0-cSyncNodeMax   —           per slot during gdPlausibilityCheckWindow       vWakeup   Status flag indicating the abort of wakeup due   TBD   —       SymbolReceived   to a received Rx-wakeup symbol.       vWakeupChannel   Variable that defines which channel shall be   TBD   —           woken. It captures the value of the ‘Wake Up           Channel Select’ control bit.       vWakeupComplete   Status flag indicating the transmission of a Tx-   TBD   —           wakeup pattern.       vWakeupCount   Counter for number of attempts to transmit Tx-   0-gWakeupMax   —           wakeup patterns.       vWakeupFailed   Status flag indicating the abort of wakeup due   TBD   —           to gWakeupMax aborted attempts to send a Tx-           wakeup pattern.       vWakeupFrame   Status flag indicating the abort of the wakeup   TBD   —       HeaderReceived   due to a frame header.                         Frame Variables                                 Name   Length   Description                       fCycleCount   6   Cycle count           fData   0 ... 2032   Data           fData[x]   8   Byte x of the data from                   fFrameData           fFrameCRC   24   Frame CRC           fFrameID   12   Frame ID           fHeaderCRC   11   Header CRC           fLocNMVec   96   Network management vector extracted from the frame&#39;s                   payload section if fNMIndicationBit is set to one           fMessageID   16   Message ID           fNMIndicationBit   1   Network management indication bit           fNullFrameIndicationBit   1   Null frame indication bit           fPayloadLength   7   Payload length           fReservedBit   1   Reserved bit           fSyncBit   1   Sync bit                             Event Indications                             Name   Description   Range   Unit               S_CASReception   Indicates the reception of a valid CAS symbol on one   Event   —           of the configured channels       S_ChannelIdleCodingError       Event   —       S_CorrectFrame   Indicates the reception of a syntactically correct   Event   —           frame that successfully passed all frame reception           criteria       S_CycleCounterError       Event   —       S_CycleCountError   Indicates the violation of the corresponding static   Event   —           segment acceptance criterion       S_CycleCountError       Event   —       S_EmptySlot       Event   —       S_FrameCodingError       Event   —       S_FrameIDError   Indicates the violation of the corresponding static   Event   —           segment acceptance criterion       S_FrameIDError       Event   —       S_HeaderCodingError       Event   —       S_IllegalNullFrame       Event   —       S_IllegalSyncBit       Event   —       S_InvalidDTSError       Event   —       S_InvalidFrameCRCError       Event   —       S_InvalidFrameLengthError       Event   —       S_InvalidHeaderCRCError       Event   —       S_PayloadLengthError       Event   —       S_PayloadLengthStaticError   Denotes the violation of the corresponding static   Event   —           segment acceptance criterion       S_SuccessfulHeaderReception   Denotes the reception of a frame header on one of   Event   —           the configured channels       S_TransmissionConflictError       Event   —       S_Trig_Symb_Failure   Event indication symbol Failure   Event   —       S_TSSError       Event   —       S_ValidEvenStartupFrame   Denotes the reception of a sync frame with an even   Event   —           fCycleCount that passed the startup acceptance           criteria       S_ValidFrame       Event   —       S_ValidOddStartupFrame   Denotes the reception of a sync frame with an odd   Event   —           fCycleCount that passed the startup acceptance           criteria       S_ValidStartupFrame   Denotes the reception of a sync frame that passed   Event   —           the startup acceptance criteria                    
Glossary
 
     In the following glossary some of the terms used for the description of the present invention are defined. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 μT 
                 Microtick 
               
               
                 Application Data 
                 Data produced and/or used by application tasks. In the automotive 
               
               
                   
                 context the term ‘signal’ is often used for application data exchanged 
               
               
                   
                 among tasks. 
               
               
                 BCA 
                 Bit Clock Alignment 
               
               
                 BD 
                 Bus Driver 
               
               
                 BDe 
                 Electrical Bus Driver 
               
               
                 BDo 
                 Optical Bus Driver 
               
               
                 BF 
                 byteflight (protocol mode) 
               
               
                 BG 
                 Bus Guardian 
               
               
                 BGME 
                 Bus Guardian Schedule Monitor Error (error signal) 
               
               
                 BGSM 
                 Bus Guardian Schedule Monitor 
               
               
                 BSD 
                 Bit Stream Decoding 
               
               
                 BSS 
                 Byte Start Sequence 
               
               
                 Bus 
                 A communication channel in bus topology. Sometimes the word “bus” 
               
               
                   
                 is used as synonym for communication channel. 
               
               
                 byteflight 
                 Communication network developed by BMW AG, Motorola, ELMOS, 
               
               
                   
                 Infineon, Siemens EC, Steinbeis Transferzentrum für 
               
               
                   
                 Prozessautomatisierung, and IXXAT. 
               
               
                 CAS 
                 Collision Avoidance Symbol 
               
               
                 CC 
                 Communication Controller—The device that implements the FlexRay 
               
               
                   
                 protocol 
               
               
                 CCFC 
                 Clock Correction Failed Counter 
               
               
                 CCLR 
                 Clock Correction Limit Reached (error signal) 
               
               
                 CCMS 
                 Coldstart Count Maximum Signal (error signal) 
               
               
                 Channel Idle 
                 The condition of medium idle as perceived by each individual node in 
               
               
                   
                 the network. 
               
               
                 CHI 
                 Controller Host Interface 
               
               
                 Cluster 
                 A communication system of two or more nodes connected via at least 
               
               
                   
                 one communication channel directly (bus topology) or by star 
               
               
                   
                 couplers (star topology). 
               
               
                 Communication 
                 The inter-node connection through which signals are conveyed for the 
               
               
                 Channel 
                 purpose of communication. The communication channel abstracts 
               
               
                   
                 both the network topology, i.e. bus or star, as well as the physical 
               
               
                   
                 transmission medium, i.e. electrical or optical. 
               
               
                 CRC 
                 Cyclic Redundancy Code 
               
               
                 CSEI 
                 Channel Status and Error Information 
               
               
                 Cycle Time 
                 Time for one communication cycle. 
               
               
                 DTS 
                 Dynamic Trailing Sequence 
               
               
                 Dynamic Segment 
                 Portion of the communication cycle where the media access is 
               
               
                   
                 controlled via a mini-slotting scheme, also known as Flexible Time 
               
               
                   
                 Division Media Access (FTDMA). During this segment access to the 
               
               
                   
                 media is dynamically granted on a priority basis to nodes with data to 
               
               
                   
                 transmit. 
               
               
                 Dynamic Slot 
                 Variable duration unit used to control media access in the dynamic 
               
               
                   
                 segment of a communication cycle. A dynamic slot is comprised of 
               
               
                   
                 one or more minislots, as determined by the minislot FTDMA/ 
               
               
                   
                 minislot media access scheme. The duration of a dynamic slot can 
               
               
                   
                 vary from slot to slot in a given cycle, and from cycle to cycle for a 
               
               
                   
                 given slot. Only one node may transmit in any given dynamic slot/ 
               
               
                   
                 channel combination. 
               
               
                 EIS 
                 Event Indication Symbol 
               
               
                 ET 
                 Event Triggered (protocol mode) 
               
               
                 FES 
                 Frame End Sequence 
               
               
                 FIFO 
                 First In, First Out (data buffer structure) 
               
               
                 Frame 
                 A structure used by the communication system to exchange 
               
               
                   
                 information within the system. A frame consists of a header segment, 
               
               
                   
                 a payload segment and a trailer segment. The payload segment is 
               
               
                   
                 used to convey application data. 
               
               
                 FSEI 
                 Frame Status and Error Information 
               
               
                 FTDMA 
                 Flexible Time Division Multiple Access (media access method). This is 
               
               
                   
                 another name for the minislot based media access method. 
               
               
                 Hamming Distance 
                 The minimum distance (i.e., the number of bits which differ) between 
               
               
                   
                 any two codewords in a binary code 
               
               
                 ICW 
                 Initial Check Window 
               
               
                 Macrotick 
                 Unit of time derived from the cluster-wide clock synchronization 
               
               
                   
                 algorithm. A macrotick consists of an integral number of microticks— 
               
               
                   
                 the actual number of microticks in a given macrotick is adjusted by 
               
               
                   
                 the clock synchronization algorithm. The macrotick represents the 
               
               
                   
                 smallest granularity unit of the global time. 
               
               
                 Medium Idle 
                 The condition of the physical transmission medium when no node is 
               
               
                   
                 actively transmitting on the physical transmission medium 
               
               
                 Microtick 
                 Unit of time derived directly from the CC&#39;s oscillator. The microtick is 
               
               
                   
                 not affected by the clock synchronization mechanisms, and is thus a 
               
               
                   
                 node-local concept. Different nodes can have microticks of different 
               
               
                   
                 durations. 
               
               
                 Minislot 
                 Fixed duration unit of time that is used to control the minislot/ 
               
               
                   
                 FTDMA media access scheme in the dynamic segment. A minislot 
               
               
                   
                 consists of a configurable number of macroticks. All minislots in a 
               
               
                   
                 cycle have the same duration (expressed in macroticks), and this 
               
               
                   
                 duration is constant from cycle to cycle. 
               
               
                 MOCS 
                 Missing Offset Correction Signal (error signal) 
               
               
                 MRCS 
                 Missing Rate Correction Signal (error signal) 
               
               
                 MT 
                 Macrotick 
               
               
                 MTS 
                 Media Access Test Symbol 
               
               
                 Network Topology 
                 The arrangement of the connections between the nodes. FlexRay 
               
               
                   
                 supports both a bus network topology and a multiple star network 
               
               
                   
                 topology. 
               
               
                 NIT 
                 Network Idle Time 
               
               
                 NM 
                 Network Management 
               
               
                 Node 
                 A device connected to the network that is capable of sending and/or 
               
               
                   
                 receiving frames. 
               
               
                 NRZ 
                 Non-Return to Zero (method of encoding) 
               
               
                 Physical 
                 An inter-node connection through which signals are conveyed for the 
               
               
                 Communication 
                 purpose of communication. All nodes connected to a given Physical 
               
               
                 Link 
                 Communication Link share the same electrical or optical signals (i.e., 
               
               
                   
                 they are not connected through repeaters, stars, gateways, etc.). 
               
               
                   
                 Examples of a Communication Physical Link include a bus network, or 
               
               
                   
                 a point-to-point connection between a node and a star. A 
               
               
                   
                 Communication Channel may be constructed by combining one or 
               
               
                   
                 more Physical Communications Links together using stars. 
               
               
                 SAS 
                 Status Alarm Symbol 
               
               
                 Slot 
                 Either a Static Slot or Dynamic Slot, depending on context. 
               
               
                 SMMS 
                 Startup Majority Missed Signal (error signal) 
               
               
                 SNS 
                 Status Normal Symbol 
               
               
                 Star 
                 A device that allows information to be transferred from one physical 
               
               
                   
                 communication link to one or more other physical communication 
               
               
                   
                 links. A star duplicates information present on one of its links to the 
               
               
                   
                 other links connected to the star, allowing clusters to be built from 
               
               
                   
                 nodes supporting only point-to-point connections. A star can be 
               
               
                   
                 either passive or active. 
               
               
                 Static Segment 
                 Portion of the communication cycle where the media access is 
               
               
                   
                 controlled via a static Time Division Media Access (TDMA) scheme. 
               
               
                   
                 During this segment access to the media is determined solely by the 
               
               
                   
                 passage of time. 
               
               
                 Static Slot 
                 Fixed duration unit of time that is used to control media access in the 
               
               
                   
                 static segment of a communication cycle. All static slots in a cycle 
               
               
                   
                 have the same duration (expressed in macroticks), and this duration 
               
               
                   
                 is constant from cycle to cycle. Only one node may transmit in any 
               
               
                   
                 given a static slot/channel combination. 
               
               
                 Sync Frame 
                 FlexRay frame whose header segment contains information that 
               
               
                   
                 indicates that the deviation measured between the frame&#39;s arrival 
               
               
                   
                 time and its expected arrival time should be used by the clock 
               
               
                   
                 synchronization algorithm. 
               
               
                 TBD 
                 To Be Determined 
               
               
                 TDMA 
                 Time Division Multiple Access (media access method) 
               
               
                 TSS 
                 Transmission Start Sequence 
               
               
                 TT-D 
                 Time Triggered Distributed Synchronization (protocol mode) 
               
               
                 TT-M 
                 Time Triggered Master Controlled Synchronization (protocol mode) 
               
               
                 VCW 
                 Validation Check Window 
               
               
                 WUS 
                 Wakeup Symbol